JP7355138B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine typified by a pachinko machine.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines change the state to a second state that is more advantageous to the player than the first state . Among such conventional gaming machines, a gaming machine has been proposed that continues a state that is easily changed to the second state until a lottery is executed a predetermined number of times.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-147965

However, there is a need for further improvement in interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve a player's interest in playing games.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention includes a first ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and a first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry means. a possible first determining means, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means; a storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of the information acquired by the acquisition means; a second determination means capable of executing a second determination advantageous to the player; and a second determination means for indicating the result of the first determination by the first determination means, or the result of the second determination by the second determination means. A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information on the display means; a bonus game execution means that can execute a bonus game when the identification information is stopped and displayed; a first state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means; and a game ball that is more difficult to enter than the first state. a second state in which the ball enters the ball easily; a variable means that is variable; a first gaming state; and a variable means that allows the game ball to enter the second ball entry means more easily than in the first gaming state a second gaming state in which the means is variably controlled; a gaming state setting means capable of setting a second gaming state; and a performance can be started based on the identification information being dynamically displayed during the second gaming state. The game state setting means includes a first setting for setting the second game state after the bonus game is executed, and a dynamic setting of the identification information during the second game state. a second setting of setting the first gaming state when the end condition is satisfied based on the display; It is possible to start an end suggestion performance for suggesting the end of the second gaming state using a performance period including at least a dynamic display period corresponding to the display, and the bonus game execution means The gaming machine is capable of executing one bonus game from among a plurality of bonus games including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game, and the gaming machine In a case where the bonus game has the right to be executed at a specific timing during the period in which the termination suggestion performance is being executed, the bonus game may be executed after the specific timing. It is possible to determine a mode different from the mode of the performance to be executed when the player does not have the right to execute the bonus game, and as a situation during the performance period, it is possible to newly acquire the right to execute the bonus game. A first situation in which the player is able to understand that the bonus game cannot be executed; It is possible to determine, as the mode of the performance, a mode that allows the player to understand that he/she has the right to execute the second bonus game.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the first ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and the first judgment which can execute the first judgment based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means. means, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball enters the second ball entry means, and acquisition by the acquisition means. storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of the information stored in the storage means; a second determination means capable of executing a second determination; and a display means for displaying identification information for indicating the result of the first determination by the first determination means, or the result of the second determination by the second determination means. a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the specific result of the first determination or the result of the specific second determination by the dynamic display means; a bonus game execution means that can execute a bonus game when displayed, a first state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a first state in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first game state; and a first game state, the variable means being variably controlled so that the game ball enters the second ball entering means more easily than in the first game state. a second game state in which the second game state is set; and a performance start means capable of starting a performance based on the dynamic display of the identification information during the second game state and the gaming state setting means terminates the game based on a first setting for setting the second gaming state after the bonus game is executed, and dynamic display of the identification information during the second gaming state. a second setting of setting the first gaming state when the condition is satisfied; It is possible to start an end suggestion performance for suggesting the end of the second gaming state using a performance period including at least a target display period, and the bonus game execution means is configured to perform a first bonus as the bonus game. One bonus game can be executed from among a plurality of bonus games including at least a game and a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game, and the gaming machine If the privilege game has the right to be executed at a specific timing during the execution period, the privilege game may be executed as an aspect of the performance executed after the specific timing. It is possible to determine a mode different from the mode of the performance that would be executed if the player does not have the bonus game, and the situation during the performance period is such that it is not possible to newly acquire the right to execute the bonus game. A first situation in which it is possible for the player to understand the above, and a second situation in which it is more difficult for the player to understand that the player cannot newly acquire the right to execute the bonus game than in the first situation. It is possible to determine , as a mode of the performance, a mode that allows the player to understand that he/she has the right to execute the second bonus game.

Therefore , there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved .

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of balls in the right area of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of balls in the right area of the game board of the pachinko machine. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing the operational relationship between a storage device provided on a game board of a pachinko machine and a non-electric accessory. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing the internal structure of the second variable winning device 650. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings of the display screen in the third symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the third symbol display device. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of a small winning game of small winning type B that is executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance, and (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of a small winning game of small winning type B that is executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance. It is a timing chart showing the flow of a small winning game of small winning type A that is executed based on the ball entering the ball. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of a small winning game that is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entry port, and (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the small winning game that is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entry port. It is a timing chart showing the flow of a jackpot game to be executed. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow in the first embodiment. It is a timing chart (first half) showing the relationship between the gaming state and the performance state in the first embodiment. It is a timing chart (second half) showing the relationship between the gaming state and the production state in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the game state is a time saving state and the first special symbol starts to fluctuate; It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the state is a time saving state and 40 seconds have elapsed since the first special symbol started changing. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device after a ball enters the second ball entrance while the first special symbol is changing when the game state is a time saving state. (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the gaming state is the time saving state and the first special symbol fluctuation period has one second left. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the fluctuation of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state has stopped, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device after the end of the time saving state. It is a figure showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the variation of the second special symbol is started in the normal state. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the normal state after the end of the time saving state, at the time when the fluctuation of the second special symbol winning the small hit is stopped and displayed; (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when a jackpot game is started based on the small win game displayed in FIG. 18(a). (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when a second jackpot game is started due to a time-saving variation executed after the jackpot game due to V winning ends; b) is a diagram illustrating an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the gaming state is in the time saving state and there are 10 seconds left in the variation period of the first special symbol. (a) shows the display of the third symbol display device when the game state is in the time saving state and the second special symbol is stored on hold due to a ball entering the second ball entrance during a battle performance. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a screen, and (b) is a game state in a time saving state, and the third symbol display device when the ball does not enter the second ball entrance during the battle production. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen. (a) shows an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the gaming state is a time saving state and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is acquired up to the upper limit during the time saving variation of the first special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, and (b) is a game state in a time-saving state, and the privilege performance is being executed when the reserved balls of the second special symbol are acquired up to the upper limit during the time-saving variation of the first special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of a 3rd symbol display device. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the gaming state is the normal state and a small winning game based on the first special symbol is executed; (b) 22(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device during the small winning game shown in FIG. 22(a). (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when a right-handed game is performed while the gaming state is a normal state (left-handed game state), and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in the state where the accessory is being opened. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an overview of various counters. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of ROM in the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical structure of RAM in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the first embodiment, and (d) is the content of the second winning random number table in the first embodiment. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table in the first embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 jackpot selection table in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 small winning selection table in the first embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 small winning selection table in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern table in the first embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern table in the first embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern table in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the content of the fluctuation pattern table for 1 small winnings. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 time-saving variation pattern table in the first embodiment, and (b) is the content of the special figure 2 variation pattern table in the first embodiment. FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the performance state selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing each performance state selected by the performance state selection table and the number of performance states displayed on the third symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the 3 symbols and the reserved symbols. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the first embodiment. 2 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows normal fluctuation start processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows time saving fluctuation start processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the start-up winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetching process performed by MPU in a main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory control process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passing process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the general pattern pre-reading process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V entrance passage processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V passage processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interrupt processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing small hit control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory opening/closing process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows storage device control processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. 2 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 2 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 2 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 2 is a flowchart showing variation pattern related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the number-of-pending ball related processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart showing winning information related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 2 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed general figure fluctuation display setting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart showing production state setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing specific production setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing counter update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing. 7 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing error command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the winning related command process performed by MPU in a display control device in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing jackpot start command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing round number command processing. 7 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing. 7 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical structure of the RAM in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a diagram. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the content of the special figure 1 time-saving variation pattern table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving termination determination process performed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows time saving fluctuation start processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart showing jackpot control processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical structure of the RAM in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a diagram. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a time-saving state selection table in a third embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable time setting process performed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing jackpot control processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a front view showing modification example 1 of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing modification example 2 of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a front view showing another example of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram which showed the operation|movement of the modification of an electric accessory. It is a schematic diagram which showed the operation|movement of the modification of an electric accessory. It is a schematic diagram which showed the operation|movement of the modification of an electric accessory. It is a schematic diagram which showed the operation|movement of the modification of an electric accessory. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the example 1 of other effects, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the example 1 of other effects. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in other production example 2, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in other production example 2. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal variation pattern table in the other production example 2, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal variation pattern table in the other production example 2. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table for time saving A in other production example 2, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern table for time saving A in other production example 2. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a pattern table. It is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second production example.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 3 and 4 are a right side area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing the movement of a non-electric accessory 710 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of a second variable winning device 650 provided in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 7 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and a pachinko machine 10 which is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

The inner frame 12 has a large number of nails, a left first ball entrance hole 64a, a right first ball entrance hole 64b (hereinafter, when both the left first ball entrance hole 64a and the right first ball entrance hole 64b are shown). The game board 13 (Fig. 2) is attached removably from the front side. A pinball game is played by the ball flowing down the front surface (game area) of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there are provided a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14. A metal hinge 19 is attached to the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided serves as an opening/closing axis for the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit. A unit 15 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, at the upper left side of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination part 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. The certificate stamp etc. affixed to the pachinko machine 10 (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface on its left side for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. . On the other hand, on the right side of the lower plate unit 15, there is provided an operating handle 51 that is operated by the player in order to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13. A touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation, a push-button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch during the period when the button is pressed, and a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 detected by a change in electrical resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor which changes with the movement of the ball, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned configuration is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration in which the main controller 110 or another control device detects the ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a, or a configuration in which the solenoid of the ball firing unit 112a It may be configured to detect that the ball has been fired. Further, the number of detected balls may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clearing is executed.

A frame button 22 is provided at the upper part of the lower plate unit 15. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect, background, etc. displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later. In this way, by providing the pachinko machine 10 with the frame button 22 that can be operated by the player, it becomes possible to arbitrarily select the effects to be executed on the pachinko machine 10, thereby increasing the player's desire to participate in the game. can be increased.

Note that in this embodiment, a frame button 22 that can be pressed by the player is provided as an operation means that can be operated by the player, but other configurations may be used. For example, if the player touches ( A sensor-type operation means that detects when the player is approaching the player, a lever-type operation means that the player can operate in the left/right (or front-back) direction, and a handle-type operation means that the player can rotate. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of operating means is one, but more than that may be provided, or a plurality of operating means with different operating methods may be provided. With this configuration, the player can perform more diverse operations, and the types of performances that can be performed based on the player's operations on the operating means can be increased.

Further, the operating means (frame button 22) is arranged at a position (on the upper left side of the lower tray unit 15) where the player can operate it while playing the game (while operating the operating handle 51 with his right hand). Therefore, the player can easily operate the frame button 22 even while playing a game.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails, windmills, and rails 61, 62 for guiding balls, a general ball entrance 63, and a It is constructed by assembling a first ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 640, a variable winning device (first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650), a variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is an inner frame. It can be attached to the back side of 12. The general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650), and the variable display unit 80 are based on the base by router processing. It is disposed in a through hole formed in the plate 60 and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front surface of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is installed. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is a generally circular area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70 on the front side of the game board 13 (a starting hole etc. is provided, and a fired ball is (area flowing downstream). Moreover, the game area includes all the areas in which the ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 and the winning port (ball entry port).

In this pachinko machine 10, the left side of the variable display unit 80 (the left side when viewed from the front of the game board 13) is formed as a left game area, and the right side is formed as a right game area, and a game (hereinafter referred to as In the left-handed game), a game in which a ball enters the general ball entrance 63 or the first left ball entrance 64a is played, and a game in which the ball is fired aiming at the right playing area (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game). ), the fired ball passes above the variable display device unit 80, and the right first ball entrance 64b, the second ball entrance 640, the first variable winning device 65, and the second A game is played in which the player aims at the variable winning device 650 and the like. In this pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, the game is prevented from becoming monotonous by having the player play a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) depending on the game state.

In addition, although the details will be described later, this pachinko machine 10 allows you to play games that are advantageous to the player (left-handed games or right-handed games) depending on the various game states (normal state, time-saving state, jackpot state, etc.) that are set. Games) are configured differently. This allows the player to change the content of the game while grasping the current gaming state, thereby further preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description of the game board 13 will be continued. The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated. Furthermore, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, there is a resin arc member 70 formed with an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the ball enters the through gate (normal When the ball passes through the entrance port) 67, a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery held for balls entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, it is determined whether the special symbol is a jackpot or not, and it is also determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If so, the type of jackpot is also determined. When a special symbol hits the jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special gaming state, and the first specific prize opening 65a, which is normally closed, remains open until a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds elapses, or until 10 balls win). ), and the opening is repeated a number of times (number of rounds) according to the type of jackpot. As a result, a large number of balls enter the first specific winning hole 65a, so a larger amount of prize balls than usual are paid out.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, in some cases where a special symbol lottery determines something other than a jackpot (missing), a small win is determined in which the player is given a benefit different from the special gaming state. It is composed of When the special symbol lottery wins a small win, the second specific winning slot 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is activated for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 1.8 seconds have elapsed in total or until 10 balls have won). A small winning game that is released is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this pachinko machine 10, during this small winning game, some of the balls that won the second specific winning opening 650a passed through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3 (see FIG. 6)). In this case, the above-described jackpot game is executed after the small win game ends. As a result, a player can execute a jackpot based on the game results of a game in which the player aims to win a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, and a small win game that is executed by winning a small win in a special symbol lottery. You can play both games and games that aim to do things. Therefore, since the player can play a variety of games, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

Although the details will be described later, this pachinko machine 10 is provided with seven types of special symbol jackpots: "Jackpot A" to "Jackpot G". In addition, the two types of "Jackpot A and B" are jackpot types that can be determined when a jackpot is won in a lottery that is executed when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64, and " Two types of jackpots C and D are small wins in a lottery that is executed when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and the ball passes through a specific area during the small win game. "Jackpot E" is a type of jackpot that can be determined when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and becomes a jackpot in a lottery that is executed as a trigger, or when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. This is a jackpot type that can be determined when a ball enters the ball opening 640 and the ball passes through a specific area during a small win game when the lottery is executed as a trigger, and the ball passes through a specific area during the small win game. is a type of jackpot that can be determined when a small win occurs in a lottery that is executed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the ball passes through a specific area during the small win game. . The plurality of jackpot types provided in this way are the benefits given to the player when the jackpot game is executed, such as the benefits during the jackpot game (for example, number of rounds, opening time, opening movement pattern), jackpot Privileges given after a game (for example, a privilege giving a gaming state in which the player is more likely to win the next jackpot) are set to be different. As a result, in the jackpot games executed at various opportunities, it is possible to increase the player's desire to play in order to win the jackpot game that gives more advantageous benefits, and also provide a variety of gaming features. be able to.

When a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the special symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds to 90 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result is displayed. A special symbol indicating this will be stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 while the first symbol display device 37 is displaying a variable display, the number of ball entries is determined for each type of ball entry port. Each ball is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of balls held is shown on the first symbol display device 37 and also on the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls remains for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the next special symbol will be drawn and the next special symbol will be drawn. , a variable display according to the lottery is started.

On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery that is performed when a ball passes through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67, a determination is made as to whether or not the normal symbol is a hit. When a normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is changed to the open position for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 3 seconds), and the second ball entrance 640 is opened. It will be released. Note that in normal times, the second ball entry port 640 is closed because the electric accessory 640a is disposed in the closed position. Therefore, when the normal symbol is a hit, the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol is more likely to be drawn.

In addition, when the lottery of normal symbols (second symbols) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbols starts on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 4 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery A normal symbol indicating the result will be stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67 while a variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is suspended up to 4 times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed on the first symbol. It is displayed on the display device 37 and also on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display ends on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls remains for the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67, the next normal symbol lottery will be held, and according to the lottery. The variable display will start.

As mentioned above, there are seven types of special symbol jackpots: "Jackpot A" to "Jackpot G". When the number of rounds becomes "Jackpot A to C", the number of rounds becomes 7 rounds (7 rounds jackpot), and when the number of rounds becomes "Jackpot D", the number of rounds becomes 2 rounds (2 rounds jackpot), a special gaming state becomes " When the game reaches "Jackpot E", the number of rounds becomes a special game state with 15 rounds (15 rounds jackpot). When the number of rounds reaches "Jackpot F", the game enters a special game state with 5 rounds (5 rounds jackpot), and when the number of rounds reaches "Jackpot G", the game enters a special game state with 10 rounds (10 rounds jackpot).

In addition, when it comes to "Jackpot A", "Jackpot C", and "Jackpot E to G", after the jackpot ends, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes shorter, and when the normal symbol wins, the second A time-saving state, which is a game state in which the electric accessory 640a is controlled to open so that the ball can easily enter the ball entrance 640, is provided until the special symbol changes once (1 time-saving number). . In the case of "Jackpot B" and "Jackpot D", after the jackpot ends, the above-mentioned time-saving state is not applied and the normal state returns.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment has a function (so-called time-saving function) of shifting the gaming state to a time-saving state in which it is easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 than the normal state. Although it does not have a function to change the jackpot probability of special symbols or the jackpot probability of normal symbols (so-called probability variation function), it is possible to use a pachinko machine that has a probability variation function. Good too.

As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in this embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot is varied depending on the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be the same for all jackpot types (for example, all 8 rounds). Further, for example, the period during which the symbol is in the "normal symbol time saving state" may be changed depending on the type of jackpot. In addition, instead of changing the period in which the "normal symbol time-saving state" occurs, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, or the release of the electric accessory 640a by hitting one normal symbol. It is also possible to change the number of times. In addition, in this embodiment, the bonus that will be given after the jackpot is determined depending on the type of jackpot, but for example, the jackpot will end if the ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the jackpot. A variable probability state for special symbols and a time saving state for normal symbols may be added later. In addition, in this embodiment, the time saving state is configured to continue until the number of changes of the special symbol is executed a predetermined specific number of times (one time), but the time saving state is set in advance to a plurality of times (for example, 10 times), and the time saving state may be configured to end when the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches the time saving number, or when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result. In addition, a lottery different from the special symbol lottery (a lottery for determining whether or not the time-saving state continues) is executed, and the time-saving state is terminated if the lottery result is that the time-saving state cannot be continued. You can. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time-saving state is always given after the end of a jackpot game with a specific jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot C, jackpot E to G), but other structures may be used. For example, if a time saving grant frequency measuring means is provided to measure the number of consecutive times that the time saving state is granted, and the measurement result by the time saving grant frequency measuring means reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), which jackpot will be determined? Even if a jackpot game depending on the type is executed, the time saving state may not be given after the jackpot game ends. Thereby, it is possible to set an upper limit of the gaming period that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to suppress providing excessive gambling to the player. In addition, as an example of suppressing excessive gambling, we have shown an example in which an upper limit is set on the number of consecutive time-saving states. An upper limit may be set on the number of changes in the special symbol executed during the consecutive winning period). Even with this configuration, an upper limit can be set on the time-saving successive winning period, so excessive gambling can be suppressed. In this case, there is no upper limit on the number of times the short-time status is granted (i.e., the number of jackpots during the short-time winning period), so it is limited to a limited period (the short-time winning period for which the upper limit is set). In this way, the player can be motivated to play the game in an attempt to win many jackpots.

At the upper right side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2), there is a first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LEDs") 37a serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37b. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information according to various controls performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery is being executed in conjunction with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize winning), or a variable display. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed in a lit state, and a ball entered into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is displayed. The number of pending balls, which is the number of balls for which variation has not been performed (pending balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

If a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37, the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. The number of balls to be played is held up to a maximum of four times for each ball entrance, and the number of balls held is shown on the first symbol display device 37 and also on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in this embodiment, although the configuration is such that the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is held up to a maximum of four times, the maximum number of times that the ball is held is limited to four times. Instead, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, it may be set to be held until the total number of balls entering a plurality of ball entrances reaches an upper limit (for example, eight times).

The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds during the jackpot, errors, etc. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits light in a different color (for example, red, green, blue), and depending on the combination of the emitted light colors, various gaming states (high probability states of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be realized with a small number of LEDs. , normal symbol time saving, etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also displays a special symbol according to the jackpot type (jackpot A to G) if it is a jackpot. A symbol (first symbol) is shown.

Further, a plurality of general ball entry ports 63 are arranged in the gaming area, through which a predetermined number (for example, five) of balls are paid out as prize balls when balls enter the game area. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 configured with an LED. . A center frame 86 is disposed in this variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 displays a decorative third symbol (decorative symbol) according to the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the display of the second symbol display device 83. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting winning), this is used as a trigger to display a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display device 37. executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, a variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed. Further, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, using this as a trigger, a variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed on the second symbol display device 83. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the normal symbol, a variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol is performed.

Although the details will be described later, in this pachinko machine 10, the third symbol display device 81 is used to change the object of the symbol (main symbol) that informs the player of the variable display in an easy-to-understand manner according to the game state, etc. It is configured as follows. This is because, in this pachinko machine 10, whether or not a benefit that is advantageous to the player is given is determined based on the lottery results of special symbols in one gaming state (for example, normal state), and in other This is because in the gaming state (for example, time saving state), the determination is made based on the lottery result of the normal symbol. In this way, even if the pachinko machine 10 has complicated gameplay, the player can easily It is only necessary to watch the changing display of the main symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three symbol rows on the left, middle, and right are displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this embodiment, among the displays of the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110, the display regarding special symbols is performed on the first symbol display device 37, and the display regarding normal symbols is performed on the second symbol display device 83. On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the display of the second symbol display device 83. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using reels or the like, for example. Further, a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to be movable. Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be explained with reference to FIG. 9.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 9(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of the display screen, FIG. 9(b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. As shown in FIG. 9(a), the left (left side display Three symbol columns are displayed: area Dm1), middle (middle display area Dm2), and right (right side display area Dm3). Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to display third symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The symbols (or normal symbols) are displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display).

The third symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, or normal symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm are each composed of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". ing. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the lottery result by the main controller 110, which will be described later, is a specific lottery result (a jackpot in the case of a special symbol, or a part of a small win in the case of a special symbol, a win in the case of a normal symbol). In this case, a fluctuating display is performed in which the same third symbol (main symbol) is aligned (for example, "777"), and a jackpot occurs after the fluctuating display is finished.

Specifically, the first display area Dm displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and a variable display is performed by periodically scrolling from top to bottom for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, a third symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line L1 in the first display area Dm. If the third symbols are stopped on the active line with a jackpot symbol combination (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination), a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

A second display area Dn (Dn1 to Dn6) is formed in the upper right area of the first display area Dm. In this second display area Dn, a symbol row showing a first special symbol, a second special symbol, and a normal symbol is displayed. Specifically, the second display area Dn1 is an area in which a symbol column indicating the first special symbol is displayed, and the second display area Dn2 is an area in which a symbol column indicating the second special symbol is displayed. The second display area Dn3 is formed as an area in which a symbol row indicating normal symbols is displayed, and a variable display corresponding to the variable display of each symbol is displayed.

In addition, the number of reserved memories of each of the first special symbol, second special symbol, and normal symbol is also displayed in the second display area Dn. Specifically, the second display area Ds4 is an area where the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol is displayed, and the second display area Ds5 is an area where the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is displayed. 2 display area Ds6 is an area where the number of reserved storage numbers of normal symbols is displayed.

In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, the display corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol, and the display corresponding to the number of reserved memories of each symbol are displayed on the second symbol display device 81 of the third symbol display device 81. One of the symbols (the symbol that should be notified to the player) is selected as the main symbol, and the other symbols are selected as secondary symbols that are less conspicuous than the main symbol. It is displayed as a symbol in the second display area Dn. Thereby, the player can play an optimal game simply by checking the display contents of the main symbols.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the secondary symbol is made smaller than the main symbol so that it is less conspicuous than the main symbol, but other configurations may be used. For example, the display format of the secondary symbol is The configuration may be such that the subordinate symbol is more difficult to identify than the main symbol by making the transmittance of the display mode of the subsidiary symbol higher than the display mode, or by moving the display area of the subsidiary symbol.

In addition, as for the symbol row mode of each symbol displayed in the second display area Dn, the symbol row displayed as the main symbol may be displayed as is, or the symbol row as shown in FIG. 9(b) may be displayed. ” and “×” are displayed in two rows in parallel, and two “○” symbols are displayed in the left and right rows, the first special symbol, second special symbol, or normal symbol will be won. The configuration may be such that the player is notified of this fact.

Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the secondary symbol corresponding to the symbol displayed as the main symbol is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the secondary symbol may be displayed at a location other than the third symbol display device 81. You can.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the main symbol (special symbol 1 main symbol Dma) corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm (FIG. 9(b) ), when the gaming state is the time saving state, a main symbol (ordinary symbol main symbol Dmc) corresponding to the ordinary symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 16(a)). Furthermore, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the main symbol (special symbol 2 main symbol Dmd) corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm regardless of the gaming state (Fig. 17(b)).

In addition, although detailed explanation will be given later, in each game state, if a predetermined game condition is satisfied (for example, if a normal symbol that started fluctuating during the time saving state stops fluctuating after the time saving state ends), It is configured so that a combination different from the above-mentioned combination of the main symbol and the subordinate symbol is displayed. Thereby, the display on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort with respect to symbol variations executed across different gaming states. Furthermore, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol are all displayed in the second display area Dn as secondary symbols, and the pseudo symbol for production is displayed in a variable manner as the main symbol (see FIG. 22(a)). It is configured as follows. Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that the symbols are changing during a period when each symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (for example, during a small winning period), and the performance effect can be enhanced.

The main symbol (third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured in a display mode consisting of numbers from "0" to "9", but is distinguishable from other main symbols. Display modes other than numbers may be used as long as they are possible; for example, a display mode imitating a character or a display mode combining characters and numbers may be used. Furthermore, as the symbols displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the first display area Dm, symbols other than the main symbol (i.e., even if the same symbols are aligned and stopped on the active line L1, the player will not be given a benefit. A symbol row including sub-symbols may be used as the symbol.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the lottery result of a special symbol or a normal symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, is a win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is displayed. is carried out, and the jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuating display ends. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are not aligned.

The main symbol (third symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is stopped and displayed on the active line L1, and this stopped display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (more than 1 second), the player can check whether the combination of the third symbols corresponds to a win (lottery results for special symbols and normal symbols). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not the winning result is a hit or not). In addition, in the above-mentioned stopped display state, only the main symbols stopped and displayed on the active line L1 are displayed, and other main symbols (main symbols set in each symbol row other than the active line L1) are displayed. It is recommended that the main symbol (which is stopped and displayed at a certain point) not be displayed (displayed inconspicuously). Thereby, it is possible to more clearly notify the player of the stop display result of the main symbol.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is a combination that corresponds to a loss and there are held balls, after a one-second stop display, a fluctuating display corresponding to the lottery based on the held balls will start. . In addition, when a plurality of reserved balls exist, a lottery is performed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest ball entered in terms of time.

On the other hand, if the main symbol (third symbol) of the combination corresponding to the miss of the special symbol or normal symbol is displayed in a stopped state for one second when there is no reserved ball, the third symbol will continue to be displayed in a stopped state after that. continues. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed or a new main symbol variation is started. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the main symbol (third symbol) was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, a player who is about to select a pachinko machine 10 to start playing a game can easily determine whether or not a game is being played based on the presence or absence of a demonstration effect being displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the demonstration performance starts when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the main symbol are stopped and displayed. However, it may be configured so that the demonstration effect is started based on the elapsed time after all the symbols are stopped and displayed, regardless of whether they are the main or secondary symbols. The display mode of the performance may be configured to be different between a demonstration performance when only the symbols are stopped and displayed, and a demonstration performance when both the main symbol and the secondary symbol are stopped and displayed. In this case, for example, in a demonstration performance that is executed when only the main symbol is stopped and displayed, a notification to encourage the progress of the game is executed, and in a demonstration performance that is performed when both the main symbol and the secondary symbol are stopped and displayed, a new It is preferable to issue notifications to encourage players to play games. This allows the game to be played smoothly.

Next, the sub-display area Ds provided below the first display area Dm will be explained with reference to FIG. 9(a). As shown in FIG. 9A, a sub-display area Ds is formed below the first display area Dm. This sub-display area Ds is an area where auxiliary display modes for assisting the player's game, such as game status and game explanation, are displayed in correspondence with each game status and game result. Specifically, it displays the number of pending symbols corresponding to the first special symbol (see FIG. 9(b)), and assists the content of the main symbol variation effect being executed in the first display area Dm. (see FIG. 22(a)), guide the content of the game to be played from now on (see FIG. 22(b)), display the remaining period of a specific period (time period) that is advantageous to the player (see FIG. 22(b)), 15(a)). This makes it possible to provide easy-to-understand games to players.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description of the game board 13 will be continued. A left first ball entry port 64a into which a ball can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the left first ball entry port 64a, a first ball entry switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entry switch (not shown) is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Furthermore, the first left ball entry port 64a also serves as one of the winning ports from which, when a ball enters, five balls are paid out as prize balls. This left first ball entry port 64a is used when a ball is launched to a path on the left side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front (so-called a left-handed game), and when a right-handed game is performed. It is constructed so that it is easier to enter the ball than in the case of the ball.

A storage device 750 and a specific general ball entrance 630 are provided below the first left ball entrance 64a. A detailed explanation of the storage device 750 will be described later with reference to FIG. 5, but the storage device 750 includes a storage valve 750a that can be variably operated between a closed state and an open state, and when the storage valve 750a is in a closed state, and a side wall for forming a storage area capable of storing one ball. The storage valve 750a is variably controlled to change from a closed state in which balls can be stored to an open state when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and when the storage valve 750a is variably operated to the open state, the storage area is closed. It is configured such that the balls stored in the storage device 750 (or the balls that flowed into the storage device 750 while the storage valve 750a is in the open state) flow down below the storage device 750. Note that the storage device 750 is arranged at a location where balls can be stored both when playing a left-handed game and when playing a right-handed game.

A specific general ball entry port 630 is provided below the storage device 750 so that balls that have passed through the storage device 750 can enter. This specific general ball entry hole 630 is a winning hole from which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the ball, and is also used as a trigger for operating the non-electric accessory 710. A detailed explanation of the non-electric accessory 710 will be described later with reference to FIG. The provided non-electric accessory 710 is configured to be variable to a position where a ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64b.

On the other hand, in the right side area of the game board 13, there are two channels through which balls played in a right-handed game flow, and a distribution member 700 for distributing the balls fired in a right-handed game into the two paths described above. The non-electric accessory 710, the first right ball entrance 65b, the through gate 67, the second ball entrance 640, the electric accessory 640a, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650. It is arranged. Next, the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4.

Balls fired in a right-handed game are distributed alternately to a first flow path 701 and a second flow path 702 by a distribution member 700. The balls distributed to the first flow path 701 pass through the bending path 701a (see FIG. 3), pass through the through gate 67, and the second ball entry port 640, and flow out to the lower right side area. In addition, the balls distributed to the second flow path 702 flow down the third flow path 703a when the non-electric accessory 710 provided on the downstream side is in a closed state (see FIG. 5(a)). The water flows into the inflow port 704a, flows down the fifth flow path 704b provided on the back side of the first flow path 701 (the back side as viewed from the perspective of FIG. 2), and flows from the outflow port 704c to the right side area on the game board 13. flows downward. On the other hand, when the non-electric accessory 710 is in the open state (see FIG. 5(b)), the ball flows down the fourth flow path 703b and enters the right first ball entry port 64b. When a ball enters the right first ball entrance 64b, three balls are paid out as prize balls.

Although a detailed explanation of the non-electric accessory 710 will be described later with reference to FIG. The non-electric accessory 710 is configured to be changed to the closed state by its own weight.

The balls distributed to the two flow paths (first flow path 701, second flow path 702) by the distribution member 700 merge below the right side area, and are placed above the second variable winning device 650 and the first variable winning device 65. The liquid flows down and flows into the out port 66 while flowing down a flow path that can flow into the storage device 750.

Here, the flow of the balls distributed by the distribution member 700 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when a ball fired in a right-handed game flows down the first flow path 701, and FIG. 702 is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow when flowing down.

As shown in FIG. 3, the distribution member 700 alternately distributes balls fired in a right-handed game to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702, so when 100 balls are fired in one minute. In this case, 50 pieces of water are distributed to the first flow path 701 at 1.2 second intervals, and 50 pieces are distributed to the second flow path 702 at 1.2 second intervals. The first channel 701 is composed of a ball channel with a channel width for one ball (approximately 15 mm), and a curved channel 701a provided in the middle reduces the velocity of the ball flowing down. It is configured such that the ball passing time until the ball that has flowed into the first flow path 701 flows out from the first flow path 701 is about 2 seconds.

A through gate 67 is provided downstream of the first channel 701 (downstream of the bent path 701a), and a second ball entry port 640 is provided downstream of the through gate 67. . This second ball entry port 640 allows the ball to pass through the first flow path 701 when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, and allows the ball to pass through the first flow path 701 when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. The ball is configured such that the ball enters the second ball entry port 640.

Further, the ball passing through the through gate 67 is configured to reach the second ball entry port 640 after 0.2 seconds. The details will be described later, but since the variation time of the normal symbol executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 is 3 seconds at the shortest, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 It is configured so that the ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640 due to the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, which is performed based on the normal symbol lottery that is performed when the ball passes through the second ball entrance 640. In other words, the configuration is such that the period from passing through the through gate 67 until reaching the second ball entry port 640 (electric accessory 640a) is shorter than the period required for the lottery of normal symbols. As a result, it is possible to execute a normal symbol lottery by simply firing one ball, and to make it physically impossible to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inappropriate games from being played. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the balls fired in the right-handed game are distributed by the distribution member 700 into the first channel 701 (the channel in which the through gate 67 and the second ball entry port 640 are arranged) and the second channel. Since the normal symbol lottery is executed (the ball passes through the through gate 67), the lottery of the regular symbol is won, the electric accessory 640a is opened, and the second ball entrance is drawn. Since it is necessary to fire at least three balls in order to make the ball enter the ball 640, execution of an inappropriate game (for example, single hit) can be further suppressed.

Note that in this embodiment, the through gate 67 and the second ball entry port 640 are provided in one of the two flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700; 67 and a second ball entry port 640 may be provided in the other channel. With this configuration, for example, if a malicious player destroys the distribution member 700 and creates a situation in which the balls flow down only to one of the channels, the balls will not pass through the through gate 67. This makes it possible to regulate a game in which a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 when a normal symbol is won, and it is possible to suppress illegal games from being played.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the case where the sphere flows down the second flow path 702 will be described. The second flow path 702 is configured so that the period during which the balls flow down is shorter than that of the first flow path 701 described above. Specifically, the configuration is such that it takes about 1.5 seconds for the spheres that have flowed into the second flow path 702 to flow out from the outlet 704c. With this configuration, when 100 balls are fired toward the right side area in one minute, the balls that flow into the first flow path 701 and the balls that are fired next to the second flow path 701 The balls flowing into the ball flow down the lower right area of the game board 13 (the area where the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged) almost simultaneously (with a difference of about 0.1 seconds). Become. Therefore, in the game state (big win state or small win state) in which each variable winning device is released, it is possible to easily win a plurality of balls at once.

In addition, a part of the second flow path 702 (fifth flow path 704b) is provided on the back side of the first flow path 701 (on the back side from the perspective of FIG. 4), and when viewed from the front (front view from the perspective of FIG. 4). A plurality of channels are configured to overlap. In this way, by forming a plurality of ball channels using the depth direction of the game board 13, the space for forming the ball channels (the area occupied by the ball channels on the game board 13) can be reduced. can.

Further, the ball outlet (outlet 704c) of the second flow path 702 is located below the outlet of the first flow path 701 (downstream side of the second ball entry port 640), and is located on the right side of the game board 13. The ball is configured to flow out downstream of the ball flowing out from the first flow path 701 in the lower region. As a result, the balls that flowed out from the outlet 704c with force (the balls that flowed out at a higher speed than the balls that flowed down the first flow path 701) directly collided with the balls that flowed out from the first flow path 701, resulting in irregular It is possible to suppress the situation in which ball flow occurs.

In this embodiment, a configuration is used in which the distribution member 700 alternately distributes balls fired in a right-handed game into two channels, but other configurations may also be used. The configuration may be such that the balls are distributed to the channels at different ratios instead of alternately (1:1), or the balls may be distributed to three or more channels. Further, in this embodiment, the distribution member 700 is used which changes the distribution destination of the next passing ball depending on the weight of the passing ball. Separate members may also be used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the flow of operations of the storage device 750 and the non-electric accessory 710 used in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 5(a) is a schematic diagram showing that the storage device 750 and the non-electric accessory 710 are both in a closed state (closed state), and FIG. 5(b) is a schematic diagram showing the storage device 750 and the non-electric accessory 710. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing that both objects 710 are in an open state (open state).

As shown in FIG. 5(a), when the non-electric accessory 710 is in the closed state (closed state), it is impossible (difficult) to enter the ball into the first right ball entry port 64b. Therefore, when the game state is the normal state, it is possible to perform a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 and prevent the ball from entering the right first ball entry opening 64b.

This non-electric accessory 710 has an action part that comes into contact with the ball when it passes through a specific location, and the action part is actuated by the weight of the ball it comes into contact with, and is released based on the action. It is composed of Specifically, the ball that enters the specific general ball entrance 630 contacts the above-mentioned action section, and in conjunction with the action, the action connection section 710a operates, and the non-electric accessory 710 is released. This allows a ball to enter the right first ball entry port 64b.

Furthermore, the right first ball entry port 64b is provided with a second action part that can be contacted by the ball that enters the ball, and when the ball comes into contact with this second action part, the weight of the ball that has come into contact with it is As a result, the second operating portion is operated and the non-electric accessory 710 is closed. In this way, the non-electric accessory 710 is configured so that its variable state is switched based on the operation of a member that is actuated by the weight of the ball, without using an electric drive source. Note that the configuration of the non-electric accessory 710 may be other than the configuration described above, and a well-known configuration that operates based on the weight of the ball may be used.

The ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630, which is the trigger for activating (opening) the non-electric accessory 710, through the storage device 750 provided above the specific general ball entrance 630, as described above. When the storage device 750 is released, the ball can enter the specific general ball entry port 630. As described above, when a predetermined release condition (for example, the start of a jackpot game) is met, this storage device 750 remains in the release state until a predetermined closing condition (for example, 10 seconds have elapsed) is met. It is variably controlled so that

That is, as shown in FIG. 5(b), when the jackpot game is started and the first variable winning device 65 is opened, the storage device 750 is configured to be released. Then, the storage device 750 enters the released state, and the non-electric accessory 710 is opened based on the ball entering the specific general ball entrance 630. In addition, in the first embodiment, since the storage device 750 is arranged at a position where balls fired in either the left-handed game or the right-handed game can pass through the storage device 750, the ball fired in either the left-handed game or the right-handed game can pass through the storage device 750. During a jackpot game in which a winning game is played, a ball that does not win on the first variable winning device 65 (a ball that passes over the first variable winning device 65 during the interval between rounds when the first variable winning device is temporarily closed) ) can enter the specified general ball entrance 630.

Therefore, it is possible to obtain both the payout of prize balls based on the ball entering the first variable winning device 65 and the payout of the prize ball based on the ball entering the specific general ball entrance 630 during a jackpot game. be able to. Furthermore, since the configuration is such that balls that could not win in the first variable winning device 65 can enter the specific general ball entrance 630, the first variable An added value advantageous to the player can be added to balls that do not win into the winning device 65.

In the first embodiment, the storage valve 750a is operated to release the storage device 750 for 10 seconds after the jackpot game is started (after the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 is performed for the first time). It is configured to be operated variably. Therefore, by meeting the end condition for the first round in a jackpot game (for example, winning 10 balls) within 10 seconds, the interval from the end of the first round to the start of the second round (interval interval ) period and the period during which the storage device 750 is released can be matched.

As a result, the ball that passed over the first variable prize winning device 65 during the interval period between rounds can enter the specific general ball entrance 630, so the first round in a jackpot game can be started quickly (within 10 seconds). (b) It is possible to make the player play the game with a desire to finish the game.

In addition, the release timing of the storage device 750 executed during the jackpot game is the above-mentioned release timing (10 seconds after the jackpot game is started (after the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 is executed for the first time)). ) may be set, and the storage device 750 may be set to be released for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) at predetermined intervals (for example, every 10 seconds). With this configuration, if the end timing of each round of the jackpot game (the timing at which the inter-round interval is set) and the timing at which the storage device 750 is released coincide, many players will be able to play during the jackpot game. A ball can be entered into a specific general ball entry port 630.

In addition, when the above-mentioned configuration is used, by adjusting the timing at which the end condition of each round in the jackpot game is satisfied (for example, the 10th ball that is the round end condition is entered into the first variable prize winning device) By adjusting the timing at which the balls are allowed to enter the specific general ball entrance 630 during a jackpot game (by adjusting the timing of the ball entry by operating the operation handle 51), it is possible to vary the number of balls that enter the specific general ball entrance 630 during a jackpot game. It is possible to provide a new gameplay feature in which the end timing of each round in the middle is adjusted to a predetermined timing (timing when the storage device 750 is released), and it is possible to make the player play the game with enthusiasm.

Note that it is preferable to configure the third symbol display device 81 to display a display mode for notifying the release timing of the storage device 750 and a display mode that allows the player to predict the timing at which the inter-round interval will be executed. Thereby, the player can execute the game during the jackpot game while grasping the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the first embodiment described above, when the jackpot game is executed, the non-electric accessory 710 enters the open state (open state), so by playing the right-handed game during the jackpot game, the right first The ball can be reliably entered into the ball entry port 64b. Thereby, the variation of the first special symbol can be reliably executed in the time saving state (time saving at the start of consecutive game mode (initial time saving) which is transferred from the jackpot in the normal state) which shifts after the end of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the non-electric accessory 710 operates to shift to the closed state (closed state) when one ball enters the right first ball entrance 64b, so it is possible to hit the jackpot. It is possible to suppress excessive balls from entering the right first ball entry port 64b during the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 6, a configuration is shown in which game balls guided to the distribution channel of the back cover body 650e in the second variable winning device 650 are distributed to a normal discharge channel 650e1 and a special discharge channel 650e2, which will be described later. I will explain about it.

FIG. 6(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the winning balls of the second variable winning device 650 are distributed to the normal discharge flow path 650e1, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing a state in which winning balls are distributed to a special discharge channel 650e2.

As shown in FIG. 6(b), when the switching member 650h is operated, the game balls that have passed through the detection port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 are distributed to the special discharge channel 650e2. In this embodiment, a retention member 650n is provided in the special discharge channel 650e2. This retention member 650n allows only one game ball to be retained in the distribution destination area 650h3, which is the area where the game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 650e2 side by the switching member 650h. As a result, when one game ball remains in the distribution destination area 650h3, the game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 is not distributed to the special discharge channel 650e2, It will normally flow down to the discharge channel 650e1.

The retention member 650n is composed of a shutter mechanism that can be moved in and out from the game board 13 side. This retention member 650n moves in the longitudinal direction of the game board 13 by the operation of the retention solenoid 209b (see FIG. 8). This retention member 650n can retain one game ball in the distribution destination area 650h3 by moving forward (closing operation). On the other hand, by performing a backward retreat operation (opening operation), the game balls staying in the distribution destination area 650h3 flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2.

Here, in the second variable winning device 650, a game ball can be entered by opening the opening/closing door 650f1 during a small winning game. In addition, the retention member 650n performs a closing operation during a small winning game (when the ball can enter the second variable winning device 650), and after the door 650f1 closes (a new ball enters the second variable winning device 650). The opening operation is performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the ball became impossible to enter. That is, in this control example, even if the switching member 650h is operating, the number of game balls that enter the second variable winning device 650 and the game ball flowing down to the special discharge channel 650e2 is limited to one ball. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the number of game balls flowing down into the special discharge channel 650e2 from becoming excessive.

The game balls flowing down to the special discharge channel 650e2 will pass through the V winning switch 650e3. In the first embodiment, a jackpot game is awarded based on the passage of a game ball to the V winning switch 650e3.

Although the first embodiment is configured to limit the number of game balls flowing down to the special discharge channel 650e2 to one ball, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more game balls may stay in the distribution destination area 650h3. The number of game balls to be restricted may be changed as appropriate by making it possible or by having the retention member operate a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) during a small winning game.

With reference to FIG. 6(a), a case where a game ball is guided to the normal discharge channel 650e1 will be described. FIG. 6(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 209c (see FIG. 8) is inactive and the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h is blocking the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2. .

In the first embodiment, the retention member 650n provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2 is configured to operate even when the flow path solenoid 209c is inactive. As a result, there is no need to switch processing depending on whether or not the flow path solenoid 9209c is activated, so it is possible to reduce design costs and program capacity.

When the flow path solenoid 650k is inactive, all the game balls that have passed through the detection port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 flow down to the normal discharge flow path 650e1. On the other hand, since there are no game balls flowing down to the special discharge channel 650e2, there is no influence by the newly provided retention member 650n in the first embodiment.

Next, the flow of the small winning game in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10(a) shows a small winning game of small winning type B that is executed based on the entry of a ball into the first ball entry port 64 (left first ball entry port 64a, right first ball entry port 64b). FIG. 10(b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the process. It is a timing chart showing the flow of a small winning game of small winning type A. FIG. 11(a) is a timing chart showing the flow of a small winning game executed based on the entry of a ball into the second ball entry port 640, and FIG. It is a timing chart showing the flow of a jackpot game executed based on the ball entering the ball. The details of the operation control of the various devices shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 will be described later.

Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, if a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery, a 60 second small win game is executed (see FIG. 22). In this small winning game, a game in which the second variable winning device 650 is released is executed, and when the winning ball of the second variable winning device 650 passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3), the small winning game ends. It is configured such that a jackpot game is executed later. If you win a small win in this first special symbol lottery, it will be a small win (small win type A) in which the ball can (easily pass) through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small win game. , a small win (small win type B) in which the ball cannot pass through (hardly passes through) the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) is selected.

First, explanation will be given with reference to FIG. 10(a). Based on the winning of the ball into the first ball entrance 64, the main controller 110 performs fluctuation control of the first special symbol. At this time, in the display control device 114, a first special symbol variation effect indicating that the first special symbol is being varied is executed for the same period (30 seconds) as the variation time of the first special symbol. Incidentally, the time period of the first special symbol variation effect executed by the display control device 114 will be described later. Then, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol stops and the main control device 110 starts the small winning control (when the small winning game is executed), the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 650f1 provided in the second variable winning device 650 is performed. The V inlet solenoid 209a for variably operating the retention member 650n, the flow path solenoid 209c for variably operating the switching member 650h are turned on according to a predetermined opening scenario. Specifically, the V inlet solenoid 209a repeats an opening operation twice in which it is turned off for 15 seconds and turned on for 0.5 seconds after a small winning game is executed, and then turned off for 15 seconds and then turned on for 0.8 seconds. An open scenario for a total of 60 seconds is set so that the device is in the on state and off for 13.2 seconds.

Next, the retention solenoid 209b is turned on for 55 seconds after the small winning game is executed (the state in which the ball is retained), and then in the off state for 5 seconds (the state in which the retention of the ball is released) for a total of 60 seconds. A second opening scenario is set. The opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the retention solenoid 209b described above is a common opening scenario for small hit types A and B.

On the other hand, the opening scenario of the flow path solenoid 209c is configured such that different opening scenarios are set depending on the type of small hit. In the small win type B, an open scenario is set in which the off state continues for 60 seconds during the small win game period (see FIG. 10(a)), and the ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3). In small win type A, which is a small win type that is possible (easy to pass), an open scenario is set in which the small win game is off for 40 seconds, on for 15 seconds, and off for 5 seconds after the small win game is executed (Figure 10 (see (b)).

In this way, by varying the driving operation of only one of the three solenoids that are driven while the small winning game is being executed, the ball can easily pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3). By configuring a small winning game and a small winning game in which the ball is difficult to pass through to be executable, a common opening scenario can be used for small winning games executed with different small winning types, thereby reducing the processing load. be able to.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening scenarios of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the retention solenoid 209b are made common, and the opening scenarios of the flow path solenoid 209c are made different depending on the type of small hit, but other configurations may also be used. For example, the opening scenarios for the retention solenoid 209b and the flow path solenoid 209C may be the same, and the opening scenarios for the V inlet solenoid 209a may be different. In this case, a common opening scenario is set so that a period in which the ball can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) and a period in which it cannot pass are set depending on the timing when the ball enters the second variable winning device 650. The V inlet solenoid 209a is set in advance as an opening scenario for the V inlet solenoid 209a. It is preferable to use an opening scenario in which the winning switch 650e3) is set to correspond to a period in which a ball cannot pass and the V inlet solenoid 209a is turned on. Furthermore, it is preferable to unify the period during which the V inlet solenoid 209a is kept in the on state in all opening scenarios. With this configuration, it is possible to match up to the number of winning balls in the second variable winning device 650.

Furthermore, as in the above-mentioned example, instead of changing only the opening scenarios of the V inlet solenoid 209a, the start position (execution start position) of the opening scenario may be different even when the same opening scenario is used. It may be configured to be able to execute a small winning game in which the ball easily passes through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) and a small winning game in which the ball does not easily pass through. With this configuration, there is no need to prepare different opening scenarios for each type of small win, so the storage capacity can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11(a), the flow of the small winning game executed based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 will be described. In addition, in this embodiment, when a small winning game is executed based on the entry of a ball into the second ball entrance 640 (that is, winning a small winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2)) The small winning games executed based on the above are all configured to perform the same operation control, so the description will be given without limiting the small winning types.

In addition, in FIG. 11(a), the time for the entire small winning control (small winning game time) is set to 10 seconds for explanation. First, when a set time t1 (6.5 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the small winning game (control), the V inlet solenoid 209a among the plurality of solenoids described above is turned off, and the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed. By closing the opening/closing door 650f1, no new balls will enter the second variable winning device 650. Next, after the set time t2 (9 seconds) has elapsed, the retention solenoid 209b is turned off, the retention member 650n is opened (retracted), and the balls retained by the retention member 650n flow down to the special discharge path 650e2. To go. The set time t2 is set to be enough time for the balls that were present in the second variable prize winning device 650 to flow down the normal discharge channel 650e1 when the set time t1 has elapsed. Only the balls that were retained by the retention member 650n in the 2-variable winning device 650 will flow down the special discharge channel 650e2. Next, after the set time t3 (5 seconds) has elapsed, the flow path solenoid 209c is turned off, and the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2. The set time t3 is set to be a time sufficient to cause the ball flowing down the special discharge channel 650e2 to flow downstream beyond the movable range of the guiding piece 650h2 when the set time t2 has elapsed.

By driving the retention solenoid 209b and the flow path solenoid 209c with a time difference in this way, even if the ball is retained by the retention member 650n within the movable range of the guide piece 650h2, the guide piece 650h2 and the retention member 650n Since it is possible to reliably flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2 without interfering with the retained balls, the device can be made more compact.

Finally, based on the fact that the ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2 has passed the V winning switch (specific area) 650e3, the main controller 110 ends the small winning game control, performs the jackpot game control, and performs the first The specific winning hole 65 is opened.

Next, the differences from FIG. 11(a) will be explained with reference to FIG. 11(b). In FIG. 11(b), since the lottery result of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is a jackpot (symbol hit), the second variable winning device 650 is not operated. That is, after the variation control of the second special symbol by the main controller 110 is finished, the jackpot control is started. During that time, the display control device 114 executes a second special symbol variation effect indicating that the second special symbol is being varied.

Here, the relationship between the time of the effect executed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 11(a) and the effect executed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 11(b) will be explained. In Figure 11(a), the total of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (2 seconds) and the small hit production time (10 seconds) is set to 12 seconds, and in Figure 11(b), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 12 seconds. is set to 12 seconds. This is the timing when the jackpot game is started even if the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is either the above-mentioned V winning prize or symbol winning, that is, the timing when the jackpot game is started, that is, the first variable winning device 65 (first specific winning device 65) This is to synchronize the opening timing of the mouth 65a). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the lottery result of the second special symbol, and to allow the player to enjoy the performance executed by the display control device to the end.

Next, the flow of the game in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the game in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the game can be roughly divided into a left-handed game in which a first special symbol (special 1) is drawn by aiming at the left first ball entrance 64a when the game state is a normal state, and a left-handed game when the game state is in a time-saving state. In this case, when the second ball entrance 640 is aimed at and the second special symbol (special 2) is drawn, or when the gaming state is a winning state (big hit, small win), the first variable winning device 65, 2. The game is configured so that a right-handed game aiming at the variable prize winning device 650 is performed, and a winning game (big hit or small win) is won in the lottery of the first special symbol executed during the left-handed game, and the winning game ends. When a time-saving state is given later, the game shifts to a right-handed game (consecutive game mode) and shifts to a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. This consecutive game mode (specific game state) ends when a predetermined condition is met (when the game state shifts to the normal state and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0), and the normal state Shift to a left-handed game. In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, during a left-handed game (normal state), a game is played with the aim of shifting to a right-handed game (specific game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a right-handed game is performed. During the consecutive games mode (specific gaming state), games are played with the aim of continuing the consecutive games mode (specific gaming state). In this way, in gaming machines that have different playability, by making the different playability correspond to games in which the player shoots the ball at different positions (right-handed games, left-handed games), it is possible to It is possible to provide easy-to-understand games.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, as an opportunity to shift from the normal state in which left-handed games are played to a specific game state (consecutive game mode) in which right-handed games are played, the lottery of the first special symbol is a symbol in which a jackpot is won. A plurality of (two types) of opportunities are provided, including a win and a V winning win in which the first special symbol wins a small winning and executes a jackpot by passing through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early during the left-handed game, which is a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the normal game state in which a left-handed game is played, a game aiming at the left first ball entry opening 64a is performed. A first special symbol is drawn based on the ball entering the first left ball entrance 64a, and if the jackpot type of the drawing result is jackpot A (80% of jackpot wins), after the jackpot ends. A time-saving gaming state (time-saving state) is provided in which it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640 to win a prize. When transitioning to the time-saving game state (time-saving state), a right-handed game in which a ball is fired to the right side of the game board 13 to aim at the second ball entrance 640 arranged on the right side area of the game board 13 is started. It will be done. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is jackpot B (20% when winning the jackpot), the time-saving gaming state (time-saving state) is not granted after the jackpot ends, so the normal gaming state ( normal state). In addition, in this embodiment, there is also a route where the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small win, and if the small win type is small win A (10% of small win winnings), it becomes a jackpot (V prize). . In this case, after the jackpot ends, the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state. In addition, even if the small win type is small win A, if the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small win game, or if the small win type of the small win is When is a small hit B, the game does not shift to a time-saving game state (time-saving state), but shifts to a normal state in which a left-handed game is executed.

Next, the flow of the pachinko machine 10 during a right-handed game that is advantageous to the player will be explained. As explained with reference to FIGS. 2 to 5, in this pachinko machine 10, the right first ball entrance 64b is arranged in the right side area of the game board 13, and a jackpot game in which a right-handed game is executed. At least one ball is configured to enter the right first ball entry port 64b. In other words, in the normal gaming state (normal state), if you win a jackpot that gives you a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game, after the end of the jackpot game, at least one of the first special symbols (special symbol 1) will be saved in the reserved memory. The time saving state is started in a state where there is no pending memory of the second special symbol (special symbol 2).

As shown in FIG. 12, in this pachinko machine 10, when there are both a reserved memory for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and a reserved memory for the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the second special symbol is The drawing (variation) based on the reserved memory of (Special Figure 2) is configured to be executed with priority (so-called special 2 priority variation), but the lottery (variation) based on the reserved memory of the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) is executed with priority. In the absence of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), a lottery (variation) is executed based on the reserved memory of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). Here, since the fluctuation pattern (fluctuating time) of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) during the time saving state is configured to be set to 150 seconds regardless of the lottery result, after the time saving state starts. For 150 seconds, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is in a state of being varied. In addition, it is configured such that if a variation (lottery) of any of the special symbols (Special Figure 1, Special Figure 2) is executed once during the time saving state, the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied ( 1 time saving time).

During this period in which the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is fluctuating in the time-saving state, a game is executed to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is played. You can obtain up to 4 reserved memories of special drawing 2). Here, if you can acquire the pending memory of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the fluctuation of the first special symbol will stop after the time saving ends, and after the transition to the normal state, the pending memory of the second special symbol will be acquired. A lottery based on this will be executed. As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, the lottery for the second special symbol is set so that the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/300, and the probability of winning the small jackpot is 299/300. 2. For a small win won by drawing a special symbol, a small win game that allows the ball to pass through (easily passes through) a specific area (V winning switch 630e3) is executed, and all jackpots that are executed when a V prize is won. A jackpot is set in which a time-saving state is given after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, as long as the second special symbol is stored in the reserved memory, the consecutive game mode (specific game state) is continued.

On the other hand, during the period in which the first special symbol is changing to the time-saving state (during the consecutive winning preparation period), it is not possible to acquire the pending memory of the second special symbol, and there is no pending memory of the second special symbol. When the time saving state ends, the game directly shifts to the normal gaming state and the consecutive game mode (specific gaming state) ends.

Also, if you acquire multiple (for example, 3) pending memories of the 2nd special symbol during the consecutive winning preparation period, the fluctuation of the 2nd special symbol will start when you enter the time saving state again. Become. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the time saving state (special 2 fluctuation time) is set to 2 seconds regardless of the lottery result, which is shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (3 seconds) in the time saving state. Therefore, during the time saving state where the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is being executed, it is suppressed that the second special symbol is newly acquired in the suspended memory. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which excessive prize balls are provided to the player. In addition, in this embodiment, once entering the time saving state, the time saving state is configured to loop with a probability of about 90%.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 23, the effect display contents executed by the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, the flow of the effect display contents that change in response to the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 13 is a timing chart (first half) showing the relationship between the gaming state and performance state in this embodiment, and FIG. 14 is a timing chart (second half) showing the relationship between the gaming state and performance state in this embodiment.

Here, the decorative pattern (third pattern) displayed on the third pattern display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 used in this embodiment will be briefly explained. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is capable of displaying decorative symbols (third symbols) corresponding to three types of symbols: a first special symbol, a second special symbol, and a normal symbol. Among them, the decorative symbol (third symbol) corresponding to the symbol that should most inform the player of the lottery result is displayed as the main symbol in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 9) of the third symbol display device. However, a decorative pattern (third pattern) corresponding to the other pattern is displayed as a subordinate pattern in the second display area Dn (see FIG. 9) of the third pattern display device.

By switching the symbol to be displayed as the main symbol in accordance with the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the player can simply recognize the display result of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The game is designed to help you understand complex gameplay in an easy-to-understand manner.

Regarding the control for switching the symbol to be displayed as the main symbol mentioned above, a detailed explanation will be given later, but the value of the performance state is set based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the fluctuation status of each symbol, and the value of the performance state is The system is configured to switch and display a pattern to be displayed as a main pattern and a pattern to be displayed as a secondary pattern based on the following.

As shown in FIG. 13, when the game state is the normal (special 1) state in which the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is being executed, "state 1" is set as the performance state. During the period when this "state 1" is set, the first special symbol is displayed as the main symbol and the normal symbol as the secondary symbol, and the reserved symbol of the first special symbol is displayed as the main reserved symbol (Fig. 9(b)). In this way, in the "normal (special 1)" state where the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is being executed, a display is displayed that allows the player to easily recognize the lottery result of the first special symbol. , the content of the game can be announced in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, in the "jackpot" state where a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and a jackpot game is being executed, the first display area Dm (see FIG. 9(b)) of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. A jackpot effect image is displayed. In this case, since the main symbol is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, "-" is set as the performance state.

After the jackpot game ends, in the "time saving (special 1)" state where the game state shifts to the time saving state and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed, the production state is changed to "state 3 ” or “state 5” is set. Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the "time saving (special 1)" state will be explained. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is performed to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol when the game state is "time saving (special 1)". In order to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol, play a right-handed game, let the ball pass through the through gate 67 (perform the normal symbol lottery), and win the normal symbol (normal symbol). It is necessary to open the electric accessory 640a with a probability of 1/20).

That is, when the gaming state is the "time saving (special 1)" state, the player plays the game while expecting that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a win. In addition, in this embodiment, when the normal symbol whose fluctuation has started during the time saving state stops fluctuating during the time saving state and the operation of the electric accessory 640a is started, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is Since the opening pattern is set to be advantageous to the player (long opening), the normal figure fluctuation starts while the gaming state is not in the time-saving state (for example, jackpot state), and the electric pattern changes during the time-saving state. When the operation of the accessory 640a is started, or when the normal pattern fluctuation is started during the time saving state and the operation of the electric accessory 640a is started after the end of the time saving state (for example, in the normal state), the electric accessory 640a is activated. The opening operation of the object 640a is not an opening pattern (long opening) that is advantageous to the player, but a normal opening pattern (short opening).

In the gaming machine configured in this way, if the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol on the condition that the gaming state is shifted to the time saving state, , Despite the above-mentioned time-saving state, the electric accessory 640a short-circuits and the change in the normal symbol is displayed as the main symbol, giving the player a sense of distrust. There was a problem with putting it away.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the "time saving (special 1)" state is set as the gaming state, the fluctuation situation of the normal symbols is determined, and the timing at which the fluctuation of the normal symbols starts and the fluctuation of the normal symbols are determined. If the timing at which the is stopped (the timing at which the electric accessory 640a is opened in the case of a win) is both in the "time saving (special 1)" state, the production state is "state 5". ” is set, and in other cases, “state 3” is set.

During the period when "State 5" is set as the production state, the normal symbol is displayed as the main symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol as the secondary symbol, and the second special symbol is the main reserved symbol. The pending symbols are displayed (see FIG. 16(a)). In this way, in the "time saving (special 1)" state where the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed for a long period of time (150 seconds), the symbol corresponding to the main symbol is switched from the first special symbol to the normal symbol. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the lottery results of the normal symbols, and to inform the player of the contents of the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, during the period when "state 3" is set as the production state, the pseudo symbols that do not correspond to any of the first special symbol, second special symbol, and normal symbol are the main symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol. , the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed as the secondary symbol, and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is displayed as the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 16(a)). With this configuration, the content of the game can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in a state where the second special symbol is changing, "state 4" is set as the production state regardless of the gaming state (regardless of the normal state or time saving state). During the period in which "state 4" is set as this performance state, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed as the main symbol (see FIG. 17(b)). As shown in FIG. 14, when "state 5" is set as the production state, if the lottery result of the first special symbol that is changing is a specific result (for example, a jackpot), the first When the remaining variation time of 1 special symbol becomes less than a predetermined period, "state 6" is set as the performance state.

During the period when "State 6" is set as this performance state, the first special symbol is drawn from the variable display mode with the main symbol being the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol that was executed in "State 5". A pseudo pattern based on the result is displayed in a variable manner as the main pattern. By doing this, it is possible to secure a period for indicating to the player the lottery result of the first special symbol that has won the jackpot. Therefore, from a state in which "state 5" is set and a variable display mode with the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol as the main symbol is displayed, a jackpot game with the first special symbol suddenly starts, and the game It is possible to suppress the problem that the person is confused.

In addition, in this embodiment, the timing at which the presentation state is transferred from "state 5" to "state 6" is the timing at which the fluctuation of the normal symbol is executed. Thereby, the transition between performance states can be performed without any discomfort.

Further, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state and the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small win, a specific performance for the small win is executed (see FIG. 22). This gaming state is a normal state, and when a small winning game based on the first special symbol is executed, "state 2" is set as the production state.

During the period when "State 2" is set as this production state, in the special production for small wins, a pseudo symbol that does not correspond to any of the 1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol, and normal symbol will be displayed as the main symbol. be done. The pseudo symbols that are variably displayed in this case are pseudo symbols that are variably displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 during the small winning game. In other words, the timing at which this pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, a row of eyes) is set to a predetermined period before the timing at which the second variable winning device 650 is released, that is, the predetermined stop display mode is displayed. The timing is set such that the ball fired after the second variable winning device 650 can win a prize after the second variable winning device 650 is released, and the effect is made to make the player think that the second variable winning device 650 has been released based on the pseudo symbol being stopped and displayed. executed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in a small winning game in which the second variable winning device 650 is released, there is a small winning game that is advantageous to the player (the ball easily passes through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3)) and a small winning game that is disadvantageous to the player. The small winning game has a small winning game, and the type of the stop display mode of the pseudo symbol that is variably displayed during the small winning game is set depending on the type of the small winning game being executed. For example, a specific stop display mode (for example, a set of specific numbers (7) eyes) are stopped and displayed. With this configuration, the type of small winning game and the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 can be grasped by the variable display of pseudo symbols executed during the small winning game, so the player can You can enjoy small winning games.

Next, the display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 15 to 23. In this embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 13 and FIG. Then, display control is executed to vary the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) that correspond to the main symbol displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. With this configuration, in a gaming machine designed so that the drawings to draw attention to (first special symbol drawing, second special symbol drawing, and normal symbol drawing) are different depending on the gaming state, the game By simply having the player understand the display results of the main symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily inform the player whether the game result is advantageous to the player or not. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

FIG. 15(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) starts to fluctuate when the gaming state is in the time saving state. be. In this embodiment, since the right-handed game is advantageous to the player during the time saving state, a guide for guiding the game method is provided in the guide display area Dm4 formed on the upper left side of the first display area Dm. The words "Right-handed" are displayed. In the center of the first display area Dm, a regular symbol Dmc whose main symbol is a third symbol corresponding to the regular symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner in synchronization with the regular symbol. Further, on the left side of the first display area Dm, a main reserved symbol display area Dm5 is formed for displaying the number of reserved stored symbols of the second special symbol as the main reserved symbol. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 15(a), the number of pending memories of the second special symbol is "0".

The second display area Dn1 formed on the upper right side of the first display area Dm has a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and the second display area Dn2 has a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. However, in the third display area Dn3, the third symbols corresponding to the normal symbols are displayed as secondary symbols, and in the second display area Dn1 and the second display area Dn3, the corresponding symbols are shown to be changing. Therefore, the third symbol (secondary symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and in the second display area Dn2, the third symbol (secondary symbol) is displayed in a stopped state to show that the corresponding symbol is not changing.

Furthermore, regarding the display mode of the secondary symbols displayed in the second display areas Dn1 to Dn3, the display mode corresponds to whether or not the corresponding symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) is changing. That's fine. In addition, as a display mode corresponding to a symbol that is stopped, it is sufficient to be able to grasp that it is not changing (that it is stopped), and as shown in the second display area Dn2 of FIG. 15(a), "-" ” may be stopped and displayed, or the previous variable display may be stopped and displayed as it is.

In the second display area Dn4, the number "3" is displayed as a display mode to indicate that the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol is three, and in the second display area Dn5, , The number "0" is displayed as a display mode to indicate that the number of reserved memories (number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol is 0 (state where no reserved memory has been acquired), and the second display In the area Dn6, the number "4" is displayed as a display mode to indicate that the number of stored normal symbols (number of reserved balls) is four.

As a display mode for showing the number of reserved memories (number of reserved balls) of each symbol displayed in the second display areas Dn4 to Dn6, as in this embodiment, the number of reserved memories of each symbol is specifically shown. You may use a display mode that shows the value as a number, or a display mode that only shows whether or not there is a pending memory for each symbol (for example, "○" if there is a pending memory, "-" if there is no pending memory). May be used. In this case, the number of pending memories may be indicated by changing the color of the display mode of "○" indicating that there is pending memory. Further, a display mode that abstractly suggests the number of reserved memories may be used.

The state shown in FIG. 15(a) is a state in which the first special symbol fluctuates for a variation time of 150 seconds and the second special symbol does not fluctuate. Therefore, in the second display area Dn1, the first A sub-symbol corresponding to the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and a "-" is displayed in the second display area Dn2, indicating that the sub-symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds formed below the first display area Dm, "150 seconds" is displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 as a time display to indicate the remaining period of the time saving state, and In the second sub-display area Ds2 on the left side of the display area Ds1, "Countdown!!" is displayed as a guide display to notify the player that the remaining period of the time saving state is being subtracted. In addition, in this embodiment, as the remaining period displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1, the remaining period of the fluctuation period (150 seconds) of the special map 1 in the time saving state is calculated, and the calculated value is displayed. Therefore, the accurate period until the end of the time saving state can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player can play the game with peace of mind until the period elapses. However, a different value may be displayed as the remaining period display displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1, for example, a value whose upper limit is the remaining period of the variable period (150 seconds) of special map 1 in the time saving state. may be set randomly and the value may be displayed as being subtracted.

In this case, until the displayed value reaches 0, the difference between the value indicating the remaining fluctuation period of special map 1 and the randomly set value is added and displayed, or the displayed value is changed to "???" You may want to change the display to . With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time-saving state will last, and it is possible to make the player constantly feel excited while playing the game.

FIG. 15(b) shows the time point when the gaming state is a time saving state and 40 seconds have passed since the first special symbol (special symbol 1) started changing (from the state shown in FIG. 15(a)). It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in . As shown in FIG. 15(b), the main symbol Dmc is stopped and displayed in a mode (display mode of "555") that notifies you of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol, and the first display area Dm A guidance display is displayed on the lower right side of the screen to notify that the electric accessory 640a is opened long due to the winning of the normal symbol and the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, "110 seconds" is displayed as the remaining period of the time saving state in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, and in the second sub-display area Ds2, a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is displayed. "Charge time" indicating that the electric accessory 640a is in an easy state (a state in which the electric accessory 640a is operated in a long open operation) is displayed. Then, in the second display area Ds3, a stop display mode ("○○") for indicating that the normal symbol has been won is displayed.

In this way, while the game state is in the time-saving state and the variation of special symbol 1 is being executed, the lottery result of the regular symbol (common symbol) is the symbol that the player should pay most attention to, so The lottery result of the general pattern is displayed using the pattern Dmc. Therefore, it is possible to provide a display that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display position and display mode of each main pattern (special pattern 1 main pattern, special pattern 2 main pattern, general pattern main pattern, pseudo main pattern) displayed in the first display area Dm are In addition, the stop display mode for indicating a specific lottery result (for example, a win) in which the lottery result of the symbol is advantageous to the player is also the same stop display mode (for example, a double row). Even if the target symbol is changed in accordance with the gaming state, the system is configured so that an effect display (effect variation display) that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player can be executed, but other than that. As a configuration, the display position and display mode may be different for each main symbol, or the stop display mode may be different to indicate a specific lottery result (for example, a win) in which the lottery result of the symbol is advantageous to the player. You can also let

FIG. 16(a) is a diagram showing a state after a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 while the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is changing when the game state is a time saving state. As shown in FIG. 16(a), when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640, a display indicating that the ball has entered the second ball entry port 640 is displayed at the upper center of the first display area Dm. The message "Charge completed" will be displayed. Then, in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5, a display mode (black circle in the figure) indicating that the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is "1" is displayed. In this state, the number "1" is displayed in the second display area Dn5 as a display mode indicating that the number of second special symbols reserved and stored is one.

In this embodiment, when a normal symbol is won during time saving and the electric accessory 640a is in the long open state, the condition for closing the electric accessory 640a is that one ball enters the second ball entrance 640. It is set that 11 seconds (total opening time 6 seconds) have elapsed since the operation of the ball or electric accessory 640a started, and this figure shows that one ball enters the second ball entrance 640, Since the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a has been completed and the next normal symbol variation state is being executed, the common symbol main symbol Dmc is being displayed in a variable manner in the center of the first display area Dm. Further, "100 seconds" is displayed as the remaining period of the time saving state in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as mentioned above, at the time when one second special symbol is acquired, the first special symbol is changed after the time saving state ends (after the fluctuation of the first special symbol that is currently fluctuating is stopped). 2. The variable display of special symbols starts, and it is designed so that you can win a symbol or a V-winning prize with a high probability. Furthermore, since a time saving state is always given after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the lottery of the second special symbol, there is another chance to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol. In addition, if a plurality of second special symbols are acquired during one time-saving state (while the first special symbol is changing), jackpot games corresponding to the acquired number are executed. has been done. Therefore, by displaying the "second special symbol pending memory" that the player most expects during the time saving state as the main pending symbol on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. can.

In this embodiment, as the display mode of the main reservation symbol, a maximum of four "black circles" can be displayed in accordance with the number of reservation memories, but other configurations may be used, for example, In order to effectively notify the continuation of the consecutive game mode (the presence or absence of the second special symbol being held in memory), the display mode of the main holding symbol corresponding to the first holding memory of the second special symbol is changed to the other main holdings. The display mode may be different from the display mode of the symbols. In this case, the display mode is to emphasize the main reserved symbol corresponding to the first reserved symbol of the second special symbol more than the other main reserved symbols by making the main reserved symbols different in size, color, shape, and pattern. Alternatively, only the main reserved symbol corresponding to the first reserved symbol of the second special symbol may be displayed at a different position from the other main reserved symbols. Further, instead of changing the display mode of the main pending symbols, the mode of the display area side where the main pending symbols are displayed (display mode of the background image) may be varied. Further, only when the first reserved memory of the second special symbol is obtained, the audio output means or the light emitting means may be used to notify that fact.

FIG. 16(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the gaming state is the time saving state and the fluctuation period of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 1 second remaining. In this state, a pseudo effect pattern whose main pattern does not correspond to the display of the first special pattern, second special pattern, or normal pattern is displayed in the center of the first display area Dm as a pseudo main pattern Dmb. This pseudo main symbol Dmb is temporarily stopped and displayed in an oscillating state until the period when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped (until the remaining period display in the first sub-display area Ds1 becomes "0 seconds"). .

This pseudo performance symbol is used at the timing when the normal symbol fluctuation starts when the gaming state is the short time state and the fluctuation period exceeds the short remaining time period (timing when "state 3" is set as the performance state). This is what is displayed. With this configuration, when the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol whose fluctuation period exceeds the short remaining time period is displayed as the ordinary symbol Dmc, even if the ordinary symbol Dmc is the winning symbol. Even if the electric accessory 640a is stopped and displayed in a display mode that shows this, it is possible to suppress the problem that the electric accessory 640a becomes short-circuited and gives the player a sense of distrust in the performance.

In addition, the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol whose fluctuation period is longer than the short remaining time period is displayed as the common symbol main symbol Dmc, and the display of the common symbol main symbol Dmc is interrupted at the timing when the time saving state ends ( However, if the display of the main symbol used to make the player pay attention to the displayed content is changed midway through, it will give the player a great sense of discomfort. There's a problem. By using the configuration described above, such problems can also be solved.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the display mode showing the lottery result of the first special symbol is displayed as the display mode of the pseudo effect pattern, the pseudo effect pattern is By simply changing the swing state (temporary stop state) to a completely stopped state, the lottery result of the first special symbol can be displayed smoothly (see FIG. 17(a)). In addition, if the temporarily stopped main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb) is temporarily stopped in a display mode that indicates a win, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a win, so the bonus is reliably given to the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem of giving the player a sense of distrust in the display mode (display result) of the main symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Note that a configuration other than the configuration in which the pseudo effect pattern is displayed during the period in which the pseudo effect pattern described in this embodiment is displayed as the main pattern (during the period in which "state 3" is set as the effect state) may be used. For example, during that period, no main symbol may be displayed, and an effect may be executed to encourage the end of the time saving state. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the normal symbol Dmc corresponding to the normal symbol for which a fluctuation period longer than the short period of time remaining from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to suppress situations that give players a sense of distrust.

In the state shown in FIG. 16(b), the fluctuation of the normal symbol is displayed in a stopped state while the pseudo main symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, so the lottery result of the normal symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn3. is stopped and displayed in a display mode (“○×”) indicating that it is out of order. In this way, if the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol is within a predetermined period (for example, within 2 seconds) from the fluctuation stop timing of special symbol 1 (time saving state end timing), and the lottery result of the normal symbol is off. In both cases, an effect display using the pseudo main symbol Dmb is executed.

In FIG. 16(b), since the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 displays a display mode indicating that the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is two, after the time saving state ends, the second special symbol will begin to change. In order to inform the player of this, "Charge release time is about to come!!" is displayed above the first display area Dm. This "charge release time" indicates a period during which a jackpot corresponding to the number of second special symbols held and stored is executed.

Then, when it enters the charge release time, as shown in FIG. 17(a), "Charge release time enters" is displayed in the information in the first display area Dm, and the special figure 1 main symbol Dma is stopped and displayed. A normal symbol whose fluctuation is displayed at this timing (time saving end timing), that is, a normal symbol whose fluctuation starts during the time saving state and whose fluctuation stops after the end of the time saving, is displayed in the second display area as a secondary symbol. Since it is displayed on Dn3, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned problem when the fluctuating display of the normal pattern main symbol Dmc is shown to the player.

Next, when the charge release time starts, the special figure 2 main symbol Dmd is displayed in a variable manner in the first display area Dm, as shown in FIG. 17(b). In this case, since the second special symbol starts to change, the display mode indicating the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved symbols) of the special symbol 2 displayed in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 is updated, and the remaining one reserved symbol is displayed in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5. A display mode indicating the number of memories is displayed. In addition, in the second display area Dn, the sub-symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 is displayed in the second display area Dn1 in the same manner as the main symbol in FIG. 17(a), and in the second display area Dn2. The special figure 2 variation is displayed, and the regular figure variation is displayed as a secondary symbol in the second display area Dn3.

In this embodiment, when the fluctuation of the special drawing 2 is executed, it is designed so that it is easy to win either the jackpot or the small winning (100% winning), and the period during which the special drawing 2 is changing is , there is no need for the player to keep an eye on the fluctuations of the common symbols. Therefore, while the special figure 2 is being varied, by displaying the special figure 2 main symbol Dmd as the main symbol, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In this embodiment, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set to 2 seconds in both the normal state and the time saving state. This period of 2 seconds is shorter than the minimum period normally set as the symbol fluctuation time. As a result, during the period in which the special figure 2 is changing, execution and stopping of the normal figure variation are suppressed without straddling a plurality of gaming states. This suppresses the occurrence of extra effects during the special figure 2 variation. In addition, with this configuration, when the special symbol 2 fluctuates during the time saving state, the winning variation of the regular symbol is executed and stopped during the special symbol 2 fluctuation period (during the time shortening). It is possible to prevent the electric accessory 640a from being released and the number of special symbol 2 pending increases during the special symbol 2 fluctuation period (during time reduction), thereby providing excessive balls to the player. This can be suppressed.

In addition, it is configured so that the fluctuation period of the normal symbol and the fluctuation period of the special symbol 2 can be selected from among multiple, and only when the selected fluctuation period satisfies a predetermined condition, the fluctuation period of the special symbol 2 (during the time reduction) ), the electric accessory 640a may be configured to be openable. This has the effect of providing surprise to the players and motivating them to play the game.

Next, when the special figure 2 fluctuation shown in FIG. 17(b) wins a small hit and is stopped and displayed, the display screen shown in FIG. 18(a) is displayed. In other words, in the first display area Dm, the special figure 2 main symbol Dmd is displayed in a stopped state ("555") indicating a small win, and in the lower right area of the first display area Dm, the special figure 2 main symbol Dmd is displayed during a small win game. A guide display is displayed to guide the player to the location of the second variable winning device 650 that will be played. Then, "Aim for V" is displayed in the second sub-display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds.

Then, during the small winning game shown in FIG. 18(a), when the ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) in the second variable winning device 650 and the jackpot game is started, FIG. 18(b) ) will be displayed. In this jackpot production screen, the main symbol is not displayed in the main display area Dm, and the third symbol corresponding to each symbol (special 1, special 2, general symbol) is displayed as a sub symbol in the second display area Dm. Is displayed. Thereby, the player can enjoy the jackpot performance without having to worry about the fluctuating display of each symbol (special 1, special 2, common symbol) being executed.

Furthermore, in the jackpot performance, "Charge Bonus 1st" is displayed in the main display area Dm as a consecutive winning number display indicating the number of jackpots executed during the consecutive winning mode, and below that, the number of jackpots currently being executed is displayed. "ROUND1" is displayed as a round number display indicating the number of rounds. As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of rounds (2, 5, 7, 10, and 15 rounds) are set in the jackpot game. Moreover, in this embodiment, a jackpot can be executed after the end of the time saving state by the number of reserved special drawings 2 stored during the special drawing 1 variation (150 seconds variation) during the time saving state.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment configured as described above, the display regarding the plurality of jackpots executed during the consecutive winnings state is displayed in a series in which the period from the start to the end of the consecutive winnings state is counted as one period. It is configured to be able to display a cumulative display for a special period and a cumulative display for a specific period that aggregates only the jackpot games based on the right to win a jackpot obtained by one variation of special drawing 1 (i.e., the number of reserved special drawings 2). , In the example diagram shown in FIG. 18(a), the round number display area Dm6 formed at the lower right side of the first display area Dm has a round number corresponding to the number of rounds targeted for the jackpot game within the above-mentioned specific period. A number display mode is displayed.

In this round number display area Dm6, it is determined how many rounds of jackpot games will be executed cumulatively based on the reserved memory of special symbol 2 acquired by one variation of special symbol 1, and the determination result is displayed. A display mode suggesting the following is displayed. Specifically, based on the completion of the special figure 1 variation (150 seconds variation) during the time-saving game, the winning information corresponding to the special figure 2 hold (i.e., stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223a described later) The winning information regarding the special drawing 2 that is being played is extracted, and the number of executable jackpots and the number of rounds are determined. Then, a display mode that includes at least the determination result is displayed in the round number display area Dm6.

The round number display mode displayed in the round number display area Dm6 is a confirmed round number display mode indicating the number of rounds that are confirmed to be executed (indicated by a solid circle in FIG. 18(b)). , the display mode of the currently running round (indicated by a black circle in FIG. 18(b)) and the jackpot right acquired during the special period (150 seconds variation) during the time-saving game. A specific period total round number suggestion display mode (indicated by a dotted circle in FIG. 18(b)) indicates the total number of rounds in a jackpot game period (which can be executed in a jackpot game period).

By executing the jackpot effect configured in this way, the player can check the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls displayed in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 and the total number of rounds for a specific period displayed in the number of rounds display area Dm6. The player can enjoy the jackpot game while predicting the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game to be executed in the future while looking at the number suggestion display mode.

Furthermore, as described above, in the round number display area Dm6, the execution confirmed round number display mode and the currently executed round display mode are displayed, so that the round of the currently executed jackpot game is displayed within a specific period. Of the total number of rounds that may be executed (the number of rounds displayed as the total round number suggestion display mode for a specific period) or the number of rounds that are confirmed to be executed (the display mode of the number of rounds confirmed to be executed), The player can easily understand which area it is. Therefore, it is possible to easily predict the number of remaining rounds to be executed within a specific period.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18(b), "1st Charge Bonus" is displayed as the number of consecutive wins indicating the number of jackpots executed during consecutive winnings mode. Displays the number of consecutive winnings (number of consecutive winnings within a specific period) that is executed based on the jackpot right acquired in the special figure 1 fluctuation (150 second fluctuation) during the time-saving game (the number of consecutive winnings within the specified period) mentioned above. Alternatively, both the number of consecutive games and the number of consecutive games within a specific period may be displayed.Also, the number of times the specific period starts during the consecutive games mode ( A means is provided to calculate the number of times the special figure 1 variation (150 seconds variation) is executed during the time-saving game, and the total number of jackpots during the consecutive game mode, the number of times entering a specific period, and the number of times the special figure 1 variation (150 seconds variation) is executed within one specific period is provided. It may also be configured to display the number of jackpots that have been won.With this configuration, the user can not only enjoy the display mode during jackpot games, but also understand the playing status of the pachinko machine 10 and make future decisions about the game. Further, after calculating the above-mentioned number of times, the average number of jackpots executed within one specific period may be displayed.

By displaying the average number of jackpots within this specific period, if the average number of jackpots within the specific period is low, it may be possible to determine whether the lottery results for the normal symbols were biased toward the losers, or due to a throughput that is a condition for the lottery for the normal symbols to be executed. This can be used as a reference for future games while analyzing the probable cause of whether the number of balls passing through the gate 67 was small.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode displayed in the round number display area Dm6 is configured to display a display mode corresponding to the number of rounds (1 round, 1 display mode), but the round number display The display mode displayed in the area Dm6 is not limited to this, and may be any display mode that allows the player to predict the number of rounds. For example, the size and color of the display mode may be varied according to predetermined rules in accordance with the number of rounds.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, "ROUND1" is displayed as the round number display indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot that is currently being executed, but this round number display may also display the number of rounds for one jackpot game. Instead, the number of rounds may be added and displayed for jackpot games executed within a specific period. This makes it possible to easily grasp and store game results during the consecutive game mode. In the second sub-display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, "5, 10, 20" indicating the number of times to be executed in a plurality of jackpot games executed within a specific period is displayed.

When the second jackpot game is started by the time saving variation (special figure 2 variation) executed after the jackpot game shown in FIG. 18(b) ends, the second jackpot game shown in FIG. 19(a) The middle display screen will be displayed. As shown in FIG. 19(a), when the second jackpot game has started, the main pending symbol display area Dm5 displays a display mode indicating that the remaining pending memory number is "0". , "Charge Bonus 2nd Time" is displayed in the main display area Dm as an indication of the number of consecutive wins to indicate that the current jackpot is the second jackpot in the consecutive winnings mode. In the round number display area Dm6, a total of 20 rounds of execution confirmed round number display modes are displayed. In other words, in FIG. 18(b), the number of rounds that was displayed as the total round number suggestion display mode for a specific period is changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode by executing the current jackpot game (second time). ing. In this way, by changing the display mode of suggesting the total number of rounds in the specific period to the display mode of the confirmed number of rounds to be executed, it is possible for the player to play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to notify the number of rounds of the current jackpot game when the jackpot game starts, the number of rounds displayed as the total round number suggestion display mode for the specific period, the number of rounds of the current jackpot game is Although the configuration is such that the number of rounds corresponding to the number of rounds of the game is changed to the display mode of the number of confirmed rounds to be executed, other configurations may be used. For example, at the timing when a jackpot game is started, the number of confirmed rounds to be executed is displayed. If a predetermined condition is met during a jackpot game (for example, execution of a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 during a jackpot game, or a jackpot game reaches the third round), the total amount for a specific period will be displayed as is. The round number suggestion display mode may be changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode. Thereby, even during a jackpot game, the player can grasp the number of rounds to be executed, thereby making the performance more interesting.

Further, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the display mode for suggesting the total number of rounds in a specific period is all changed to the display mode for displaying the number of confirmed rounds to be executed, but other configurations may be used. For example, the display mode for suggesting the total number of rounds in a specific period It may be possible to change only a part of the display mode to the number of confirmed rounds to be executed, or to change the display mode for suggesting the total number of rounds in a specific period to the number of confirmed rounds to be executed at multiple timings during the jackpot game. You can also do this. Thereby, it is possible to execute a jackpot game while always maintaining a sense of expectation.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19(b) to 20(b), the remaining period of the time saving state (the time saving state in which the special chart 1 variation is executed) (the remaining fluctuation period of special chart 1) is determined under the predetermined condition ( The effect display (battle effect) that is executed when the remaining 10 seconds) is satisfied will be explained. This performance display (battle performance) is a performance for informing the player that the consecutive game mode will end if there is no reserved memory of special drawings 2 at the time when the time saving state ends. As described above, this battle performance is executed when the remaining period of the time saving state is within 10 seconds and the number of special drawings 2 pending is "0". If a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 during this battle performance and the special map 2 is held in memory, a battle victory performance is executed to indicate that the consecutive game mode will continue. (See FIG. 20(a)). If the ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640 during this battle performance, a battle defeat performance is performed to indicate that the consecutive game mode continues ( (See FIG. 20(b)). In addition, in this embodiment, when a battle effect is executed, the effect is set such that the player ultimately loses the battle. This is because the period of the battle performance is set to a period (10 seconds) in which the normal pattern fluctuation can be varied 3 or 4 times, and the probability of entering the ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the battle performance is This is because the probability is lower than the probability that the ball will not enter the second ball entry port 640 during the battle performance. That is, since it is only necessary to perform control to change the performance contents when an event with a low probability occurs, the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the effect of the battle effect is configured to be different depending on whether or not the special drawing 2 is on hold, other elements may be included. For example, if the lottery result of special symbol 1 which is changing during the time saving is a jackpot, the battle victory performance may be executed at the timing when the lottery result of special symbol 1 is stopped and displayed. Thereby, a surprising performance can be provided to the player who predicts the outcome of the battle performance based only on the contents of the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 (presence or absence of storage).

In this embodiment, the display mode of the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 is updated at the timing when the special figure 2 is stored in a reserved state. Even if suspension storage occurs, the display mode of the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 may not be updated, or the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 may not be displayed at the time when the battle performance is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to realize that a ball has entered the second ball entry port 640 while the battle performance is being executed, thereby increasing the performance effect of the battle performance. I can do it.

In addition, it is possible to determine whether a normal symbol is valid or not based on the winning information of the normally stored symbol, and change the content of the battle performance (opponent, order of attack, type of attack, etc.) based on the determination result. It is recommended to configure This allows the player to pay close attention to the content of the battle performance. Further, a bonus performance may be provided that is executed only when a plurality of special drawing 2 reservations are obtained during the battle performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21(a), a description will be given of the contents of the performance executed when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired up to the upper limit during the special figure 1 time shortening variation. As shown in FIG. 21(a), when the upper limit of special drawing 2 reservations is obtained, this is to show that the upper limit (4 pieces) of special drawing 2 reservations are stored in the main reservation symbol display area Dm5. The main reserved symbol is displayed in the display mode (display mode with four black circles in the figure). Then, in the center of the first display area Dm, a message is displayed to congratulate the user on reaching the upper limit of the special map 2 reservation. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21(b), a bonus performance (enjoyment performance using characters) unrelated to the lottery results of each symbol is performed in the first display area Dm.

In the first sub-display area Ds1, characters "??" hiding the remaining period of the time period are displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which gaming state is in the period in which the above-described bonus performance is being executed.

Here, during the special figure 1 time saving fluctuation, the normal symbol lottery is repeated, and by winning the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is opened and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. Then, a game for acquiring the second special symbol in the reserved memory is executed. While such a game is being executed, the player pays the most attention to the lottery result of the normal symbol, so the normal symbol main symbol Dmc is displayed as the main symbol on the third symbol display device 81 ( (See FIG. 15(b)), once the maximum number of special drawing 2 reservations (4 pieces) as shown in FIG. 21(a) has been stored, no more special drawing 2 reservations can be stored. , the player no longer has to pay close attention to whether or not the normal symbol has been won. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 21(a), the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn3 as a secondary symbol.

Thereby, it is possible to suppress displaying the third symbol corresponding to the symbol that the player does not pay attention to as the main symbol. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem when the common pattern main symbol Dmc is displayed in the state shown in FIG. 21(a) and stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a win.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the content of the effect when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) executed in the normal gaming state wins a small hit will be explained. FIG. 22(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen immediately after the small winning game is started, and FIG. 22(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen immediately after the small winning game is started. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen at the opening timing of FIG.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, when a small winning game based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 is executed, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed in the first display area Dm. This pseudo main symbol Dmb is displayed in a variable manner so as to suggest the opening timing of the second variable prize winning device 650 during the small winning game, and in the sub display area Ds, " If the symbols (pseudo main symbols Dmb) are aligned, the message "Chance" is displayed (see FIG. 22(a)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 22(b), when the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode ("444" in FIG. 22(b)), it is displayed on the lower right side of the first display area Dm. A guide display mode is displayed that guides the player to a game in which the second variable winning device 650 is aimed, and the characters "Aim for V" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds to explain the game content.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a small winning game based on the special figure 1 is executed in the normal state, the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is variably displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 is 1 display area Dm. Thereby, it can be made to appear that the opening operation of the second variable winning device 650, which is executed multiple times during the small winning game, is executed based on the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb.

In addition, in a state where a small winning game based on special drawing 1 is executed in the normal state, the main pending symbol for displaying the number of pending symbols to the player in an emphasized manner is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It consists of This ensures that the pending symbol display indicating the number of pending memories for each symbol described above is not changed based on the variable display of the pseudo main symbol that is unrelated to each symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2, general symbol). This can be made difficult for players to notice. In addition, as a configuration other than this, a pseudo pending symbol display (pseudo pending main symbol) that is varied based on the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Furthermore, during the small winning game, the pseudo main symbol Dmb also performs a variable display that is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that indicates a loss (for example, a loose bet) at a timing different from the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650. be done. Thereby, even if the interval between the opening timings of the second variable winning device 650 is wide, it is possible to continuously display the pseudo main symbol Dmb in a variable manner. In addition, in the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is stopped and displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650, the stopping display mode is changed so that the opening timing of the corresponding second variable winning device 650 is an opening that is advantageous to the player. It is configured to vary depending on whether or not the timing (opening timing that allows the ball to pass through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3)), for example, the stoppage of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing that is advantageous to the player. As the display mode, a display mode in which specific identical numbers are stopped, such as "777", is set. As a result, the opening timing of the second variable prize winning device 650 and the advantageous degree of the opening timing can be grasped by the fluctuating display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb executed during the small winning game. It is possible to arouse interest in the content of the performance display.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23(a), an explanation will be given of the error display displayed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. FIG. 23(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when a right-handed game is performed in a normal state in which a left-handed game is performed. As shown in FIG. 23(a), in the normal state where a left-handed game is executed, if it is determined that a right-handed game has been performed, the main symbol displayed in the first display area Dm is covered. A notification display area Dm7 is formed as shown below, and the words "Please return to left-handed batting" are displayed. This allows the player to correct the game content.

In this embodiment, the error display shown in FIG. 23(a) is when it is detected that a right-handed game is executed (a ball passes through the through gate 67) during a normal state in which a left-handed game is executed. However, in a state where the normal state in which a left-handed game is performed is set as the game state, immediately after transitioning from the time saving state to the normal state, the ball passes through the through gate 67. It is a good idea to prevent an error display from being executed even if it is detected that the error has occurred. Specifically, the fluctuation period of the normal symbol that starts immediately before the transition from the time saving state to the normal state (just before the end of the time saving state), and the electric movement that is executed if the fluctuation (lottery) result is a hit. It is preferable to set a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) during the operating period of the accessory 640a or after the end of the time saving state as a grace period in which error display is not performed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an error display from being performed even if a ball fired into the game area immediately before the end of the time saving state passes through the through gate 67 after the end of the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player who was actively playing the game until just before the end of the time-saving state from losing his or her desire to play.

In addition, when such a configuration is used, if a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 during the above-mentioned grace period, it is preferable that a special effect different from the normal one is executed, for example. It is preferable to perform a revival effect indicating that a state advantageous to the player (consecutive game mode) has been restored. Thereby, the player can be motivated to play the game until the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23(b), the display contents displayed during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a in the time saving state will be described. FIG. 23(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the electric accessory opening operation (during long opening) in the time saving state. In this embodiment, by continuing to play the right-handed game during the time saving state, if the electric accessory 640a is in the long release state, the ball can be immediately entered into the second ball entry opening 640. A game board 13 is configured. Further, the electric accessory 640a that is opened for a long time is opened for 3 seconds as a first opening period, then passes through a closing period of 5 seconds, and then a 3 second opening period (second opening period) is set again.

The display screen shown in FIG. 23(b) is displayed when the ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640 during the first opening period during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a (during long opening). It is something that will be done. In other words, even though the configuration of the game board 13 is used so that the ball can be reliably entered into the second ball entrance 640 during the first release period if a right-handed game is played, the first If a ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640 during the open period, it is possible that a normal right-handed game is not being executed, so a display to encourage right-handed batting is displayed in the notification display area Dm7. Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, even if a right-handed game is started after viewing the content displayed in the notification display area Dm7, the ball can be entered into the second ball entry opening 640 during the second opening period. is set. Specifically, it is designed so that the period from when a ball is launched in a right-handed game until the ball reaches the second ball entrance 640 (electric accessory 640a) is approximately 2 seconds, The closed period provided between the first open period (3 seconds) and the second open period (3 seconds) is set to be 5 seconds. Therefore, by playing a right-handed game during the 3 seconds after the start of the closed period, it becomes possible to cause the ball to enter the second ball entry opening 640.

In this embodiment, the first open period and the second open period are set to the same number of seconds, and the means for measuring the elapsed period of the first open period and the means for measuring the elapsed period of the second open period are used. Although this is intended to be common, the second open period may be set longer than the first open period, for example. As a result, based on the fact that the display for encouraging right-handed hitting is displayed in the notification display area Dm7, when playing a right-handed game, it is possible to more reliably enter the ball into the second ball entry opening 640. can.

Further, in this embodiment, the closing period is set to 5 seconds, but a longer closing period (for example, 30 seconds) may be set. In this case, the condition for terminating the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is the number of balls that can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 during the first opening period ( For example, the termination condition may be the entry of a ball (for example, 1 ball). As a result, even if the closing period executed during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a (the closing period executed after the first opening period has elapsed) is extended, it will not affect the player who is normally playing right-handed games. Therefore, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a can be completed before the closing period is executed.

<About the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 24) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 24, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. These counters and the like are operated by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, etc. used in

To set the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, select the first winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small win) lottery and the jackpot type (jackpot symbol). A first winning type counter C2 used for the selection, a stop type counter C3 used for selecting the stopping type, a small winning type counter C5 used for selecting the small winning type (small winning symbol), and a small winning type counter C5 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern. A fluctuation type counter CS1 for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 37), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see Figure 53). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores the first ball entrance port 64 (left first ball entrance port 64a, right first ball entrance port 64b (hereinafter, when both are shown, they will be referred to as the first ball entrance port 64). )) A special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for winning a prize and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in which each counter value is stored for a winning in the second ball entrance 640 are provided. There is. In this embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each provided with up to four reserved balls, and are configured to be able to store a total of up to eight reserved balls. Therefore, if a ball enters the first ball entry hole 64 during a period when a special symbol can be drawn, such as when a special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner or when a special symbol jackpot game is not in progress, each counter value will be changed to the special symbol. When a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display). Various settings and control processes are executed to do so. Similarly, each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Various settings and control processing are executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reservations (number of reservations stored) for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to 4, but the upper limit of the number of reservations corresponding to each symbol is set to 4. It is not limited to , different values may be set, or a configuration may be adopted in which only one special symbol can be reserved.

On the other hand, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, or during a period in which it is impossible to draw a special symbol such as during a jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64 or When a prize is won at the second ball entry port 640, if the number of balls held for the winning ball entry port (starting port) is less than the upper limit (four in this embodiment), each counter value is not acquired. and is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning ball entrance. In addition, if the number of reserved balls for the winning ball entrance is equal to or higher than the upper limit (in this embodiment, 4 balls), each counter value etc. is not acquired and the prize balls (in this embodiment, 5 balls) are retained. Only prize balls (prize balls) are treated as invalid balls that are paid out to the player.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is set to four for each of the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, but is not limited to this, and may be less than four (for example, 3 pieces) or more than 4 pieces (for example, 8 pieces). Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which no upper limit is provided.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 24. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and becomes 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 299). It is configured to return to . In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 53).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), for example, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. The ball is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The random number value for the special symbol jackpot is defined in the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is If it matches the value of the random number that results in a jackpot defined in 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be explained. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) are set that are determined to be a win in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, the first winning random number table 202a is provided with a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 used for the lottery of the first special symbol, and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 used for the lottery of the second special symbol. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a jackpot. Further, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "1 to 3", and if it is "1 to 3", it is determined that it is a small win.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a jackpot. Further, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "1 to 299", and if it is "1 to 299", it is determined that it is a small win.

Here, whether the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot. For example, the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is a jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the first win type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. As described above, there is one value of the first winning random number counter C1 that is a jackpot for the special symbol, and its random value "0" is stored in the first winning random number table 202a as described above. Since the total number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 1 among the total number of random numbers of 300, the probability of a jackpot with the special symbol is "1/300". In addition, the value of the first random number counter C1 that results in a small win in the first special symbol is 3, and the value of the first random number counter C1 that results in a small win in the second special symbol is 299, so the first The probability of a small hit with the special symbol is "1/100", and the probability of a small win with the second special symbol is "299/300".

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 and the first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 27(a)). The Rukoto. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 27(a).

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of miss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is different from the symbol on which the reach is applied. Two stop (performance) patterns are selected: "out of reach" where the symbol stops (for example, range of 90 to 99) and "completely off" (range of 0 to 89, for example) where no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, and when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, its value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Note that the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Furthermore, in this embodiment, this table is divided into one for the normal state and one for the time saving state, and the range of random values set for each stop type of failure is changed depending on the table. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols or in a time saving state.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured such that it is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 53) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Incidentally, the fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 29 and 30) that stores a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is located inside.

The variation pattern table 202d defines a plurality of data tables for selecting variation patterns (see FIGS. 29 and 30). In this variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set, and variation patterns corresponding to each gaming state and validity judgment result are set for each. The table is set. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) occurs, and when the ball passes through the normal starting gate (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. When this is detected, it is acquired and stored in the general pattern execution area of the RAM 203.

The random number value for the normal symbol win is defined in the second win random number table 202c (see FIG. 26(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second win random number counter C4. If it matches the random number value defined in the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) has won. For example, in this second winning random number table 202c, there are 12 random numbers that are normal symbol wins, and the range is "0 to 11". The total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4 is 240, and the total number of random numbers that will be a hit is 12, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is 12/240 (1/20) ”.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal state and the time saving state can be set as the gaming state, and depending on the gaming state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the second time when the normal symbol hits. The open time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the ball entry port 640 is varied, and the ball is configured to enter the second ball entry port 640 more easily in the short time state than in the normal state. As a result, when the gaming state is the normal state, a game (left-handed hitting game) in which the first ball entry port 64 (left first ball entry port 64a) is aimed is performed, and when the gaming state is the time saving state, , it is possible to have the player play a game (right-handed game) in which the player aims at the second ball entrance 640.

In the normal state, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuating display of normal symbols is executed for 4 seconds on the second symbol display device 83. Ru. If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 11", it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (the second symbol ), the symbol "○" is displayed by lighting up, and the electric accessory 640a is opened (short-circuited) for "0.1 seconds x 2 times". On the other hand, in the time saving state, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67, a variable display of normal symbols is executed for 3 seconds on the second symbol display device 83, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained. If it is in the range of "0 to 11", it is determined that the winning is successful, and after the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "○" symbol is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). , the electric accessory 640a is opened only for "3 seconds x 2 times" (long release). In addition, in this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the normal electric accessories, and the number of openings may be changed as appropriate within a range that does not impair the gameplay.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, the timing at which the value of the first winning random number counter C4 is obtained (timing at which the normal symbol lottery is executed) and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 are explained. The electric accessory 640a is configured to open long only when the timing at which the electric accessory 640a ends (the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is set) is in the time saving state. For example, if the timing at which the value of the first winning random number counter C4 is acquired (the timing at which the normal symbol lottery is executed) is in a time saving state, the timing at which the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends Even if (the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is set) is in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a may be configured to be opened for a long time, and the value of the first random number counter C4 is obtained. Even if the timing at which the drawing is performed (the timing at which the normal symbol lottery is executed) is in the normal state, the timing at which the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends (the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is set) is the normal state. If the time is short, the electric accessory 640a may be configured to be opened for a long time.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see 53).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters, etc. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 24, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 53) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 52). Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 51) as power outage processing is immediately executed.

Next, the contents of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30. FIG. 25A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this embodiment. The ROM 202 is provided with at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, a fluctuation pattern table 202d, and a small winning type selection table 202e.

Next, the first winning random number table 202a will be explained with reference to FIGS. 26(a) to 26(c). As shown in FIG. 26(a), the first winning random number table 202a includes a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 used for the first special symbol lottery, and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 used for the second special symbol lottery. is stipulated.

Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, as shown in FIG. This is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) are set that are determined to be a win in the first special symbol lottery based on the first special symbol. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a jackpot. Further, it is determined whether the obtained value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "1 to 3", and if it is "1 to 3", it is determined that it is a small win. In addition, if it is determined that the value is between "4 and 299", it is determined that the value is out of range.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26(c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is a random number value (judgment value ) is the table set. In the second special symbol lottery, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a jackpot. Further, it is determined whether the obtained value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "1 to 299", and if it is "1 to 299", it is determined that it is a small win.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 26(d)) is a data table in which winning determination values of normal symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 26(d), regardless of the state of the gaming machine, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the second winning random number counter buffer is in the range of 0 to 11, the normal symbol wins. It will be judged.

In addition, if it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, after the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "○" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and an electric accessory is displayed. 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

Here, the electric accessory 640a in this embodiment moves in the front and back direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a solenoid (one of the other solenoids 209z) not shown, as described above with reference to FIG. 2 and the like. This electric accessory 640a functions to guide the ball to enter the second ball entry opening 640 by moving forward (opening action). On the other hand, by performing a backward retreat operation (closing operation), the ball is not guided to the second ball entry port 640 (the ball does not enter the ball).

Although the details will be described later, when the electric accessory 640a in this embodiment is in the time saving state, after a 3-second opening period (first opening period) has passed, a 5-second closing period, and a 3-second opening period. An opening operation (long opening) for which a period (second opening period) is set is executed, and if it is not in a time saving state (in a normal state), after the opening period (first opening period) of 0.1 seconds has elapsed, After a closing period of 0.1 seconds, an opening operation (short opening) is performed in which an opening period of 0.1 seconds (second opening period) is set again. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a game in which the player attempts to enter the ball into the second ball entry port 640 even though the player is not in the time saving state (in the normal state).

Moreover, the electric accessory 640a in this embodiment is designed so that when one ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the condition for ending the opening operation is satisfied and the opening operation is ended. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second ball entry opening 640 due to one opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, since the second ball entry port 640 has a structure that restricts the ball flowing down the flow path that allows the ball to enter, Since it is possible to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second ball entry port 640 at once, a plurality of balls enter the second ball entry port 640 by one opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Balling can be further suppressed.

Next, details of the first winning type selection table 202b will be explained with reference to FIG. 27(a). FIGS. 27A to 27C are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b.

The first winning type selection table 202b shows that when a jackpot of the first special symbol is won, or a small win of the first special symbol is won, and during the small winning game, the ball is placed in a specific area (V winning switch 650e3 (Fig. The special symbol 1 jackpot selection table 202b1 is used to select the jackpot type in the case of passing (see 5) It has a special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202b2 for selecting the jackpot type when the ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3 (see FIG. 5)) during a small winning game (see FIG. 27). a)).

As shown in FIG. 27(b), when the first special symbol hits the jackpot, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "0 to 79", jackpot A (7R time saving jackpot) is selected, and "580 ~99'', jackpot D (16R no time saving jackpot) is selected. Further, when the first special symbol is a small hit, a jackpot type is selected corresponding to a small win type to be described later. Specifically, when the small win type is small win A, jackpot C (7R time saving jackpot) is selected, and when the small win type is small win B, jackpot D (2R time saving jackpot) is selected.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27(c), when the second special symbol hits the jackpot, regardless of the value of the first winning type counter C2 (when the value is "0 to 99"), jackpot E (15R time saving jackpot) ) is selected. Further, when the second special symbol hits a small hit, a jackpot type is selected corresponding to a small win type described later. Specifically, if the small win type is small win C, jackpot F (jackpot with 5R time savings) is selected, if the small win type is D, jackpot G (jackpot with 10R time savings) is selected, and in the case of small win E. Jackpot E (15R time-saving jackpot) is selected.

In addition, in this embodiment, in each of the above-mentioned jackpot types, when a "time-saving jackpot" is selected, a time-saving state of "one time-saving number" is given after the end of the jackpot game. However, the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is not limited to this, and two or more times may be set, or a different number of time reduction states may be selected based on the selected jackpot type. You can do it like this. In addition, a different number of time-saving states may be selected based on the selected jackpot type and the gaming state set at the time of winning the jackpot (the ball passes through a specific area). The time-saving state may be selected a different number of times based on the jackpot type selected at the time of winning the jackpot based on the number of times "Yes jackpot" has been selected in succession. With this configuration, in addition to the contents of the jackpot game (number of rounds of the jackpot game, etc.), the content of benefits given after the jackpot game (number of time saving states) can be varied, and the game during the jackpot game can be changed. To make a player eagerly play the game while making him/her look forward to what kind of benefit (time saving state) will be given after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, a time-saving end condition is set in which the time-saving state ends when the special symbol is changed a preset number of times, but the time-saving end condition is different from this embodiment. For example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol may be measured, and different end conditions may be set for the fluctuation of each special symbol. Specifically, as a time-saving end condition, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is 4 times, or the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 1 time, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed. The total number of variations with the second special symbol is four times, or the number of variations with the second special symbol is one may be set as the time saving end condition.

In addition, each time a special symbol is changed, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to end the time-saving state, and the time-saving state may be ended based on the lottery result. The time saving state may be ended when the symbol is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to set the timing at which the time-saving state ends in a complicated manner, and the player who is playing the time-saving game can play the game while expecting that the time-saving state will continue for a long time. I can do it. In this case, it is preferable to make it possible to notify the player of at least a portion of the period during which the time reduction will not end. This has the effect that the player can be made aware of a part of the period during which the time saving will not end, and that the player can play the game with peace of mind during that period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the contents of the small winning type selection table 202e will be explained. FIGS. 28A to 28C are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small winning type selection table 202e.

The small winning type selection table 202e includes a special symbol 1 small winning selection table 202e1 for selecting the small winning type when the first special symbol wins the small winning, and a special symbol 1 small winning selection table 202e1 for selecting the small winning type when the first special symbol wins the small winning. It has a special symbol 2 small winning selection table 202e2 for selecting the small winning type (see FIG. 28(a)).

As shown in FIG. 28(b), when the first special symbol wins a small win, if the value of the small win type counter C5 is "0 to 10", small win A (V passing is possible) is selected, and " 11-99'', small win B (V cannot pass) is selected.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28(c), when the second special symbol wins a small win, if the value of the small win type counter C5 is "0 to 9", small win C (V passing is possible) is selected, In the case of "10 to 24", small win D (V passable) is selected, and in the case of "25 to 99", small win E (V passable) is selected.

In this embodiment, the operations of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the flow path solenoid 209c of the second variable prize winning device 650 are set according to the small winning type. Specifically, in the small winning game with small winnings A and C to E, the channel solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 is operating, and the ball can enter the special discharge channel 650e2. There is. On the other hand, in the small winning game based on small winning B, the channel solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 is not operating. A ball cannot enter the special discharge channel 650e2. That is, small wins A and C to E are small wins in which a jackpot game can be awarded by passing the ball through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3), and small wins B are small wins in which a jackpot is not awarded. .

In addition, in the small winning game with small winnings A and B (small winning types selected by winning the small winning of the first special symbol), the V inlet solenoid 209a operates so that the opening/closing door 650f is opened for a short period of time (Fig. 10 ), in a small winning game with small winnings C to E (small winning type selected by winning the small winning of the second special symbol), the V inlet solenoid 209a operates so that the opening/closing door 650f is opened for a long period of time (see Fig. (see 11). That is, small wins A and B are small wins in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second variable winning device 650 during a small winning game, and small wins C to E are small wins in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second variable winning device 650 during a small winning game. This is a small hit where the ball is easy to hit.

In this control example, the type of jackpot that is awarded after that is determined according to the type of small win, and the jackpot that is awarded after small win A is jackpot C (7R time saving jackpot), and the jackpot that is awarded after small win A is jackpot C (7R time saving jackpot), The jackpot that is awarded after is a jackpot D (2R no time saving jackpot), the jackpot that is awarded after a small win C is a jackpot F (5R time saving jackpot), and the jackpot that is awarded after a small win D is a jackpot G (10R The jackpot awarded after the small win E is a jackpot E (15R jackpot with time savings).

In addition, in this control example, the type of jackpot that will be awarded after that is determined according to the type of small win, but other than that, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win, Also, the type of jackpot is determined by the jackpot selection table (only the right to win the jackpot is acquired), and when the ball passes through the V winning switch 650e3 in the subsequent small win game, the jackpot for which the right was acquired earlier is executed. It's okay. By doing so, the player can select a small win that passes through the V winning switch 650e3, and can improve the interest of the game. Further, it may be configured such that a predetermined lottery is executed based on the ball passing through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during a small winning game, and the jackpot type is determined based on the lottery result. good. As a result, the content of the jackpot game to be executed can be varied depending on the timing when the ball passes through a specific area, so the player will be motivated to play the small win game, which will improve the interest of the game. can.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d will be explained with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The variation pattern table 202d is a data table used to determine the display mode (variation time) of the variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. This variable pattern table 202d defines a plurality of different tables corresponding to the types of special symbols, lottery results, and gaming conditions.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29(a), there is a variation pattern table 202d1 for special drawing 1 big hit, a variation pattern table 202d2 (normal) for special drawing 1 missing, and a variation pattern table 202d3 for special drawing 1 small winning. At least a special figure 1 time saving variation pattern table 202d4 and a special figure 2 variation pattern table 202d5 are defined.

First, with reference to FIG. 29(b), the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202d will be explained. This special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 selects the variation pattern (variation time) in the case of winning a jackpot among the variation patterns (variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) during the normal state. This table defines a random value (counter value of the variation type counter value CS1) for determining the type of variation pattern (variation time).

Specifically, when jackpot is determined as the stop type, the fluctuation pattern of normal reach (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 50" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the fluctuation pattern of "51 to 179" is associated with the range of "0 to 50". A super reach (60 seconds) variation pattern is associated with the range, and various special reach (90 seconds) variation patterns are associated with the range "180 to 198".

Next, with reference to FIG. 29(c), the contents of the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for special drawing 1 deviation will be explained. This (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 for special pattern 1 failure is used when the lottery result of special pattern 1 is a failure among the fluctuation patterns (variation time) of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) during the normal state. A random value (counter value of the fluctuation type counter value CS1) for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in is defined.

Specifically, when complete failure is determined as the stop type, a short deviation (7 seconds) fluctuation pattern is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 98", and "99 to 198'' range is associated with a variation pattern that is out of range (10 seconds). In addition, if the first special symbol is out of the lottery and the out-of-reach is determined as the stop type, various types of normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 149" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. , various types of super reach (60 seconds) are associated with the range "150 to 197", and various types of special reach (90 seconds) are associated with "198".

Next, with reference to FIG. 29(d), the contents of the special pattern 1 small winning variation pattern table 202d3 will be explained. Random value (counter value of fluctuation type counter value CS1) for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in the case where the lottery result of special map 1 is a small hit among the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of special map 1) ) is specified.

Specifically, when a small hit is determined as the stop type, super reach types (60 seconds) are are associated.

As explained above, in this embodiment, various fluctuation patterns are selected corresponding to each stop type based on the lottery result of the first special symbol, and in particular, the fluctuation time It is set such that a variation pattern with a long time (for example, 90 seconds) is more likely to be selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot. Therefore, if a player sees a fluctuating display that continues for a long period of time, could it be that they have won the jackpot? You will play the game with this expectation. Therefore, the game result can be predicted based on the period length of the set variation pattern, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30(a), the contents of the special figure 1 time saving variation pattern table 202d4 will be explained. This special figure 1 time saving variation pattern table 202d42 has a random value (counter value of variation type counter value CS1) for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) during the time saving state. stipulated.

Specifically, a variation pattern for 150 seconds is associated regardless of the determined stop type and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

FIG. 30(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the special figure 2 variation pattern table 202d5. This special figure 2 variation pattern table 202d5 defines a random value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the normal state and time saving state.

Specifically, if the determined stop type is a jackpot, a short jackpot (7 seconds) is set regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and if the determined stop type is a small win, the fluctuation type is set. Regardless of the value of the counter CS1, short and small wins (2 seconds) are associated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25(b), the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 25(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 25(b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203b. 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, time saving medium counter 203g, jackpot start flag 203h, jackpot medium flag 203i, small hit start flag 203j, small hit medium flag 203k, V passing jackpot type storage area 203m , a V flag 203n, a storage release flag 203p, a release counter 203qa, a time saving medium hit flag 203q, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas has a first winning random number counter. Each value of C1, first winning type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and small winning type counter C5 are stored, respectively.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 and C5 is acquired, and the acquired data is transferred to the four pending balls. Among the vacant areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the area with the smaller area number stores data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the first pending area. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

Note that when data is shifted from the first pending area to the execution area, the first pending area becomes vacant. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other holding areas (holding area 2 to holding area 4) to holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 3) with one lower area number. It will be done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (2nd reserved area to 4th reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In this special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the starting winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored. The method of storing the counter value, etc. is the same as that of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, has one execution area and four reserved areas (1st pending area to 4th pending area). area). A second winning random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is applied to the vacant areas of the four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). The areas with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) are stored in order from among the areas in which the area is located. That is, similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, data corresponding to the winnings are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a winning lottery of normal symbols is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination is made as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

In addition, when data is shifted from the reservation first area to the execution area, the reservation first area becomes vacant, so as in the case of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b, Shift processing is performed to shift winning data stored in other holding areas to a holding area with an area number one smaller. Further, data shifting is also performed only for the reservation area in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d displays a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of pending pitches (the number of times of waiting) up to four times (fluctuating display performed on the display device 81). The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, it reaches the maximum value of 4. It is added by 1 (see S704 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S210 in FIG. 38).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending balls N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 38). The held ball number command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed.

The audio lamp control device 113 suspends the variable display held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of pitches itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed to the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if the number of held pitches deviates from the actual number of held pitches in the variable display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received command for the number of held pitches.

The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls on hold based on the number of balls on hold command, and displays the number of balls on display for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of balls on hold each time the number of balls on hold changes. Send pitch count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved pitches notified by this display number of reserved pitches command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e displays a variable display (third symbol) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of pending pitches (the number of times of waiting) up to four times (fluctuating display performed on the display device 81). The initial value of this special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, it reaches the maximum value of 4. It is added by 1 (see S710 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 38). The value of this special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 to a maximum of four times. This is a counter that counts up to The initial value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 ( (See S1104 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a variable manner (see S905 in FIG. 45).

When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S1105 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing new is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1103 in FIG. 47: No ).

The time saving medium counter 203g is a counter for counting the remaining time period (number of changes of special symbols) in the time saving state (time saving state) of normal symbols. This time-saving medium counter 203g is set to 1 at the end of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is other than "jackpot B, D" (that is, "jackpot A, C, E to G") (see S1815 in FIG. 54). . That is, in this embodiment, when a time saving state is given after a jackpot game, one time saving state is given.

The jackpot start flag 203h is a flag used to determine whether or not it is the jackpot start timing. This jackpot start flag 203h is set to ON when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) (see S219 in FIG. 38), and the jackpot start timing in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54). (See S1801 in FIG. 54), and is set to OFF when it is determined in the jackpot control process that it is the jackpot start timing (see S1802 in FIG. 54). Thereby, it is possible to execute processing according to the jackpot start timing. In each of the control examples described above, although not shown, the jackpot start timing is similarly determined.

The jackpot flag 203i is a flag used to determine whether or not there is a jackpot, that is, whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. Similar to the jackpot start flag 203h described above, this jackpot flag 203i is set to ON when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) (see S219 in FIG. 38). Then, in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54), it is referenced to determine whether or not a jackpot is in progress (see S1805 in FIG. 54), and in the jackpot control process, it is determined that it is the timing to end the jackpot. In this case, it is set to off (see S1813 in FIG. 54).

The small win start flag 203j is a flag used to determine whether it is the timing to start a small win. This small hit start flag 203j is set to ON in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42) that is executed when the lottery result is determined to be a small win in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38). (See S610 in FIG. 42). Then, in the small hit control process (see FIG. 55), it is referenced to determine whether it is the start timing of the small hit (see S1901 in FIG. 55), and in the small win control process, it is the start timing of the small hit. If it is determined that this is the case, it is set to off (see S1902 in FIG. 55).

The small winning medium flag 203k is a flag used to determine whether or not a small winning is occurring, that is, whether or not a small winning game is being executed. This small hit medium flag 203k is set to ON in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42) like the small hit start flag 203j described above (see S610 in FIG. 42). Then, it is referenced in the small win control process (see FIG. 55) to determine whether or not a small win is occurring (S1906 in FIG. 55), and in the small win control process, it is determined that it is the end timing of the small win. is set to off (S1911 in FIG. 55).

The jackpot type storage area 203m when passing V is an area for storing the jackpot type corresponding to the small win type when a small win is won. The type of jackpot that is executed based on passing is stored. In this V passing jackpot type storage area 203m, a jackpot type corresponding to the winning small winning type is set in the small winning start setting process (see FIG. 42) (see S608 in FIG. 42), and a jackpot type corresponding to the winning small winning type is set in the V passing process (see FIG. 50). ), the set jackpot type is read out (see S1401 in FIG. 50), and the corresponding V flag is set on (see S1401 in FIG. 50).

The V flag 203n is a flag for remembering that the ball has passed through the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650, and the jackpot type is set based on the value of this V flag 203n at the end of the small winning game. It is something. This V flag 203n is set based on the value of the jackpot type when passing V in the V passing process (see FIG. 50) (S1402 in FIG. 50), and is referenced in the small winning ending process (S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 56), After that, it is set to off (S2006 in FIG. 56).

The storage release flag 203p is a flag used to indicate a period for releasing (opening) the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750 provided in the pachinko machine 10, and when set to on, the storage of the storage device 750 is stopped. When the state is canceled and set to off, the storage device 750 enters the storage state. This storage release flag 203p is set to ON (S1804 in FIG. 54) when it is determined in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54) that it is the jackpot start timing (S1801 in FIG. 54: YES), and the storage device It is referenced in the control process (see FIG. 58) (see S2202 in FIG. 58), and is set to off when the value of the release counter 203Pa reaches the upper limit (25000) (see S2205 in FIG. 58). S2208). That is, in this embodiment, the storage device 750 enters the release state (the storage valve 750a opens) at the timing when the jackpot game is started, and when a predetermined period (10 seconds) has elapsed, the storage device 750 enters the storage state (the storage valve 750a opens). 750a is configured to perform a closing operation). Thereby, it is possible to increase the benefits given to the player when winning the jackpot.

Note that a configuration other than this embodiment may be used as a configuration for changing the state of the storage device 750 (storage state, release state). For example, a jackpot that moves the storage device 750 to the release state, and A jackpot that does not shift to a release state may be settable depending on the selected jackpot type, or a plurality of winning openings (for example, the first specific winning opening 65, the second specific winning opening 650) may be set in advance. When a jackpot game is executed in which opening operations are performed in the same order, the storage device 750 may be shifted to the release state at the timing when a specific winning opening is opened.

Furthermore, regarding the configuration in which the storage device 750 is transferred from the released state to the storage state (the condition for ending the released state), in this embodiment, the released state is ended when 10 seconds have elapsed since the storage device 750 was transferred to the released state. Although the ball can pass through the storage device 750 even if no ball is stored in the storage device 750, the period in which the storage device is in the released state is shortened (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the ball can pass through the storage device 750. Only the balls stored may be allowed to pass through the storage device 750. Thereby, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to store balls in the storage device 750 before the release condition (jackpot) of the storage device 750 is satisfied.

The release counter 203pa is a counter for measuring the period during which the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750 is released (opened). This release counter 203pa is set to "1" (see S2202 in FIG. 58) when it is determined in the storage device control process (see FIG. 58) that the storage release flag 203p is set to ON (see S2202 in FIG. 58). (see S2204), and thereafter, each time the storage device control process is executed, the value is incremented by 1 (see S2206 in FIG. 58). Then, it is determined whether the value of the counter has reached "25000" (see 2205 in FIG. 58), and based on the determination result, the variable operation of the storage valve 750a is controlled, and the storage valve 750a is variably controlled to be in the closed state. Then, the value of the release counter 203Pa is set to "0" (see S2209 in FIG. 58).

The time-saving medium winning flag 203q is a flag for indicating in which gaming state the lottery with normal symbols (general symbol lottery) in which the lottery result is a win is executed, and when the lottery is executed during the time-saving state, Set to on. This time-saving medium winning flag 203q is referred to when setting an opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a to be executed based on a winning of the general lottery.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, and a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the first specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 7) circuit 253, which will be described later, provided in the power supply 115. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 7) circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 51) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is turned off (not operated), the operation handle is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device 227 (decorative lamp 227a, transparent lamp 227b, other lamps 227c, etc.), and fluctuations. It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display effects (variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed at the time of super reach. It controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also instructs the display control device 114 to change the content of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines errors according to commands from the main controller 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and controls the display of error commands including the type of error. to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. 31A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 31(a), the ROM 222 includes at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and a performance state selection table 222b.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, the audio lamp control device 113 selects, based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, the rough fluctuation contents (fluctuation time, fluctuation type (reach, miss, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command). ) is used to determine more detailed fluctuation contents. This makes it possible to determine even more diverse variations. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed by the main controller 110.

The performance state selection table 222b is a table for selecting a performance state for setting the display mode of the performance images (third symbol image, reserved symbol image, background image, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , one of the six performance states is selected based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the state of establishment of various flags, and the lottery results of special symbols and normal symbols.

Here, the contents of the performance state selection table 222b will be explained with reference to FIG. 32(a). FIG. 32(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the performance state selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 32(a), the performance state selection table 222b shows the establishment status of the continuous game flag 223i, the normal map effective flag 223q, the pseudo performance flag 223r, and the special 2 variation flag 223s (whether they are set on or off). The configuration is such that one of the performance states "1" to "6" is selected depending on whether the performance state is set to "1" to "6".

Specifically, in a state where the consecutive game flag 223i is set to OFF and the pseudo effect flag 223r is also set to OFF, the effect state "1" is selected. On the other hand, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON, the effect state "2" is selected. In addition, if the special pattern 2 variation flag 223s is set to OFF while the continuous game flag 223i is set to ON and the regular pattern valid flag 223Q is set to OFF, the performance state "3" is set to OFF. selected. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 variation flag 223s is set on, the production state "4" is selected. Then, when the consecutive game flag 223i is set to ON and the regular map valid flag 223q is set to ON, the effect state "5" is selected. In the state where this performance state "5" is selected, the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) being executed and the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol (common symbol) are set at a predetermined interval (special symbol If the fluctuation stop timing of the ordinary figure is earlier than the fluctuation stop timing of No. 1, and each fluctuation stop timing is within 2 seconds, the effect state "6" is selected.

Here, the relationship between the performance state selected by the performance state selection table 222b and the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained with reference to FIG. 32(b). FIG. 32(b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between each performance state selected by the performance state selection table 222b and the third symbol and reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that the objects whose display modes are changed depending on the set performance state are not only the third symbols and pending symbols described above, but also various performance images displayed on the third symbol display device 81, depending on the set performance state. The detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), the third symbol (main symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 according to the performance state selected by the performance state selection table 222b (see FIG. 9) The symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) made to correspond to the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 9) displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. stipulated in In this way, by changing the main symbol and the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) that correspond to the main reserved symbol depending on the performance state, the main symbol can be changed in the pachinko machine 10 with complicated gameplay. The result of the main game can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner by simply letting the player understand the symbols and the main reserved symbols.

Specifically, when production state "1" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) becomes the main symbol, and the reserved symbol is used to indicate the number of reserved memories for special symbol 1. The symbol becomes the main reserved symbol and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 9). Note that the production state "1" is selected when the game state is a normal state in which a left-handed game is being executed.

Next, when production state "2" is selected, a pseudo pattern for production that does not correspond to any pattern (special pattern 1, special pattern 2, general pattern) becomes the main pattern (pseudo main pattern Dmb). , the main reserved symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so that no reserved symbols are displayed (see FIG. 22(b)). Note that the performance state "2" is selected when the game state is the normal state and the small winning game of special figure 1 is executed.

The pseudo main symbol Dmb, which is displayed as the main symbol when this production state "2" is selected, has a variable display (see Fig. 22(a)) and a static display (see Fig. 22(a)), as well as other main symbols. (b)) is executed, and in the small winning game of special figure 1, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is predetermined based on the timing when the second specific winning hole 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened. The display is controlled so that the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode (a mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 22(b)). As a result, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed to the player. It is possible to notify the opening timing of the second specific winning hole 650a during a winning game, and make it seem as if the privilege of opening the second specific winning hole 650a has been granted as a result of the fluctuation (lottery) of the pseudo main symbol Dmb. be able to.

Further, the number of times the pseudo main symbol Dmb is displayed in a variable manner is set to be at least more than the number of times the second specific winning hole 650a is opened during the small winning game, and corresponds to the opening timing of the second specific winning hole 650a. The variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is not displayed is controlled to be stopped and displayed in a display mode other than the predetermined display mode (for example, a mode in which non-identical symbols are stopped and displayed (so-called random patterns)). ing. Thereby, the pseudo main symbol Dmb can always be variably displayed regardless of the opening timing of the second specific winning hole 650a during the small winning game, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, when the performance state "2" is selected, the main pending symbols are not displayed, so that it is difficult for the player to understand the relationship between the fluctuation of the pseudo main symbol Dmb and the increase/decrease in the pending symbols. In other words, since the pseudo main symbol Dmb is not a symbol corresponding to each symbol actually stored in storage (special symbol 1, special symbol 2, general symbol), when the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb is started, , the number of any of the reserved symbols (special symbol 1 reserved symbol, special symbol 2 reserved symbol, general symbol reserved symbol) will not increase or decrease. Therefore, in the performance state "2" where the pseudo main symbol Dmb is displayed in a variable manner, any of the reserved symbols (special symbol 1 reserved symbol, special symbol 2 reserved symbol, regular symbol reserved) is displayed as the main reserved symbol. Then, when the main symbols start to fluctuate, the main reserved symbols do not decrease, resulting in a situation where the player feels uncomfortable. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the production state "2" is selected, the main pending symbol is not displayed, so that it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned situation from occurring.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance state "2" is selected, the main pending symbol is not displayed, but other configurations may be used. For example, the pseudo main symbol A pseudo main reserved symbol corresponding to Dmb may be displayed. In this case, it is preferable to increase or decrease the number of pseudo main reserved symbols in accordance with the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb. Thereby, the pseudo main symbols can be displayed in a variable manner without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, when displaying the pseudo main pending symbols, it is preferable that the number and display mode of the pseudo main pending symbols to be displayed are set based on the type of small winning game to be executed. With this configuration, the content of the current small winning game can be predicted to the player by the pseudo main pending symbol that is displayed as the main pending symbol at the timing when the small winning game in which the performance state "2" is selected is started. This makes it possible to play a small winning game while having fun.

In addition, the stop display mode of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the timing when the second specific winning hole 650a opens is a display mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed, but in addition, the second specific winning hole 650a enters the stop display mode. The display is controlled so that the types of the same symbol that are stopped and displayed are different based on the content of the privilege that is given by the ball. Specifically, the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponds to the opening timing of the second specific winning hole 650a, which is opened at the timing when the ball entering the second specific winning hole 650a can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3). As the stop display mode, a display mode in which a specific same number is stopped and displayed (for example, "777"), and the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning hole 650a that is opened at other timings. The stop display mode is a display mode different from the specific same number (for example, "444"). As a result, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed with the same number, thereby informing the player of the opening timing of the second specific winning hole 650a, and furthermore, depending on the type of number that is stopped and displayed, the bonus to be awarded is Contents can be announced (suggested). Therefore, the performance effect of the performance using the pseudo main symbol Dmb can be enhanced.

Next, when production state "3" is selected, a pseudo pattern for production that does not correspond to any pattern (special pattern 1, special pattern 2, general pattern) becomes the main pattern (pseudo main pattern Dmb). As the main reserved symbol, the reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 16(b)). Note that the performance state "3" is selected when the game state is a time saving state and a small winning game is executed.

Next, when production state "4" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to special symbol 2 becomes the main symbol (special symbol 2 main symbol Dmd), and the main reserved symbol is the reserved symbol corresponding to special symbol 2. The symbol is displayed as the main reserved symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 18(a)). Note that the performance state "4" is selected when the game state is the normal state and the variation of the special figure 2 is executed.

Next, when production state "5" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the regular symbol becomes the main symbol (common symbol main symbol Dmc), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 becomes the main reserved symbol. 3 is displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 15(b)). Note that the performance state "5" is selected when the game state is a time saving state and a common figure variation in which a lottery and an opening operation of the electric accessory 640a can be performed is executed during the time saving state.

When production state "6" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to special symbol 1 becomes the main symbol (special symbol 1 main symbol Dma), and the reserved symbol corresponding to special symbol 2 becomes the third main symbol. It is displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 17(a)). Note that the performance state "6" is selected when the game state is a time saving state and the regular pattern variation is started in a state where the remaining variation period of the special symbol 1 which is being varied is within 2 seconds.

Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. 31A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 31(a), the ROM 222 includes at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and a performance state selection table 222b.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, the audio lamp control device 113 selects, based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, the rough fluctuation contents (fluctuation time, fluctuation type (reach, miss, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command). ) is used to determine more detailed fluctuation contents. This makes it possible to determine even more diverse variations. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed by the main controller 110.

The performance state selection table 222b is a table for selecting a performance state for setting the display mode of the performance images (third symbol image, reserved symbol image, background image, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , one of the six performance states is selected based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the state of establishment of various flags, and the lottery results of special symbols and normal symbols.

Here, the contents of the performance state selection table 222b will be explained with reference to FIG. 32(a). FIG. 32(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the performance state selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 32(a), the performance state selection table 222b shows the establishment status of the continuous game flag 223i, the regular pattern valid flag 223q, the pseudo performance flag 223r, and the special pattern 2 fluctuation flag 223s (whether they are set to on or not). The configuration is such that one of the performance states "1" to "6" is selected depending on whether the performance state is set to off or not.

Specifically, in a state where the consecutive game flag 223i is set to OFF and the pseudo effect flag 223r is also set to OFF, the effect state "1" is selected. On the other hand, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON, the effect state "2" is selected. In addition, if the special pattern 2 variation flag 223s is set to OFF while the continuous game flag 223i is set to ON and the regular pattern valid flag 223Q is set to OFF, the performance state "3" is set to OFF. selected. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 variation flag 223s is set on, the production state "4" is selected. Then, when the consecutive game flag 223i is set to ON and the regular map valid flag 223q is set to ON, the effect state "5" is selected. In the state where this performance state "5" is selected, the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) being executed and the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol (common symbol) are set at a predetermined interval (special symbol If the fluctuation stop timing of the ordinary figure is earlier than the fluctuation stop timing of No. 1, and each fluctuation stop timing is within 2 seconds, the effect state "6" is selected.

Here, the relationship between the performance state selected by the performance state selection table 222b and the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained with reference to FIG. 32(b). FIG. 32(b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between each performance state selected by the performance state selection table 222b and the third symbol and reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that the objects whose display modes are changed depending on the set performance state are not only the third symbols and pending symbols described above, but also various performance images displayed on the third symbol display device 81, depending on the set performance state. The detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), the third symbol (main symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 according to the performance state selected by the performance state selection table 222b (see FIG. 9) It is specified that the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) that correspond to the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 9) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. In this way, by changing the main symbol and the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) that correspond to the main reserved symbol depending on the performance state, the main symbol can be changed in the pachinko machine 10 with complicated gameplay. The result of the main game can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner by simply letting the player understand the symbols and the main reserved symbols.

Specifically, when production state "1" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) becomes the main symbol, and the reserved symbol is used to indicate the number of reserved memories for special symbol 1. The symbol becomes the main reserved symbol and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 9). Note that the production state "1" is selected when the game state is a normal state in which a left-handed game is being executed.

Next, when production state "2" is selected, a pseudo pattern for production that does not correspond to any pattern (special pattern 1, special pattern 2, general pattern) becomes the main pattern (pseudo main pattern Dmb). , the main reserved symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so that no reserved symbols are displayed (see FIG. 22(b)). Note that the performance state "2" is selected when the game state is the normal state and the small winning game of special figure 1 is executed.

The pseudo main symbol Dmb, which is displayed as the main symbol when this production state "2" is selected, has a variable display (see Fig. 22(a)) and a static display (see Fig. 22(a)), as well as other main symbols. (b)) is executed, and in the small winning game of special figure 1, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is predetermined based on the timing when the second specific winning hole 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened. The display is controlled so that the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode (a mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 22(b)). As a result, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed to the player. It is possible to notify the opening timing of the second specific winning hole 650a during a winning game, and make it seem as if the privilege of opening the second specific winning hole 650a has been granted as a result of the fluctuation (lottery) of the pseudo main symbol Dmb. be able to.

Further, the number of times the pseudo main symbol Dmb is displayed in a variable manner is set to be at least more than the number of times the second specific winning hole 650a is opened during the small winning game, and corresponds to the opening timing of the second specific winning hole 650a. The variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is not displayed is controlled to be stopped and displayed in a display mode other than the predetermined display mode (for example, a mode in which non-identical symbols are stopped and displayed (so-called random patterns)). ing. Thereby, the pseudo main symbol Dmb can always be variably displayed regardless of the opening timing of the second specific winning hole 650a during the small winning game, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, when the performance state "2" is selected, the main pending symbols are not displayed, so that it is difficult for the player to understand the relationship between the fluctuation of the pseudo main symbol Dmb and the increase/decrease in the pending symbols. In other words, since the pseudo main symbol Dmb is not a symbol corresponding to each symbol actually stored in storage (special symbol 1, special symbol 2, general symbol), when the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb is started, , the number of any of the reserved symbols (special symbol 1 reserved symbol, special symbol 2 reserved symbol, general symbol reserved symbol) will not increase or decrease. Therefore, in the performance state "2" where the pseudo main symbol Dmb is displayed in a variable manner, any of the reserved symbols (special symbol 1 reserved symbol, special symbol 2 reserved symbol, regular symbol reserved) is displayed as the main reserved symbol. Then, when the main symbols start to fluctuate, the main reserved symbols do not decrease, resulting in a situation where the player feels uncomfortable. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the effect state "2" is selected, the main reservation diagram is not displayed, so that it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned situation from occurring.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance state "2" is selected, the main pending symbol is not displayed, but other configurations may be used. For example, the pseudo main symbol A pseudo main reserved symbol corresponding to Dmb may be displayed. In this case, it is preferable to increase or decrease the number of pseudo main reserved symbols in accordance with the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb. Thereby, the pseudo main symbols can be displayed in a variable manner without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, when displaying the pseudo main pending symbols, it is preferable that the number and display mode of the pseudo main pending symbols to be displayed are set based on the type of small winning game to be executed. With this configuration, the content of the current small winning game can be predicted to the player by the pseudo main pending symbol that is displayed as the main pending symbol at the timing when the small winning game in which the performance state "2" is selected is started. This makes it possible to play a small winning game while having fun.

In addition, the stop display mode of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the timing when the second specific winning hole 650a opens is a display mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed, but in addition, the second specific winning hole 650a enters the stop display mode. The display is controlled so that the types of the same symbol that are stopped and displayed are different based on the content of the privilege that is given by the ball. Specifically, the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponds to the opening timing of the second specific winning hole 650a, which is opened at the timing when the ball entering the second specific winning hole 650a can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3). As the stop display mode, a display mode in which a specific same number is stopped and displayed (for example, "777"), and the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning hole 650a that is opened at other timings. The stop display mode is a display mode different from the specific same number (for example, "444"). As a result, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed with the same number, thereby informing the player of the opening timing of the second specific winning hole 650a, and furthermore, depending on the type of number that is stopped and displayed, the bonus to be awarded is Contents can be announced (suggested). Therefore, the performance effect of the performance using the pseudo main symbol Dmb can be enhanced.

Next, when production state "3" is selected, a pseudo pattern for production that does not correspond to any pattern (special pattern 1, special pattern 2, general pattern) becomes the main pattern (pseudo main pattern Dmb). As the main reserved symbol, the reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 16(b)). Note that the performance state "3" is selected when the game state is a time saving state and a small winning game is executed.

Next, when production state "4" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to special symbol 2 becomes the main symbol (special symbol 2 main symbol Dmd), and the main reserved symbol is the reserved symbol corresponding to special symbol 2. The symbol is displayed as the main reserved symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 18(a)). Note that the performance state "4" is selected when the game state is the normal state and the variation of the special figure 2 is executed.

Next, when production state "5" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the regular symbol becomes the main symbol (common symbol main symbol Dmc), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 becomes the main reserved symbol. 3 is displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 15(b)). Note that the performance state "5" is selected when the game state is a time saving state and a common figure variation in which a lottery and an opening operation of the electric accessory 640a can be performed is executed during the time saving state.

When production state "6" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to special symbol 1 becomes the main symbol (special symbol 1 main symbol Dma), and the reserved symbol corresponding to special symbol 2 becomes the third main symbol. It is displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 16(b)). Note that the performance state "6" is selected when the game state is a time saving state and the regular pattern variation is started in a state where the remaining variation period of the special symbol 1 which is being varied is within 2 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31(b), the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a special symbol winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a special symbol fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, Performance counter 223f, time reduction flag 223g, time reduction remaining period storage area 223h, consecutive game flag 223i, variable time counter 223j, state storage area 223k, performance state storage area 223m, special 2 pending flag 223n , the special 2 reservation upper limit flag 223p, the ordinary figure valid flag 223q, the pseudo effect flag 223r, the special 2 fluctuation flag 223s, the ordinary figure winning information storage area 223t, and the ordinary figure fluctuation start flag 223u. At least a flag 223v, a bonus performance execution flag 223w, an end performance execution flag 223x, and another memory area 223z are provided.

The special symbol winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas has a special symbol (first special symbol and The winning information of the second special symbol) is stored respectively. The information stored in this special figure winning information storage area 223a allows the audio lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results of reserved balls and the like before the fluctuation starts.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are variable effects (variable displays) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and are controlled by the main control. This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable performance held in the device 110 up to four times for each type of special symbol. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b corresponds to the number of reserved balls of the variable performance based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c corresponds to the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol (special symbol 1). This corresponds to the number of reserved pitches in the fluctuating performance based on the lottery in 2).

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and reads the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. It is not possible to obtain the value of . Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and counts the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 1 reserved balls number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved balls number counter 223c. , the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, the main controller 110 suspends the variable display depending on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (left first ball entry port 64a, right first ball entry port 64b) and second ball entry port 640. After the addition or after the subtraction, when the number of balls is added, or when the main control device 110 executes a variable display in the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) and subtracts the number of reserved balls, A held ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d or the value of the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 based on the held ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c (see S3207 in FIG. 61). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved balls number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved balls number counter 223c according to the reserved balls number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so the main The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved pitch number counter 223c, and A command for the number of reserved balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the special symbol 1 reserved balls number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved balls number counter 223c after storage.

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved balls for display, it displays the value of the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved balls number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113, and the special symbol 2 reserved balls number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls symbols corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. , its value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved balls symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also changed while being synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved balls counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 203e of the main controller 110. can be done. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of pending balls whose variable display is pending.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display (right of symbol lottery) can be reserved (up to 4 pieces) for the normal symbols as well as the above-mentioned special symbols, and the number of reserved balls for the normal symbols of the main controller 110 When receiving a command that is set when the value of the counter 203f increases or decreases, it has a normal symbol reserved ball counter (not shown) as a counter that increases or decreases the value in accordance with the contents of the received command. However, regarding the processing executed within the audio lamp control device 113 and the processing executed within the display control device 114, the only difference is the target command for the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. Therefore, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. The value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter is used, for example, when displaying the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the detailed content when displaying the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter on the third symbol display device 81 is the same as the case where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol mentioned above is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the display control device 114 receives each held ball number command for display, it is displayed in a predetermined area (sub-held symbol display areas Dn4 to Dn6 (see FIG. 9(a))). A display is made to show the number of reserved balls corresponding to the command, and based on the received display performance state command, the number of reserved balls command to be displayed in the main reserved symbol display area is selected and held as the main reserved symbol. A display is made to show the number of pitches. With this configuration, it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 a display that is synchronized with the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls set by the main control device 110, and also to display information that should be notified to the player in the current performance state. The number of reserved balls of a symbol can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this embodiment, the display control device 114 displays all the reserved ball numbers of each symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2, general symbol) in a predetermined area (sub-reserved symbol display areas Dn4 to Dn6 (FIG. 9). (See a)), and a part of it can be displayed as the main reserved symbol, but the display method of the reserved symbol is not limited to this, and for example, each symbol (special symbol 1 , special symbol 2, general symbol), the reserved symbol (main reserved symbol) to be displayed in the main reserved symbol display area and the subordinate symbol are displayed based on the received display performance state command. The reserved symbols (sub-reserved symbols) to be displayed in the reserved symbol display area are determined, and based on the determination result, the reserved symbol corresponding to each symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2, general symbol) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A pattern may also be displayed.

The special pattern variation start flag 223d is turned on when receiving a variation pattern command (for special symbols) transmitted from the main controller 110 (see S3304 in FIG. 62), and starts the variation display on the third symbol display device 81. It is turned off when the settings are made (see S3702 in FIG. 66). When the special figure variation start flag 223d is turned on, a special figure display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command (see S3706 in FIG. 66).

The special figure display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. The information is then transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this special figure display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this special figure display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started so that the change effect is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a special figure display variation pattern command, a special figure 1 display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol, and a special figure 2 display variation command corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol. It is configured such that pattern commands can be set. The display control device 114 displays a variation pattern corresponding to the type of the received special figure display variation pattern command (special figure 1 display variation pattern command, special figure 2 display variation pattern command) on the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the display control device 114 receives a display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays a pattern in a predetermined area (symbol display areas Dn1 to Dn3 of the second display area Dn (see FIG. 9(a))). A display is made to show a symbol sequence (variation pattern) corresponding to the received display variation pattern command, and a symbol (main symbol) is displayed in the first display area Dm based on the received display performance state command. is selected from each pattern (special pattern 1, special pattern 2, general pattern) and the selected pattern is displayed as the main pattern. With this configuration, it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 a display that is synchronized with the fluctuation pattern of each symbol set by the main controller 110, and also to notify the player of the current presentation state. Changes in symbols can be notified to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this embodiment, the display control device 114 displays all the variable displays (symbol rows) of each symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2, general symbol) in a predetermined area (secondary symbol display in the second display area Dn). Areas Dn1 to Dn3 (see FIG. 9(a))), and a part of it can be displayed as the main pattern in the first display area. The display method of the figure) is not limited to this, but for example, when receiving a display variation pattern command corresponding to each symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2, general symbol), the received display method is not limited to this. Based on the production state command, a symbol to be displayed in the first display area Dm (main symbol) and a symbol to be displayed in the subordinate symbol display area (sub-pattern) are determined, and a third symbol is displayed based on the determination result. The device 81 may display a variable display (symbol row) corresponding to each symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2, general symbol).

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S3204 in FIG. 61), and turned off when the stop type is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S3708 in FIG. 66). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) (see S3710 in FIG. 66).

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. This effect counter 223f is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated by adding 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 60) is executed. . Note that this performance counter 223f has a plurality of counters (not shown), and when determining a performance pattern by referring to a plurality of counter values within one loop process, different counter values may be used. used. This prevents the same counter value from being used in multiple locations when setting one performance pattern, so it is possible to suppress bias in the performance pattern that is set. Note that the effect pattern may be set using each value calculated after performing different processing on the values obtained from the same counter. Specifically, among the production patterns, one selection refers to the ones digit of the obtained value, another selection refers to the tens digit of the obtained value, and still another selection refers to the one digit of the obtained value. It is also possible to multiply the value obtained by multiplying the digit by 3 and the value obtained by multiplying the tens digit by 5, and refer to the ones digit of the obtained value. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of counters used when setting a performance pattern, while also suppressing bias in the performance pattern that is set.

The time saving flag 223g is a flag for indicating that the time is currently being reduced. If this time-saving flag 223g is on, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a time-saving state, and if it is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not a time-saving state. This time-saving medium flag 223g is set to ON when it is determined in the performance state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) that the time-saving state will be entered after the end of the jackpot (3906 in FIG. 68), and in the variable display setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68). (see S3113), when it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S3701: Yes in FIG. 66), and when it is determined that the time saving flag 223g is on (S3704: Yes in FIG. 66). ), is set to off (S3705 in FIG. 66).

In addition, in this embodiment, as a condition for ending the time saving state, the variation of the special symbol (lottery) is set to be executed once (that is, the number of time saving times is once), so the time saving flag 223g is turned on as described above. When the special symbol starts changing in the state set to , the time saving flag 223g is set to OFF, but the audio lamp control device 113 indicates that the gaming state is in the time saving state. For example, if the number of time reductions is set to 100, a time reduction counter that can determine the number of remaining periods is provided, and each time the special symbol changes (lottery) The time saving flag 223g may be set to OFF when the value of the counter is updated and the value of the counter is updated to a value indicating that the time saving state ends. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 has the time saving number set to multiple times (two or more times), the audio lamp control device 113 can reliably determine whether the current gaming state is the time saving state or not. I can do it.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the condition for ending the time saving state is established when the variation of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (one time). , other configurations may be used. For example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol can be measured separately, and the condition for ending the time saving state is determined based on the first special symbol. Even if it is configured such that the time saving state ends when either of the ending conditions is satisfied, such as until the symbol is changed 10 times (drawn by lottery) or the second special symbol is changed once (drawn by lottery). Alternatively, the time saving state may be terminated under conditions other than the number of changes in the special symbol. In this case, for example, if the lottery result of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) or normal symbol becomes a predetermined lottery result, the termination condition for terminating the time saving state is satisfied, or the pachinko machine 10 A configuration may be used in which an end condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied when the various drive members provided (electric accessory 640a, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650) are driven, The number of times the various driving members described above are driven may be measured, and when the number of times the various driving members are driven reaches a predetermined number (for example, two times), the end condition for ending the time saving state may be satisfied. With this configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the time saving state ends, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The time saving remaining period storage area 223h is an area for storing the variation time of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is configured such that the time saving state ends when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) change once during the time saving state. In other words, the variation time of the special symbol set during the time saving state becomes the remaining period during the time saving state.

The consecutive game flag 223i is a flag for indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a right-handed game state (consecutive game state). This indicates that the gaming state is a right-handed gaming state, and when it is set to OFF, it indicates that the current gaming state is a normal state. This consecutive game flag 223i is set to ON when it is determined in the performance state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) that a jackpot has started (see S3903 in FIG. 68), and the performance is based on the performance state selection table 222b. It is referred to when selecting the state (see S3918 in Fig. 68), and it is determined that the time saving state will not be entered after the end of the jackpot, or when the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied in a state where there is no pending memory of special drawing 2. (See S3907 and S3912 in FIG. 68).

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a jackpot state, a time-saving state, and a transition from the time-saving state in which the special drawing 2 is stored as a gaming state (right-handed playing state) that is advantageous to the player. The gameplay includes a normal state (see FIG. 12), and whether or not the current gaming state is advantageous to the player (right-handed playing state) is determined by the number of reserved balls output from the main controller 110. The configuration is such that the audio lamp control device 113 makes the determination based on commands, various status commands, and the like. This eliminates the need for the main control device 110 to execute processing for determining whether or not the current gaming state is an advantageous state, resulting in the effect that the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Note that the main control device 110 may perform processing for determining whether or not the current gaming state is advantageous to the player. In this case, a command indicating that a gaming state advantageous to the player (right-handed gaming state) is set is output to the audio lamp control device 113, and a command indicating that the player is in a right-handed gaming state is output to the outside. It may be configured to output a signal for notification (right-handed hit signal). In this case, in addition to the period in which the gaming state itself, such as the jackpot state or the time saving state, is advantageous to the player, the gaming state is not advantageous as a gaming state (although it is a normal state), but the predetermined conditions are met, and the player can try again. , When it is determined that the game will move to a jackpot state, the player is configured to continue to notify the outside that the game is in a right-handed game state, thereby forcing the player to continue playing right-handed games. This makes it possible to prevent the player from playing a troublesome game.

The variable time counter 223j is a counter for measuring the special figure 1 variable time during the time saving state, and the remaining period of the time saving state is calculated based on the measured counter value. This fluctuation time counter 223j, in the counter update process (see S3311 in FIG. 70), when it is determined that the fluctuation of special map 1 has started during the time reduction (during the time reduction state) (S4103 in FIG. 70: Yes), The value of the counter is set to "1" and thereafter, each time the counter update process (see S3311 in FIG. 70) is executed, "1" is added until the value of the counter reaches "150000" (S4108 in FIG. 70). ), when the counter value reaches "150000" (S4107 in FIG. 70: Yes), the counter value is set to "0" (S4109). Then, the remaining time saving period (the remaining period of the time saving state) is calculated based on the value of the variable time counter 223j (S4105 in FIG. 70).

The status storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing the status when various status commands output from the main controller 110 are received, and in the command determination process (see S3112 in FIG. 61), If a status command is received (S3215 in FIG. 61: Yes), status information based on the received status command is stored (S3216 in FIG. 61). Display status commands are set based on the status information stored in the status storage area 223k, and various images (background images and demo images) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are set by the main controller 110. Images corresponding to various conditions are displayed.

The performance state storage area 223m stores the display mode of each symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2, general symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the display mode of each pending symbol (special symbol 1 pending) in the display control device 114. This is an area that stores the performance state used to set the display performance state command that is referred to when determining the display mode of the symbol, special symbol 2 reserved symbol, and general symbol reserved symbol. This performance state is determined by the setting status of various flags (during consecutive runs flag 223i, regular map valid flag 223q, pseudo performance flag 223r, special map 2 fluctuation flag 223s) set by various processes of the audio lamp control device 113, and each Based on the fluctuation stop timing of the symbol, it is selected in the performance state setting process (S3114 in FIG. 68) (see S3918 in FIG. 68), and the selected performance state is stored in the performance state storage area 223m. Note that the performance state storage area 223m is configured to store (memorize) selected performance states for several times in the past. This makes it possible to compare and determine the performance state before the transition and the performance state after the transition. With this configuration, it is possible to determine a transition pattern that cannot be transitioned to when playing a normal game, and to determine whether or not there is an illegal game.

In addition, if the performance state has transitioned multiple times in a predetermined transition pattern (for example, if the transition from performance state 4 to performance state 5 is repeated five or more times without passing through performance states 1 and 2) It is possible to provide a presentation state (for example, a Dalianzhuo presentation state) that is selected only in the event, thereby enhancing the presentation effect. In addition, when the Dalianso production state is set, it is preferable to display a bonus video that the player cannot normally see in the first display area Dm without displaying the main symbol on the third symbol display device 81. .

The special 2 reservation flag 223n is a flag to indicate that there is a special map 2 (special 2) reservation memory during the time saving state, and by setting the special 2 reservation flag 223n to ON, the special It shows that the reservation memory (reservation symbol) of FIG. 2 exists, and by setting it to OFF, it shows that the reservation memory (reservation symbol) of the special figure 2 does not exist. This special 2 reservation flag 223n is set to ON when the number of special 2 reservation balls is updated to 1 in the reservation ball number related processing (see S3208 in FIG. 63) (see S3403 in FIG. 63). This special 2 hold flag 223n is referenced when it is determined in the performance state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) that the time saving state has ended (see S3911 in FIG. 68), and the number of special 2 held balls becomes 0. is set to off when

The special 2 reservation upper limit flag 223p is a flag to indicate that the reservation memory of the special figure 2 (special 2) has reached the upper limit (4 pieces) during the time saving state, and this special 2 reservation upper limit flag 223p By being set to on, it indicates that the number of reserved memories of special map 2 (special 2) reaches the upper limit (4 pieces) during the time saving state, and by setting the special 2 reservation upper limit flag 223p to OFF, Indicates that the number of reserved memories of special figure 2 (special 2) is not the upper limit (4 pieces).

This special 2 reservation upper limit flag 223p is set to ON when the number of special 2 reservation balls is updated to the upper limit (S3406 in FIG. 63: Yes) in the reservation ball number related process (see S3208 in FIG. 63). (See S3407 in FIG. 63) and in the specific effect setting process (See S3315 in FIG. 69), and is set to OFF when the number of special 2 reserved balls is no longer at the upper limit.

The normal pattern valid flag 223q is a flag for indicating a normal pattern fluctuation (normal pattern fluctuation) in which the operation of the electric accessory 640a executed at the time of winning can become an advantageous movement pattern for the player (long opening). By setting this common figure valid flag 223q to ON, it indicates that the electric accessory 640a is changing at a timing when it can be opened long, and by setting it to OFF, the electric accessory 640a is short-circuited. Indicates that it is a normal pattern fluctuation at the timing of opening.

This ordinary figure valid flag 223q is set to ON when it is determined in the ordinary figure fluctuation display setting process (see S3712 in FIG. 67) that both the fluctuation start timing and the fluctuation end timing are in the time saving state (see FIG. 67). (see S3806 in FIG. 67), is set to off when it is determined that the timing at which the fluctuation starts is not in the time saving state, or when it is determined that the timing at which the fluctuation ends is not in the time saving state (S3809 in FIG. reference). The setting status of this common map valid flag 223q is referred to when selecting a performance state based on the performance state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

The pseudo effect flag 223r is a flag to indicate that a special figure 1 small hit has been executed when the gaming state is the normal state, and by being set to on, the special figure 1 small win is executed in the normal state. This indicates that the has been executed. By setting this pseudo performance flag 223r to ON, a performance display using a pseudo symbol as a main symbol (pseudo main symbol) is executed during a small winning game (see FIG. 22). This pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON when a small hit of special drawing 1 occurs in the normal state (see S3915 in FIG. 68) by the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68). is set to off when the process ends (S3917 in FIG. 68). The setting status of this pseudo performance flag 223r is referred to when selecting a performance state based on the performance state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

The special 2 variation flag 223s is a flag for indicating that the variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) has started, and by being set to on, the variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is started. This indicates that fluctuation has started. This special 2 variation flag 223s is set to ON when the received variation pattern command is a variation pattern command for special figure 2 in the variation pattern related process (see S3202 in FIG. 62) (S3302 in FIG. 62). Then, when the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received, it is set to OFF. The setting status of this special 2 variation flag 223s is referred to when selecting a performance state based on the performance state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

Here, in this embodiment, when the special 2 variation flag 223s is set to ON, that is, when the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed, the variation result (lottery result ), and the small winning game is executed based on the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special symbol 2). It is configured to be a small winning game in which it is easy to pass the winning switch 650e3). That is, the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is configured to be advantageous to the player just by being executed. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment configured in this way, while the special 2 variation flag 223s is set to on (that is, while the second special symbol is fluctuating), the second special symbol is It is displayed variably as the main symbol (special pattern 2 main symbol). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the variable display of the second special symbol that provides an advantageous state.

The ordinary symbol winning information storage area 223t is an area where winning information included in the winning information command of the ordinary symbol is stored when the winning information command of the ordinary symbol is received. Note that the detailed configuration is the same as the above-mentioned special figure winning information storage area 223a, so the explanation thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol variation start flag 223u is a flag indicating that variation of the normal symbol has been executed, and when set to on, indicates that the normal symbol is fluctuating. This fluctuation start flag 223u for regular symbols determines that the received fluctuation pattern command is not a special symbol fluctuation pattern command (it is a regular symbol fluctuation pattern command) in the fluctuation pattern related process (see S3202 in FIG. 62). If it is determined that it is set to on in the normal pattern fluctuation display setting process (see S3712 in FIG. 67) (S3801 in FIG. 67: Yes), It is set to off (see S3802 in FIG. 67).

The replacement flag 223v is a flag indicating that the end timing of the time saving state (the end timing of the special symbol 1 variation whose variation was started in the time saving state) and the end timing of the regular symbol variation satisfy a predetermined condition. By setting it to ON, it indicates that the end timing of the regular figure fluctuation is within 2 seconds of the end timing of the time saving state. By setting this replacement flag 223v to ON, the performance state "6" is selected as the performance state.

The bonus performance execution flag 223w is a flag for indicating that the bonus performance is to be executed, and when set to on, it indicates that the bonus performance is to be executed. While this bonus performance execution flag 223w is set on, a bonus performance that cannot normally be seen (see FIG. 21) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This bonus performance execution flag 223w is determined in the specific performance setting process (see S3315 in FIG. 69) that the special 2 pending upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (see S4002 in FIG. 69), and the special performance command for display is executed. After setting (see S4004 in FIG. 69), it is set to ON (S4005 in FIG. 69), and after the consecutive game flag 223i is set to OFF in the production state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) (see S4004 in FIG. (see S3907 in FIG. 68) and is set to off (see S3908 in FIG. 68). In other words, if the special performance execution flag 223w is set to on even once while the consecutive game flag 223i is set to on (during consecutive game mode), the number of reserved balls of special map 2 reaches the upper limit. ), the bonus performance will continue to be performed until the consecutive game mode ends.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the bonus performance ends immediately even if the bonus performance is to be executed. In other words, after the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 reaches the upper limit, at least until the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is all consumed and the subsequent special drawing 1 fluctuation in the time saving state ends, the special performance will not be performed. Since the system is configured to perform the following, the bonus performance can be continuously displayed.

In addition, with this configuration, it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 for a long period of time that the number of reserved balls of the special drawing 2 has reached the upper limit, so it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 for a long period of time, so that it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 for a long period of time, so that it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 for a long period of time, so that it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 for a long period of time, You can appeal and feel satisfied. Furthermore, in order to obtain a sense of satisfaction, the player can be made to play the game with enthusiasm.

In addition, in this embodiment, a specific bonus performance is executed on the condition that the number of reserved balls of special map 2 reaches the upper limit at least once, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in consecutive game mode A means for measuring the number of times the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit may be provided therein, and a different privilege performance may be executed based on the measurement result by the means. Thereby, it is possible to make the player more motivated to play the game.

Further, in this embodiment, when the bonus performance execution flag 223w is set to on, the bonus performance is set to be executed until the consecutive game mode ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. The period until the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 is all consumed may be set as the period during which the bonus effect is executed. As a result, during consecutive game mode, the production can be switched every time the special figure 1 variation is executed during the time saving state, and the player can play the game with a new feeling to continue the consecutive game mode. I can do it.

Further, in this embodiment, the bonus performance is automatically executed when the conditions for executing the bonus performance are met, but other configurations may be used. By operating the operating means (frame button 22) provided on the machine 10, it may be possible to switch between the normal performance and the special performance. This makes it possible to provide desired effects to the player.

In this embodiment, the condition for executing the bonus effect is set when the number of reserved balls of special drawing 2 reaches the upper limit, but other conditions may also be set as the conditions for executing the bonus effect. For example, in addition to the case where the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 reaches the upper limit, the condition may be set that the changing special figure 1 has been won as a hit (big hit, small hit). In this way, if the number of reserved balls of special map 2 has reached the upper limit and the lottery result of the fluctuating special map 1 is a jackpot, it will actually be played 5 times (one jackpot based on special chart 1, one special jackpot based on special chart 1, Since the jackpot game (4 jackpots based on FIG. 2) will be provided, the game state will be more advantageous to the player. By executing the bonus performance only when such conditions are met, the value of the bonus performance can be enhanced, and the player can be made to play the game with a desire to see the bonus performance.

In addition, in this case, when the number of reserved balls of special drawing 2 becomes 3 (semi-upper limit number smaller than the upper limit number), whether or not the special effect is executed based on the lottery result of special drawing 1. It is preferable to perform a display (display suggesting execution of bonus performance) that informs (suggests) the player that Thereby, it is possible to make the player play the game with enthusiasm while expecting the lottery result of the special drawing 1 and the provision of the bonus effect. In addition, when the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 reaches the upper limit number (4 balls), a special effect is executed, and the content of the special effect is based on the lottery result of special drawing 1 which is changing, The change is made based on the remaining period of the time saving state (remaining variable time of the changing special figure 1) at the time when the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit (when the execution conditions for the special effect are met). It's okay. Even with this configuration, the player can be motivated to play the game.

The end performance execution flag 223x is a flag to indicate that the end performance (see FIGS. 19(b) to 20(b)) is executed to suggest that the consecutive game mode ends, and is turned on. By being set to , it indicates that the end effect is being executed. This end effect execution flag 223x is turned on when the time saving remaining period becomes 10 seconds with the special 2 suspension flag 223n set to OFF in the specific effect setting process (see S3315 in FIG. 69). It is set (see S4010 in FIG. 69), and is referenced when the special 2 reservation flag 223n is set to ON in the pending ball number related process (see S3208 in FIG. 63) (see S3404 in FIG. 63). Here, if the second suspension flag 223n is set to on while the end effect execution flag 223x is set to on, it is assumed that the current time saving state has ended (the variation of special figure 1 has ended). Also, the variation (lottery) of the special map 2 will start, and the continuous winning mode will continue. Therefore, a display victory command is set for the end performance being executed, and a performance suggesting recovery from the end performance is executed. Thereby, the player can be made to expect the continuation of the consecutive game mode even after the end performance is executed, and can be made to play the game with enthusiasm until the end.

Then, in the production state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68), the consecutive game flag 223i is set to OFF and then to OFF (see S3909 in FIG. 68). Note that the end effect executed in this embodiment may be configured to be executed even when the special figure 2 suspension flag 223n is set to on. In this case, the continuous game mode will definitely continue. Therefore, it is possible to increase the apparent probability of continuation of the consecutive game mode in the end effect. In addition, when a plurality of special drawing 2 reservations are obtained during the period in which the end effect is being executed, the corresponding effect may be executed.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, for example. , a command storage area is provided.

This command storage area is an area where various commands output from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 61) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination process reads The command is analyzed and processing is performed according to the command.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via a bus line 240. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since there are models with exactly the same configuration and specifications, the display control device 114 is made into a common component and costs are reduced.

Below, the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be explained first, and then the work RAM 233 will be explained.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured so that a system reset can be applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power restoration from a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. Instead of being stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. This makes it possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is consecutively arranged in multiple pages, it is possible to read the data from the second page onward at high speed, but when reading the data from the first page, an address is specified. It takes a long time until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it will take time to read the instructions that make up the control program. Such a case may occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. and store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so the MPU 231 can read instructions forming the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is canceled via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

This character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as the main storage part in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing data, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the player's interest, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a lot of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the third symbol display device 81 is provided in order to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, without having to provide a dedicated program ROM to store the control program and fixed value data as in conventional gaming machines. Since the number of parts can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data is written) occur when data is written, and defective data blocks in which data cannot be written occur. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known error correction so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Perform data address translation.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read out from the NAND flash memory 234a that includes error bits, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the It is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing or the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the defective data block, so the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. The ROM controller 234b then performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can, for example, output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while setting data in one bank, or output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside as specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading data from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a nonvolatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is designed to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, this NOR type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided that stores a part of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 uses hardware to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. is set, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , reads the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing it in is as follows. That is, as mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from specifying the address to outputting the data when reading data from the first page. There's a problem.

When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then issues an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. can be set to output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the program storage area of the work RAM 233. 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after canceling the system reset. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c currently used.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. The first predetermined location is programmed to be set to a first predetermined location. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various types of processing can be executed. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the rest of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included in the control program that is transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a.

Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a. Execute the remaining boot programs contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) are stored in the second program storage area. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from area 234a1 to program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b is executed. Furthermore, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location within the program storage area 233a. Specifically, this second predetermined location is the initialization process (see S5002 in FIG. 71) that is executed after the boot process (see S5001 in FIG. 71) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined location, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. This allows the MPU 231 to read control programs from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

Furthermore, as described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, and which is sent from the MPU 231, and draws a frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by developing the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame that was previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame within the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. Parallel processing within.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the process of drawing the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed by drawing first.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs the drawing processing and display of the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In response, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer some of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. is configured to do so. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so that it remains resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on is completed, the image controller 237 can draw the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image. The time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the main controller 110 or display controller 114 decides to display them. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until the third symbol display device 81 displays any image.

In addition, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 transfers necessary data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing; There is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the character ROM 234, and the time required for reading out can be omitted, so it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The final address (the final address of the storage source), the information on the transfer destination (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the memory is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeated until all the image data stored from the storage source first address to the storage source final address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. I can do it. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the image data transfer. be able to. Therefore, as the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, and as a result, it is not possible to draw the image by the required time. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Also, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. It is possible to easily determine the period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and it is possible to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is used as the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, the power-on variation image area 235b is displayed when the player starts a game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 using a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see S5003 and S5004 in FIG. 71).

Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be explained. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 transfers the power-on main image to the third symbol display device using the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a. 81.

At this time, upon receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power-on. On the display screen, a power-on fluctuation image with an "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and a power-on fluctuation image with an "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, are displayed during the fluctuation period. In the middle, the display is repeated alternately. Then, based on the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 is determined. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the "○" symbol will be displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops, and if it is a "special symbol miss", the "x" symbol will be displayed after the variable effect has stopped. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on until all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, while displaying the power-on main image on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. In addition, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can be done.

Furthermore, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Furthermore, while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player starts playing the game, and the first ball entry port 64 (left first ball entry port 64a, right first ball entry port 64b), or when a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected, a power-on fluctuation image is created using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. is drawn, and the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to alternately display the power-on variation images on the third symbol display device 81. With this, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

In addition, at the time when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a corresponding variable effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 33, the explanation will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main pattern (third pattern), and for example, a city, the sea, the sky, etc. are displayed. Further, a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 15(a)) and the like are also stored as back images in the back image area 235c.

The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is permanently resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9" as the third symbol is resident. As a result, when performing a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, there is no need to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Variable effects can be started quickly. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable presentation after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the third symbol display device 81 immediately starts the variable presentation. It is possible to prevent such situations from occurring.

In addition, the third symbol area 235d includes main symbols that are not numbered from "0" to "9" and include a main symbol consisting of a backward symbol such as a wooden box, a backward symbol and a character such as a plane, a wrapping cloth, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of an auxiliary pattern imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with a winning start does not start even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable effect stopped. It will be done. As a result, when the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration performance. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols to which numbers are not attached from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character pattern area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character patterns used in various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character pattern area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but changes it to the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading resident image data in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Thereby, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back side of the game board 13, the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error along with the error type using an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, upon receiving an error command, cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error, from the viewpoint of preventing players from cheating and protecting players from errors. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is stored in advance in the error message image area 235f, so the display control device 114 displays error messages in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is not read out after receiving the error command. It can be displayed instantly.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in the subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

The MPU 231 transfers image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing subsequent images from the character ROM 234 to a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of image data to a predetermined subarea where it is to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list, which will be described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thereby, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame's worth of image drawn according to instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame's worth of image into that frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame developed earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third symbol display device 81 along with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, a process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop one frame's worth of images drawn in one frame buffer. , it is possible to read out one frame's worth of image developed earlier from the other frame buffer and display the read out one frame's worth of image on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that develops one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read out in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for rendering processing of one frame's worth of images. Every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's image and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform display processing for one frame of images in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for one frame of images.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. configured. This work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and a stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, and a presentation state storage area 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Using this, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complex performances.

The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area where transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one performance displayed by the table is stored.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

Here, details of various data tables will be explained. First, one display data table is prepared for each presentation mode of each presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110, such as variable presentation, opening presentation, etc. Display data tables corresponding to , round performance, ending performance, and demo performance are prepared.

The fluctuation performance is a performance that is started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. Note that when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a fluctuating performance is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating performance is a miss, the stop symbol indicating the miss is finally displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating performance is jackpot A or jackpot B. In either case, the stop symbols indicating each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the type of jackpot by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable performance, and can easily determine the gaming value given according to the type of jackpot.

The opening performance is for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will now move to a special gaming state and the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, which are normally closed, will be opened. The round performance is a performance for notifying the player of the number of rounds that will start from now on. The ending performance is a performance for notifying the player that the special gaming state (jackpot state) has ended.

As described above, the demo production is a production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation production associated with a starting winning is not started even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variation production stopped. , the third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is displayed in a stopped state, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to an opening performance, a round performance, an ending performance, and a demo performance. Further, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for variable effects, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, details of the display data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) for one frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This specifies the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame in detail.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that makes up one frame of image, and also specifies display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency depending on the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification rate is information for specifying the magnification rate for a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnification rate. Note that if the magnification rate is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than its standard size, and if the magnification rate is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than its standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying a sprite. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more transparent the image displayed on the back side of the sprite will be. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient that is used when performing overlapping processing with other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when the specified sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address include one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and the light Drawing information for each sprite, such as effects expressing the insertion of images, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined depending on the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are changed over time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is defined in the variable display data table. The type of back surface is to display either back surface A to C that corresponds to the stage selected by the player (one of "city stage," "sky stage," or "island stage"), or to display back surface A to C that corresponds to the stage selected by the player. Information specifying whether a back image different from C is to be displayed is described. Furthermore, when specifying that a back image different from back faces A to C is to be displayed, the back surface type also includes information specifying which back image is to be displayed.

If the back surface type specifies that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. , and also specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame over time. On the other hand, if it is specified that a back image different from back images A to C is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. However, instead of this, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are defined. It may also be possible to specify location information indicating whether the information should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the display database at the stage when image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) started, which is indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information includes, depending on the back surface type, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 Display) may indicate any information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) may be displayed along with the back type and position information. The information indicates the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or the information indicates the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating elapsed time but may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

For the third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ), symbol type offset information is written as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the 3rd symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the 3rd symbol in the fluctuating performance is based on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance and the current fluctuating performance. This is because it changes depending on the stopped symbol, and the symbol offset information from the start of variation until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variation performance. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol is set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variable performance can be stopped with a stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third symbol has a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be used as the third symbol. By managing the offset information using the numbers attached to each third symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

In addition, in the symbol offset information, during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current fluctuating performance, the third symbol changes rapidly. It is set to match the displayed time. While the third symbol is being displayed in a high-speed fluctuating manner, the third symbol is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers in the third symbol is interrupted, the player will not be made aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the first address of the display data table, and "02F0H" in the last address of the display data table (in the example of FIG. 30) contains the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is written. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is written and the address where the "End" information is written, the drawing content is made to correspond to the presentation mode that should be specified in the display data table. is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the next The image contents to be drawn are specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is given. Thereby, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. .

Here, if a conventional pachinko machine is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as the effect images become more diverse, Since the processing of starting and executing programs that are becoming increasingly complex and enormous in size places a heavy burden on the processing, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 becomes limited, and there is a risk that there will be a limit to the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This is possible because, in the pachinko machine 10, the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of a lottery performed based on the starting winnings. On the other hand, with game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on user operations, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore the various It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of a lottery performed based on a starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance, and as mentioned above, the transfer data table is the one that is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data that is not resident in the normal video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

Note that if all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. are written (corresponding to addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 35). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data meaning ``0002H'' in FIG. 35 is defined.

The transfer data information includes the first address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the first address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, similar to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 35, "02F0H") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is provided. is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the MPU 231 selects the display data table to be used. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to , the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 35, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the generated The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 transmits display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When a table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so the sprite image data used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers the image data to be transferred that should be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, it is ensured that the image data of a predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the transfer start timing can be instructed as shown in FIG. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (a power-on main image and a power-on variable image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image at power-on area 235a or the variable image at power-on area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON during the main processing (see FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 231 (see S5005 in FIG. 71). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image, It is set to off (see S6605 in FIG. 82(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S5301 in FIG. 73(b)), and the simple image display flag 233c is When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 73(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S5308 in FIG. 73(b) S5309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command judgment is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Processing (see FIGS. 74 to 78) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 79 to 81) are executed.

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S6501 in FIG. 82(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 82(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 83) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to a performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the production mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the commands etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the production mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 233 to the image controller 233 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is generated that describes instructions for drawing an image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1 and writes an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instruction contents are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for storing. In addition to storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing null data indicating that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If so (that is, if Null data is not written), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, which describes the contents of the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 that are generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, if transfer data information is written in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite is transferred. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f indicates an address at which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is for specifying. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process (FIG. 73(b ), pointer update processing (see S6205 in FIG. 81) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by 1.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list to be described later. (see FIG. 36), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and acquires the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

Furthermore, if a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw one frame worth of images generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list to be instructed to 237.

Here, details of the drawing list will be explained with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Pattern 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Pending ball number pattern 1, Pending ball number pattern 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite such as a pattern) is described for that sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored, and its The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and made translucent according to the translucency value. , performs compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, performs tone correction processing according to the color information, and performs filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, various processes are applied to the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, and the resulting image is drawn. The drawn image is then developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a pending image that displays a pending pitch number pattern). image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image, and also generates detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (displayed object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 stores the image data of that sprite depending on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

The MPU 231 also specifies other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table. Copy the information as is.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites that should be placed closest to the back to the sprites that should be placed closest to the front among the images for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third design (design 1, design 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), and the character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (Character 1, Character 2, . . . , Pending pitch number symbol 1, Pending pitch number symbol 2, . . . , Error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites by overwriting them in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 controls the transfer data information (the character in which the image data to be transferred is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 transfers an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source first address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined subarea (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the performance time of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. At the same time as storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the performance time of the performance to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, the V interrupt process (FIG. 73(b ) Each time the display setting process (see ) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S6207 in FIG. 79). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Execute various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i indicates that for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S5002 in FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 231. be exposed. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Furthermore, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in an unstored state when the image data of that one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the storage status corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Furthermore, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and selects the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6717 in FIG. 83). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S6718 in FIG. 83). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j indicates a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops the image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Information on the specified drawing target buffer is then transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6802 in FIG. 84).

Thereby, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process to expand the image drawn based on the drawing list onto the specified drawing target buffer. Further, in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and sends the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, if the value is "0", it is set to "1", and if it is "1", it is set to "0". carried out by. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted. Furthermore, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 73(b)) is executed (see S6802 in FIG. 84).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

The performance state storage area 233k is an area for storing performance state information included in the display performance state command output from the audio lamp control device 113. The performance state information stored in the performance state storage area 233k is referred to when determining the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that this embodiment has variation pattern data corresponding to each piece of performance state information, and is configured so that different variation patterns are determined even when the same display variation pattern command is received. .

<About the control processing of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 37 to 58. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment). There are two types of interrupt processing: interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup processing. and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second winning random number counter C4, and the small winning type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second winning random number counter C4, and the small winning type counter C5 are each incremented by 1, and when those counter values reach the maximum When the values (in this embodiment, 299, 99, 99, 239, and 99, respectively) are reached, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and also sets a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (S104). After that, the first left ball entrance 64a, the first right ball entrance 64b (hereinafter, when both the left first ball entrance 64a and the right first ball entrance 64b are referred to, the first ball entrance 64a and the right first ball entrance 64b). ) or a starting winning process is executed in response to a winning (starting winning) in the second ball entrance 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 to 44.

After executing the starting winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through gate as the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is executed. Gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 to 48.

After executing the through gate passage process, the V entrance passage process accompanying the ball entering the second variable winning device 650 is executed (S108). Thereafter, a V passing process is executed in response to a winning to the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 (S109). Note that details of the V entrance passing process and the V passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 59.

Next, a firing control process is executed (S110), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether or not to fire. The main controller 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is used to display the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and the third symbol. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (S201). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game); This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of a jackpot game of symbols. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S201: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

If it is not a special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is performed. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of pending times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and the value has been changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53), which will be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. These are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command through the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, special symbol variation start processing is executed to start variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d The value of is acquired (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is ended.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210), and the value is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After setting the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is executed.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the variable time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbols on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is set (S215). . The setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. be exposed. More specifically, it is determined whether the special symbol is a jackpot, a small win, or a miss depending on the value of the first random number counter C1, and whether the special symbol is a jackpot or a small win. In this case, one of the big wins A to G or one of the small wins A to E is determined according to the value of the first win type counter C2 or the small win type counter C5.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LEDs are turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Further, if it is a small win, a red LED is turned on, and if it is a loss, a red LED and a green LED are turned on. Note that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuating display starts, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is displayed. It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), a scenario for opening a specific winning hole is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S218). Next, the jackpot start flag 203h and jackpot flag 203i are set to ON (S219), the time saving counter 203g is set to 0 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221. In the process of S221, a stop command is set (S221), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S216: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small win (S222).

In the process of S222, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small win (S222: Yes), a small win start setting process is executed (S223). Next, the process of S221 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S222, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (S222: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203g is 1 or more (S224). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 (S224: No), the process of S221 is executed and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving counter 203g is greater than or equal to 1 (S224: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S224), and the process of S221 is executed. After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and special Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a "special symbol jackpot", "special symbol small win" or "special symbol miss" lottery (win or fail) This is a process for determining the performance pattern (variable performance pattern) of the variable performance performed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, it is determined whether or not the time is being shortened (S301). If the time is not being shortened (S301: No), normal fluctuation start processing (S302) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the time saving is in progress (S301: Yes), a time saving variation start process (S303) is executed, and the present process ends.

Next, a description will be given of the normal variation start process (S302) and the time-saving variation start process (S303), which are executed in the above-mentioned special symbol variation start process (S213).

First, the normal fluctuation start process (S302) will be explained with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the normal variation start process (S302) executed in the special symbol variation start process (see S213 in FIG. 39).

In the normal fluctuation start process, first, data of the execution area in the corresponding special symbol reserved ball storage area (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b) is acquired (S401). Thereafter, a lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table corresponding to the type of the acquired special symbol (S402). Specifically, if the first special symbol is drawn based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64, a jackpot or small win is determined by referring to the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 26(b)). If the lottery is for the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a small win by referring to the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 26(c)). I do.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result is a jackpot (S403). If the lottery result is a jackpot (S403: Yes), the display mode at the time of a normal jackpot corresponding to the special symbol and jackpot type is set based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 ( S404). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random value stored in the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table 202b1 or the special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202b2, and 7 Among the types of special symbol jackpots (jackpots A to G), it is determined what type of jackpot is (see FIG. 27(b) or (c)).

In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to G). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A to G) are set as stop types in order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81.

Thereafter, a normal jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S405, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation performance on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the third pattern until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The variation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the fluctuation pattern table 202d1 for jackpot for special chart 1 or the fluctuation pattern table 202d5 for jackpot for special chart 2 (common to normal and short time) 29(a) or 30(b)).

In the process of S406, a variation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S405 (S406). Next, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in S404 (S407). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (see FIG. 53). be done. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as is to the display control device 114. When the process of S407 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a jackpot (S403: No), it is further determined whether the lottery result is a small win (S408). If the lottery result is a small win (S408: Yes), a display mode for a normal small win corresponding to the special symbol and jackpot type is set (S409). Thereafter, a normal small winning variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S410). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at the small winning symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S405, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the variation pattern table 202d3 for small winning for special drawing 1 or the variation pattern table 202d5 for large winning for special drawing 2 (common to normal and short time) to determine the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation (FIG. 29(d) or FIG. 30(b)). Next, the process of S406 and S407 is executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

If the lottery result is not a small win (S408: No), a display mode for a normal win corresponding to the special symbol is set (S411). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern when the ball is normally out is determined based on the number of reserved pitches (S412). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at a missed symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S405, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the fluctuation pattern table for missing for special chart 1 202d2 or the fluctuation pattern table for jackpot for special chart 2 202d5 ( 29(c) or 30(b)). Next, the process of S406 and S407 is executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the time saving fluctuation start process (S303) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the time saving variation start process (S303) executed in the special symbol variation start process (S213, see FIG. 39). This time-saving variation start process (S303) is different from the above-mentioned normal variation start process (S302) in that the time-saving display mode and variation pattern are set (determined), and other points are the same. , a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. In the processes of S505, S510, and S512, when determining the time-saving variation pattern of the first special symbol, as described above, it is determined based on the time-saving variation pattern table 202d4 for special symbol 1 (FIG. 30(a) )reference). On the other hand, when determining the time-saving variation pattern of the second special symbol, it is determined based on the special symbol 2 variation pattern table 202d5 (common to normal and time-saving), similarly to the normal variation start process (S302). 30(b)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the small hit start setting process (S222) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S222). This small hit start setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see Figure 38) of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 37), and is for small hit types (small hit A to E). This is a process for setting the operations of the V inlet solenoid 209a, the retention solenoid 209b, and the flow path solenoid 209c in the small winning game based on the following.

In the small hit start setting process (S222), first, the small win type selected in the process of S409 of the above-mentioned normal fluctuation start process or the process of S509 of the time saving fluctuation start process is read (S601), and then the small win type A Or it is determined whether it is B (S602). If it is the small hit type A or B (S602: Yes), an opening scenario for special map 1 is set (S603). In addition, the opening scenario for special drawing 1 specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 650f1 of the second variable prize winning device 650 and the retention member 650n. That is, during the small winning game production, the operation of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the retention solenoid 209b is set so that the opening/closing door 650f1 and the retention member 650n are opened for a predetermined period (see FIG. 10).

When the process of S603 is completed, it is determined whether the small winning type is B (S604). When the small winning type is B (S604: Yes), the flow path solenoid operation is set so that V winning is impossible (S605). That is, the operation of the flow path solenoid 209c is set so that the ball cannot flow down into the flow path 650h3 (see FIG. 10(a)). Thereafter, the process moves to S608. In the process of S604, if the small winning type is not B (that is, the small winning type is A) (S604: No), the flow path solenoid operation is set so that V winning is possible (S606). That is, the operation of the flow path solenoid 209c is set so that the ball can flow down into the flow path 650h3 (see FIG. 10(b)).

On the other hand, in the process of S602, if the small hit type is not A or B (that is, the small hit type is C, D or E) (S602: No), an opening scenario for special map 2 is set (S606 ). In addition, the opening scenario for the special figure 2 specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 650f1 of the second variable prize winning device 650 and the retention member 650n. That is, during the small winning game performance, the operation of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the retention solenoid 209b is set so that the opening/closing door 650f1 and the retention member 650n are opened for a predetermined period (see FIG. 11(a)). When the process of S607 is completed, the flow path solenoid operation is set so that V winning is possible (S606). That is, the operation of the flow path solenoid 209c is set so that the ball can flow down into the flow path 650h3 (see FIG. 11(a)).

When the processes of S605 and S607 are completed, the V passing jackpot type corresponding to each small winning type is set in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203m (S608). More specifically, based on the small hit type acquired in the process of S601 and the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table 202b1 or the special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202b2, the jackpot type (jackpot C to G) when passing V is determined. As mentioned above, if the small win type is A, it is determined that it is a jackpot C (a jackpot with 7 rounds of time savings), and if the small win type is B, it is determined that it is a jackpot D (a jackpot with no time savings in 2 rounds). If the small win type is C, it is determined to be a jackpot F (a jackpot with a time saving of 5 rounds), and if the small win type is D, it is judged to be a jackpot G (a jackpot with a 10 round time saving). , if the small win type is E, it is determined that it is a jackpot E (jackpot with 15 rounds of time saving) (see FIG. 27(b) or (c)).

Next, the start of a small win is set based on the small win type (S609), and the small win start flag 203j and the medium small win flag 203k are set to ON (S610). After that, this process ends.

Next, starting winning information processing (S105) will be explained. First, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and suspending their values when there is a starting prize.

When the starting winning process (FIG. 43, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) or not (S701). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S701: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reservations N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S702 ). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Then, whether there is no winning in the first ball entrance 64 (S701: No) or even if there is a winning in the first ball entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S703: No), the process moves to S707. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S701: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the pitch number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d that has been changed by the calculation is set (S705).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53), which will be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending pitch number command through the process of S705, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small winning type updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set. Each value of the counter C5 is stored in the first area among the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S706). In addition, in the process of S706, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing from S707 to S712, the same processing as the processing from S701 to S706 is performed for winnings in the second ball entrance 640. The only difference is that a reservation process is executed for the second special symbol in response to a winning of the second ball entrance 640, and the other processes are the same, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. If it is determined in the process of S707 that the ball has not entered the second ball entrance 640 (S707: No), a prefetch process is executed after the process of S712 (S713). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the pre-reading process (S713), which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S713).

In this pre-reading process (FIG. 44, S713), first, it is determined whether there is a new prize in the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (S801). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (S801: No), the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if there is a new winning at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S801: Yes), then it is determined whether the winning is a first special symbol winning (S802). ).

In the process of S802, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S802: Yes), special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, special symbol 1 jackpot selection table 202b1, and special symbol 1 small win selection table 202e1. Based on this, the lottery result, the jackpot type and the small win type are acquired (S803), and the process moves to S804. In the process of S804, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result, jackpot type, small win determination result, and small win type acquired in S803 (or S805) is set (S804), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S802, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (S802: No), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, the special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202b2, and the special symbol 2 small win selection Based on the table 202e2, the lottery result, jackpot type, and small win type are acquired (S805), the process of S804 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is used to display the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device and the electric This is a process for controlling the opening time of accessories.

In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 40, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S901). When a normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the second symbol display device is displaying the winning symbol, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is being controlled to open and close. This includes the middle of the day. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S901: Yes), this process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S901: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S902), and the second symbol display device is changed. If the display mode is not changing (S902: No), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203f (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S903). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S904), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S904: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S904: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S905).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S906). In the process of S906, the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S907).

Next, a lottery result is obtained based on the second winning random number table 202c (S908). In this control example, there is no distinction between a high probability state and a low probability state in the normal symbol lottery, and the probability of a normal symbol winning is always constant. Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S907 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c. As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 11", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "12 to 239", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win. (See FIG. 26(d)).

After that, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained through the process of S908 is a normal symbol win (S909), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a win (S909: Yes), the winning time is determined. The display mode is set (S910), and the process moves to S912. In the process of S910, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

In the process of S909, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S909: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S911). In the process of S911, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the "x" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of failure is completed, the process moves to S912.

When the process of S910 or S911 is completed, in the process of S912, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of normal symbols (S912). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state with normal symbols (S912: Yes), the time saving medium winning flag 203q is set to ON (S913). Next, the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S914), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-saving state (S912: No), the variable time of the variable display on the second symbol display device is set to 4 seconds (S915), and this process ends. In this way, except during jackpots of special symbols, in the time saving state of normal symbols, the time of the variable display is very short from "4 seconds → 3 seconds" compared to the normal state of normal symbols, so the second This makes it easier for the ball to enter the ball entrance 640.

On the other hand, in the process of S902, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S902: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed. (S916). In addition, the fluctuation time here is the time preset by the process of S914 or the process of S915 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the process of S916, if the variable time has not elapsed (S916: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S916, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S916: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S917). In the process of S917, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of S910, the "○" symbol as the second symbol will be displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the drawing of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of S911, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S917, when the second symbol display update process (see S1708) of the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. However, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a halt state (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S910 or the process of S911.

Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 45, S106) is It is determined whether it is a hit (S918). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol win (S918: Yes), electric accessory control processing is set (S919), and this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the electric accessory control process (S919) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. This electric accessory control process (S919) is a process executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and FIG. 46 shows the electric accessory control process (S919). 9 is a flowchart showing step S919).

In the electric accessory control process, first, it is determined whether or not the time saving medium winning flag 203q is on (S1001). If the time saving mid-game winning flag 203q is on (S1001: Yes), the time saving mid-game winning flag 203q is set to off (S1002), and then it is determined whether or not the time saving season is in progress (S1003). If the time is being shortened (S1003: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state with normal symbols, so the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is changed to open (3 seconds) and close. (5 seconds) and open (3 seconds) (S1004), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in S1001, if the winning flag 203q during time saving is not on (that is, off) (S1001: Yes), or in S1003, if the time saving is not in progress (S1003: No), the pachinko machine 10 has normal symbols. Since this is the normal state, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is set to open (0.1 seconds), close (0.1 seconds), and open (0.1 seconds). (S1005, this process ends.

In this way, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, compared to the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening operation of the second ball entrance 640 is "open (0.1 seconds), close (0.1 seconds), open ( 0.1 seconds) → open (3 seconds), close (5 seconds), open (3 seconds)'', which is very long, so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entry port 640.

Furthermore, when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set by the electric accessory control process (S919), when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1706) of the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed next, , the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started.

Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, and it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process (FIG. 47, S107), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S1101). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203f (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1102). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1103).

If the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball The value (M) of the number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S1104). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S1105). In addition, in the process of S1105, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area. When the process of S1105 is completed, a general map pre-reading process is executed (S1106).

Here, with reference to FIG. 48, the general map pre-reading process will be described (S1106). FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the contents of this general map pre-reading process (S1106). In the ordinary symbol pre-reading process (FIG. 48, S1106), first, preliminary determination is performed based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 newly stored in the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1201). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 newly stored in the process of S1105 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c.

Next, based on the result of the preliminary determination, a preliminary hit determination result and a variable time determination result are obtained (S1202). Thereafter, a common drawing prize information command is set (S1203), this process is ended, and the process returns to the through gate passage process.

Returning to FIG. 47, the explanation will be continued. When the ordinary symbol pre-reading process (S1106) is completed, it is then determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being won (S1107). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S1107: Yes), the process is immediately ended. If it is not a special symbol jackpot (S1107: No), it is determined whether or not a small hit is currently occurring (S1108). As a result of the determination, if there is a small hit (S1108: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

If it is not a small hit (S1108: No), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is changing (S1109). As a result of the determination, if the second special symbol is changing (S1109: Yes), this process is directly ended. If the second special symbol is not changing (S1109: No), it is determined whether or not the time is being shortened (S1109). As a result of the determination, if the time is being shortened (S1110: Yes), this process is directly ended. If the time is not being shortened (S1110: No), an error command is set (S1111) and the process ends.

On the other hand, whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1101: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol pending ball number counter If the value (M) of 203f is not less than 4 (S1103: No), the normal map pre-reading process (S1106) is skipped, the processes of S1107 to S1111 are executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the V entrance passage process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage process (S108) executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

In the V entrance passing process (S108), it is first determined whether or not there is a small win (S1301). In the process of S1301, if it is determined that there is a small win (S1301: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S1302), and this process ends. If it is not a small winning game (S1302: No), this means that the ball has entered the second variable winning device 650 even though it is not a small winning game, so an error command is set (S1303) and the main processing end.

The V entrance passing command set in the process of S1302 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the V-entrance passing command, it counts the balls that have passed through the V-entrance and transmits a command to the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the V-entrance passing. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect during a small winning game based on the ball entering the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 12).

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the V passing process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the V passing process (S109). This V passing process (S109) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

In the V passing process, first, the V passing jackpot type value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203m is acquired (S1401), and the V flag 203n indicating the acquired V passing jackpot type is set to ON ( S1402). Then, a V passing command is set (S1403).

Next, it is determined whether the small win type corresponds to small win B (S1404). In the process of S1404, if it is determined that it corresponds to small win B (S1404: Yes), an error command is set (S1405) and this process ends. In this embodiment, the balls that can pass through the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 are small winnings A, C, D, or E (that is, other than small winning B), and the small winning type value is This is only when a small win A, C, D or E (that is, other than small win B) is set. Therefore, when the small hit type value is small win B and the V passing process (S1401) that is executed based on the ball passing the V winning switch 650e3 is executed, the V winning switch 650e3 is fraudulently executed. This is considered to be the case when the ball is awarded. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S1405, error output is executed, and fraudulent activity can be discovered.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1501), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

Note that the above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, wait processing (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 7) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1604), and if it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process moves to S1612. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if it is not stored (S1605: No). , since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process also moves to S1612 in this case.

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S1606), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so the process also moves to S1612 in such a case. Note that, as will be described later in the process of S1716 in FIG. 53, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1612, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1612). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1613, S1614).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S1613, S1614) is executed. In addition, in the case where power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S1613, S1614) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1613, S1614), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1613), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1614). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to S1610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( (S1607: Yes), clearing the power-off occurrence information while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1608). Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start ball payout control while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1610, a production permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 to execute various productions. Next, interrupts are permitted (S1611), and the process shifts to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a description will be given of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up processing described above. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the main processes of the game are executed. As an overview, each process of S1701 to S1709 is executed as a periodic process of 4 msec period, and the counter update process of S1712 and S1713 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing (see FIG. 53), first, while executing the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub side. External output processing to be sent to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1701). Specifically, it is determined whether there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and if there is winning detection information, it is sent to the payout control device 111 to correspond to the number of balls acquired. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) or the start winning process (see FIG. 43) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the jackpot start command, round number command, and jackpot end command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the fluctuation type counter CS1 has been updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then, when the special symbol is in a jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed and the payout abnormality signal is read. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the first variable winning winning device 65 is executed (S1704). In the jackpot control process, the first specific winning hole 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and either the maximum opening time of the first specific winning hole 65a has elapsed or a specified number of balls have entered the first specific winning hole 65a. Determine whether Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the first specific winning opening 65a is closed. This opening and closing of the first specific winning hole 65a is repeated a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

Next, in the case of a small winning state with a special symbol, various effects are executed according to the small winning, and small winning control processing is executed to open or close the opening/closing door 650f1 of the second variable prize winning device 650 ( S1705). In the small winning control process, the opening/closing door 650f1 is opened based on the opening scenario, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the opening/closing door 650f1 has elapsed or whether a prescribed number of balls have entered the opening/closing door 650f1. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed. In addition, in this embodiment, although the small hit control process (S1705) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

When the process of S1705 is completed, an electric accessory opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 (S1706). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory is set by the electric accessory control process (FIG. 46, S1005) executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the electric accessory Start controlling the opening and closing of objects. Note that the opening/closing control of this electric accessory is continued until the opening operation set in the process of S1004 or the process of S1005 in the electric accessory control process (FIG. 46, S1005) is completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process is executed to update the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B (S1707). In the first symbol display update process, S405, S410, S412 of the normal variation start process (FIG. 40, S302) or the time-saving variation start process (FIG. 41, S303) executed during the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39) When a variation pattern is set by the process of or the process of S505, S510, and S512, a variation display according to the variation pattern is started on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B. In this embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED of the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation is started, that red LED Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. turns off the light and lights up the red LED.

Note that the main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is Change the lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, the variation set by the process of S405, S410, S412 or the process of S505, S510, S512 of the normal variation start process (see FIG. 40) or the time saving variation start process (see FIG. 41) When the variation time corresponding to the pattern ends, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is ended, and the normal variation start process (see FIG. 40) or the time-saving variation start process (see FIG. 41) is performed. The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed in a halt state (lit display) on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in the display mode set by the processing of S404, S409, S411 or the processing of S504, S509, S511.

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display on the second symbol display device (S1708). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S914 or S915 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), variable display is started on the second symbol display device. . As a result, in the second symbol display device, a variable display is performed in which the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S917 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device After the display ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a halt state (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S910 or the process of S911 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45). do.

Next, a storage device control process is executed to set the opening and closing of the storage valve 750a attached to the storage device 750 (S1709).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM 203 stores information on the occurrence of a power outage (S1710), and if the RAM 203 does not store information on the occurrence of a power outage (S1710: No), a power outage signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1711). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1711: Yes), the process moves to S1701, and each process from S1701 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the current main processing (S1711: No), the The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1712, S1713).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1712). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process in S1702 (S1713).

Here, since the execution time of each process from S1701 to S1709 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e. , the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1710, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1710: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 51 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after S1714 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1714), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and transmits it (S1715). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S1716), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1717), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S1710 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in S1701 to S1709, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in S1712 and S1713 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. The process can be started from the process in S1701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1701, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved during power-off processing, the stack pointer is saved during the initial setting process (S1601). By setting it to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1701. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54, the jackpot control process (S1704) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1704). This jackpot control process (S1704) is executed during the main interrupt process (see FIG. 53), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it is possible to execute various effects according to the jackpot, or perform the first This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S1801). Specifically, if the jackpot start flag 203h is set to ON by the process of S219 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1801, when a special symbol jackpot is started (S1801: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203h is set to OFF (S1802), and an opening command is set (S1803).

The jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp during external output processing (S1701) of the main processing (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the jackpot start command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display jackpot start command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect to start the jackpot. When the process of S1803 is finished, the storage release flag 203p is set to ON (S1804), and this process is finished.

On the other hand, in the process of S1801, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1801: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1805). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the jackpot flag 203i is on. In the process of S1805, if the special symbol is not a jackpot (S1805: No), the process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1805, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S1805: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1806). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1806: Yes), the first specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S1807), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set ( S1808). After setting the round number command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp during external output processing (S1701) of the main processing (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command corresponding to the number of rounds to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when a continuous jackpot is executed in the audio lamp control device 113, a display round number command corresponding to the cumulative number of rounds is transmitted. Therefore, the accumulated number of rounds in continuous jackpots will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This allows the player to recognize that the jackpot has continued for a long time, thereby increasing the player's interest.

On the other hand, in the process of S1806, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1806: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S1809). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, , 10 in total), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1809, if the closing condition for the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S1809: Yes), the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is closed. , this process ends. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the first specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S1809: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to end the jackpot (S1811). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out ends, it is determined that it is the timing to end the jackpot.

In the process of S1811, if it is the timing to end the jackpot (S1811: Yes), a jackpot end command is set (S1812), and the jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF (S1813).

Next, it is determined whether the special game being executed was jackpot B (S1814). In the process of S1814, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot B (7R time saving no jackpot) (S1814: No), the time saving counter 203g is set to 1 (S1815) and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1814, if it is determined that it was a jackpot B (7R time-saving jackpot) (S1814: Yes), the process of S1815 is skipped and the present process ends.

The jackpot end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot end command, it selects the display mode of the jackpot end effect based on the winning information stored in the special symbol winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display jackpot end command corresponding to the selected jackpot end display mode is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts producing the jackpot end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the small hit control process (S1705) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process (S1705) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). This small hit control process (S1705) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a small win state with a special symbol, it executes various effects according to the small win, and This is a process for opening or closing the opening/closing door 650f1 of the 2-variable winning device 650.

In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether a small hit of a special symbol is started (S1901). Specifically, if the small winning start flag 203j is set to ON by the process of S610 of the small winning start setting process (see FIG. 42), it is determined that the small winning of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1901, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1901: Yes), the small hit start flag 203j is set to OFF (S1902), and the small hit start command is set (S1903).

The small hit start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output as a voice during external output processing (S1701) of the main processing (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the small hit start command, it transmits a small win start command for display to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display small win start command, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect to start the small win.

When the process of S1903 is finished, the V inlet solenoid 209a and the flow path solenoid 209c are set to ON based on the opening scenario (S1904), the operation of the retention member 650n is started (S1905), and this process ends.

The opening scenario referred to in the process of S1904 is the one set in the above-mentioned small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42), and the opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a is set regardless of the small winning type. The opening scenario of the solenoid 209c is set only when the small winning type is A, C, D, or E. Therefore, in all small winning games, the opening/closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and it becomes possible to enter the ball into the second variable winning device 650. On the other hand, only in small wins A, C, D, or E where the channel solenoid 209c is turned on, the ball that enters the second variable winning device 650 can flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2. That is, small win A, C, D, or E is a small win type in which a jackpot is awarded, and small win B is a small win type in which a jackpot is not awarded.

Further, in the process of S1905, the operation of the retention member 650n is started (the retention solenoid 209b is turned on), so that one ball can be retained in the distribution destination area 650h3.

On the other hand, in the process of S1901, if it is not the timing to start the small winning of the special symbol (S1901: No), it is determined whether the small winning of the special symbol is in progress (S1906). During a small hit with a special symbol, a small win with a special symbol is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 (including during a small win game with a special symbol); This includes during the predetermined time after the end of the special symbol winning game. Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the medium-small hit flag 203k is on. In the process of S1906, if the special symbol is not hit (S1906: No), the process is directly ended.

In the process of S1906, if it is determined that the special symbol is in a small hit (S1906: Yes), then it is determined whether the closing condition of the V entrance is satisfied (S1907). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 6.5 seconds) has passed after opening/closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, (total of 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

Note that the closing condition may be that a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) have entered the second specific winning opening 650a.

In the process of S1907, if the closing condition for the opening/closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is satisfied (S1907: Yes), the V inlet solenoid 209a is activated to close the opening/closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650. The retention solenoid 209b is set to OFF (S1908), and the retention solenoid 209b is set to OFF to terminate the operation of the retention member 650n (S1909), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the opening/closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is not satisfied (S1907: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to end the small win (S1910). Specifically, after a predetermined time has elapsed (3 seconds in this control example) after the above-mentioned closing condition of the V entrance is satisfied, it is determined that it is the timing to end the small hit. As a result, the small winning termination process (turning off the flow path solenoid 209c) can be executed after the operation of the retention member 650n is completed, so the balls retained in the distribution destination area 650h3 are transferred to the V winning switch 650e3. You can reliably hit the ball.

In the process of S1910, if it is the timing to end the small hit (S1910: Yes), the small hit medium flag 203k is set to OFF (S1911), the small hit end process is executed (S1912), and each solenoid is opened. The scenario is cleared (S1913), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1910, if it is not the timing to end the small hit (S1910: No), this process is ended as it is.

Here, with reference to FIG. 56, details of the small winning end process (S1912) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the small winning ending process (S1912). This small hit ending process (S1912) is a process that is executed when it is determined in the small winning control process that it is the timing to end the small winning.

In the small hit end process (S1912), first, the flow path solenoid 209c is set to OFF (S2001), and it is determined whether or not the V flag 203n is on (S2002). In the process of S2002, if it is determined that the V flag 203n is on (S2002: Yes), this means that the ball passes through the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 during the small winning game. Processing is performed to start the execution of the jackpot game based on passage of the V winning switch 650e3.

Specifically, an opening scenario for the first specific winning opening 65a is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203n (S2003), and a jackpot start is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203n (S2003). S2004). Next, the jackpot start flag 203h and jackpot middle flag 203i are set to ON (S2005), and the V flag 203n is set to OFF (S2006). Then, the time saving counter 230g is set to 0 (S2007), the value of the V passing jackpot type value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203m is cleared (S2008), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2002, if it is determined that the V flag 203n is not on (S2002: No), this means that the small winning ball did not pass through the V winning switch 650e3, so no jackpot is awarded. In order to end the game, a small winning end command is set (S2009). Thereafter, the process of S2008 is executed, and this process ends.

The small hit end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output as a voice during the external output processing (S1701) of the main processing (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot end command, it selects the display mode of the jackpot end effect based on the winning information stored in the special symbol winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display jackpot end command corresponding to the selected jackpot end display mode is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts producing the jackpot end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the electric accessory opening/closing process (S1706) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the electric accessory opening/closing process (S1706) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). This electric accessory opening/closing process (S1706) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), and is a process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry opening 640.

In the electric accessory opening/closing process, first, it is determined whether the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2101). In addition, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set by the electric accessory control process (FIG. 46, S1005) executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45). In the process of S2101, if the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is not set (S2101: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2101, if the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2101: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the first opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2102). If it is determined in the process of S2102 that it is the first opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2102: Yes), opening of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2103), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2102 that it is not the first opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2102: No), then it is determined whether it is the first closing timing of the electric accessory 640a. (S2104). If it is determined that it is the first closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2104: Yes), closing of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2105), and then it is determined whether the time saving operation is in progress (S2106). ). If it is determined in the process of S2106 that the time saving operation is not in progress (S2106: No), this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S2106 that the time saving operation is in progress (S2106: Yes), a closing command is set (S2107), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2104 that it is not the first closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2104: No), then it is determined whether it is the second opening timing of the electric accessory 640a. (S2108). When it is determined that it is the second opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2108: Yes), the opening of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2109), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2108 that it is not the second opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2108: No), then it is determined whether it is the second closing timing of the electric accessory 640a. (S2110). If it is determined that it is not the second closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2110: No), then it is determined whether the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (S2111). If it is determined that the ball has not entered the second ball entry port 640 (S2111: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2110 that it is the second closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2108: Yes), and if it is determined in S2111 that the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (S2111: Yes), the electric accessory 640a is set to be closed (S2112). Then, the setting of the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is cleared (S2113), and this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the storage device control process (S1709) will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the storage device control process (S1709) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). This storage device control process (S1709) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53) and is a process for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 750a attached to the storage device 750.

In the storage device control process, first, it is determined whether the value of the release counter 203pa is greater than 1 (S2201). If it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is not greater than 1 (that is, it is 0 or 1) (S2201: No), then it is determined whether the storage release flag 203p is on (S2202). If it is determined that it is on (S2202: Yes), release of storage (that is, opening of the storage valve 750a) is set (S2203). Then, the value of the release counter 203pa is set to 1, and the process moves to S2205. On the other hand, in the process of S2201, if it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is greater than 1 (S2201: Yes), the process of S2201 to S2204 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S2205.

In the process of S2205, it is determined whether the value of the release counter 203pa is 25000 (S2205). If it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is not 25000 (S2205: No), the value of the release counter 203pa is incremented by 1 (S2206), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2205, if it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is 25000 (S2205: Yes), the storage is closed (that is, the storage valve 750a is closed) (S2207), and the storage release flag 203p is set. Set to off (S2208). Next, the value of the release counter 203pa is set to 0, and the process ends.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 70. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on, and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 59, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When startup processing is executed, first, initialization processing associated with power-on is executed (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage"), resulting in the power-off processing in S3119 (see Figure 60). ) is started during execution (S3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, upon receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S3116 in FIG. 60), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S3119. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S3119 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S3002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing in S3119 was started. The process was started after the execution of the process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3003).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S3006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), the process moves to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process moves to S3008.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3003: Yes), and the process moves to S3004. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S3119 was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset only due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: No), and the process moves to S3008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S3002: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power outage occurs, and during the execution of the power-off process in S3119, the audio lamp control device 113 The process was started when the MPU 221 of the computer was reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is in the middle of execution, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S3004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S3004). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), a keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S3006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You can also do this.

In the process of S3008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S3119 is executed (see S3118 in FIG. 60). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S3119 is executed, so the reason why the process in S3008 is reached with the power-off flag on is because the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S3119 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S3009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S3010), the interrupt Permission is set (S3011) and the process moves to main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process reaches S3008 with the power-off flag turned off is because the current startup process was started after the power was completely shut off, so the process goes through S3004 to S3006 and then S3008. This is a case where the process has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S3008: No), S3009, which is a process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process moves to S3010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3010). Next, interrupt permission is set (S3011), and the process moves to main processing.

Note that the reason why the clearing process in S3009 is skipped is because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S3004 when the process reaches the process in S3008 from S3004 through the process in S3006. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 msec or more has passed since the main processing was started or the current processing of S3101 has been executed (S3101), and it is determined whether 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or the current processing of S3101 was executed. If not (S3101: No), the process moves to S3112 without performing the processes of S3102 to S3111. In the process of S3101, determining whether 1 ms has elapsed is because S3102 to S3111 are mainly related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in short cycles (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process in S3112, the variable display setting process in S3113, the effect state setting process in S3114, and the specific effect setting process in S3115 in a short cycle. By executing the process in S3112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the omission of receiving commands sent from the main controller 110, and by executing the process in S3113 in a short cycle, the received command can be Based on this, settings regarding variable effects can be made without delay. In addition, by executing the process of S3114 in a short cycle, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is changed without delay to the display content corresponding to the current gaming state based on the command received by the command determination process. can be done.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S3103 to S3111 are sent to the display control device 114 (S3102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S3108, which will be described later (S3103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S3104). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S3105 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

In the process of S3105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting production process, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is used as a command to control the display. device 114. In the pending number display update process, a process is performed in which a pending lamp (not shown) is lit according to the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (S3107). This frame button input monitoring/presentation process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process of setting to perform a performance. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

When the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is completed, lamp editing processing is executed (S3108), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S3109, liquid crystal presentation execution management process is executed (S3110). In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S3108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing/output processing in S3109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81.

After the counter update process (S3111), a command determination process is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S3112). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 61 to 65.

Next, the process moves to S3113. In the process of S3113, a variable display setting process is executed (S3113). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67.

Next, the process moves to S3114. In the process of S3114, a production state setting process is executed (S3114). In this performance state setting process, a performance state is set for making each performance mode (display mode of the third symbol, display mode of the reserved symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 correspond to the gaming state. The process is executed, and a display effect state command is generated and set based on the set effect state. As a result, the command is sent to display control device 114. The details of this performance state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 68.

After completing the process in S3114, the process moves to S3115. In the process of S3115, a specific effect setting process is executed (S3115). In this specific performance setting process, a process for setting a performance different from the variable performance for indicating the lottery results of each symbol (special pattern 1, special pattern 2, general pattern) is executed. Note that details of this specific effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

Then, when the specific effect setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S3116 (S3116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S3118), and the power-off process is executed (S3119). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S3120), and the process is then looped endlessly. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S3116 (S3116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3117: No), the process returns to S3101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3117: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the command determination process (S3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S3112). This command determination process (S3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. This is a process for

In the command determination process (FIG. 61, S3112), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223, and analyzed. It is determined whether a fluctuation pattern related command has been received (S3201). The fluctuation pattern related commands are commands for notifying the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of special symbols or commands for notifying the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of normal symbols, and are sent from the main controller 110. The selected variation pattern (variation time) is output corresponding to each of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the normal symbol.

In the process of S3201, if it is determined that a variation pattern related command has been received (S3201: Yes), variation pattern related processing (S3202) is executed. This variation pattern related processing is used to extract a variation pattern based on a variation pattern related command outputted (received) from the main control device 110 and to cause the display control device 114 to execute an effect display. Here, the variation pattern related processing (S3202) will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 62.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern related processing (S3202). This variation pattern related process (S3202) is a process of determining which symbol the variation pattern command received this time corresponds to, and executing the process corresponding to the received symbol based on the determination result. . In this variation pattern related processing (S3202), it is determined whether the variation pattern related command received this time is a variation pattern command for a special symbol (special symbol) (S3301). In the process of S3301, if it is determined that it is a special figure variation pattern command (S3301: Yes), then the process moves to S3302.

In the process of S3302, if it is determined that it is a variation pattern command for special figure 2 (S3302: Yes), as shown in FIG. 62, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern received this time is a variation pattern command for special figure 2. (S3301). Here, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern received this time is a fluctuation pattern command for special drawing 2 (S3302), and if it is determined that it is a fluctuation pattern command for special drawing 2 (S3302: Yes), then , sets the special 2 variation flag 223s to on (S3303), sets the special figure variation start flag to on, and extracts a variation pattern from the received command (S3305), while the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set. be done.

The fluctuation start flag 223d (variation start flag for special symbol) provided in the fluctuation display of the special symbol is set to ON, the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S3305), and this processing is ended. . On the other hand, in the process of S3301, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern related command received this time is not a special symbol fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation pattern start flag 223u for regular symbols is set to on (S3306), and the received fluctuation pattern The variation pattern type is extracted from the command (S3307), and this processing ends. The fluctuation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 for each special symbol type (corresponding first special symbol, second special symbol, and normal symbol) to indicate that it is a special symbol fluctuation pattern type. It is stored in an identifiable format, and in the fluctuating display setting process (see FIG. 66) to be described later, the display control device 114 is instructed to start the fluctuating display performance of the special symbol and the display mode of the fluctuating display performance of the special symbol. It is used when notifying (when setting a variable pattern command for displaying special symbols).

Returning to FIG. 61, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3201, if it is determined that a fluctuation pattern related command has not been received (S3201: No), it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3203). If it is determined that a stop type command (either the special map 1 stop type command, the special map 2 stop type command, or the general map stop type command) has been received (S3203: Yes), the command corresponding to the type of the received command is determined. The stop type selection flag 223e is set on (S3204). Specifically, when the special symbol 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the first special symbol is set to ON, and when the special symbol 2 stop type command is received, the second special symbol is set to ON. The stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the symbol is set to ON, and when the normal symbol stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the normal symbol is set to ON.

When the process of S3204 is finished, next, the stop type (completely off (miss), out of reach, small hit, jackpot (win)) is extracted from the received stop type command (S3205), and this process is executed. finish. The stop type extracted in the process of S3205 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. Then, it is referenced when a variable display setting process (see FIG. 66) to be described later is executed, and is used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

In the process of S3203, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S3203: No), it is determined whether the held pitch count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3206). If it is determined that the held ball number command has been received (S3206: Yes), the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the received held ball number command. (i.e., the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted, and in accordance with the extracted counter value, the corresponding value provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is The counter value is updated (S3207). More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223, and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is stored. When the value is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c.

Note that in the process of S3207. When a normal symbol reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls of a normal symbol is received, the value of a normal symbol reserved ball number counter (not shown) (i.e., the number of reserved balls of a fluctuating display of a normal symbol) is extracted. The corresponding counter value provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is also updated in accordance with the counter value.

After completing the process of S3207, a process related to the number of reserved pitches is executed (S3208). This pending ball number related process (S3208) is a process for setting various flags and display commands based on the pending ball number of the special figure 2. Here, the pending pitch count related processing (S3208) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pending pitch count related process (S3208).

When the process related to the number of reserved balls (S3208) is executed, first, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for Special 2 (Special Figure 2) has been updated (S3401). Here, if it is determined that the number of reserved pitches for Special 2 is not updated (S3401: No), that is, if the number of reserved pitches command received this time is not the number of reserved pitches for Tokuzu 2, this process is immediately terminated. . On the other hand, in the process of S3401, if it is determined that the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated (S3401: Yes), then it is determined whether the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated to 1 (S3402). Here, it is determined whether the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated to 1, that is, the number of special 2 reserved balls has transitioned from "0" to "1", that is, from the state where there are no special 2 reserved balls to the state where there are. do.

In the process of S3402, if it is determined that the number of special 2 pending balls has been updated to 1 (S3402: Yes), the special 2 pending flag 223n is set to ON, and then the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON. It is determined whether it has been set (S3404). If it is determined that the end effect execution flag 223x is set to on, that is, if it is determined that the end effect (see FIG. 19(b)) is being executed on the third symbol display device 81, (S3404: Yes), a display victory command is set (S3405), and this process ends.

When the display win command is set, the word "win" is displayed as the result of the ending performance executed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 20(a)), which is advantageous to the player. It is reported that the condition continues. In addition, if a ball enters the special drawing 2 during the period when this end effect is being executed, the effect may be switched even during the end effect, or the effect may be changed in advance as in this embodiment. It may also be possible to notify that a ball has won a prize on the special drawing 2 at the end of the end performance that is executed during the period of time.

In addition, as in this embodiment, the timing when a ball has won a prize in the special drawing 2 (second ball entrance 640) and the fact that a ball has won a prize in the special drawing 2 (second ball entrance 640) are notified as an effect. If there is a possibility that a time lag may occur between the timing and the end effect execution period, for example, the pending symbol displaying the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 may be deleted during the execution period of the end effect. Thereby, even though the end performance continues, it is possible to prevent the player from being informed of the performance result of the end performance due to an increase in the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2.

Returning to FIG. 63, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3402, if it is determined that the number of special 2 reserved balls has not been updated to 1 (S3402: No), then it is determined whether the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated to the upper limit (4) (S3406). ), if it is determined that it has been updated (S3406: Yes), the special 2 pending upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S3407: Yes), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3406 that the number of special 2 reserved pitches has not been updated to the upper limit, the process of S3407 is skipped and the present process ends.

Here, the held ball count command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting winning) or when the ball passes through the through gate 67. Therefore, every time there is a starting prize, the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 are transferred to the main controller through the process of S2210. 110 special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e. Therefore, due to the influence of noise etc., the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 may be changed to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the special Even if the value deviates from the value of the symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, if the number of reserved balls command is notified based on the starting winning, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 or the special symbol The value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

In addition, in the process of S3206, if it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S3206: No), it is determined whether a winning information related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3209). In the process of S3209, if it is determined that a winning information related command has been received (S3209: Yes), winning information related processing is executed (S3210). In this winning information related processing (S3210), various flags and various counters are set, which are referred to in order to set various effects executed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, based on the lottery result of the pending special symbol, the special symbol that is executed before the variation of the pending special symbol starts (i.e., before the variation of the target special symbol) During the variable display period), it is now possible to execute an effect that shows the lottery results of the special symbol that sent the winning information command, and to display the lottery results of one special symbol to the player using the variable display period of multiple special symbols. Suggestive notifications can be made and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Here, the winning information related process (S3210) will be explained with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the content of winning information related processing (S3210). When this winning information related process (S3210) is executed, first, it is determined whether the winning information related command received this time is a winning information command regarding a special symbol (special symbol) (S3501). If it is determined that it is a winning information command regarding a special drawing (S3501: Yes), the received winning information command is stored in the special drawing winning information storage area 223a (S3502), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S3501, if it is determined that the winning information related command received this time is not a winning information command related to special symbols (special symbols) (it is a winning information command related to general symbols) (S3501: No), The information is stored in the winning information storage area 223t for ordinary figures (S3503), and this process is ended.

In addition, in the gaming machine where special symbol winning information (special symbol pre-reading) and normal symbol winning information (normal symbol pre-reading) are executed, the main controller 110 outputs it to the audio lamp control device 113. The output timing of each winning information command is the same, and when determining by the winning information related process (S3210), a priority is set for each winning information command, and only the winning information command with a high priority is determined. It may be configured as follows. This eliminates the need to perform different determination processing for each winning information command, reducing the processing load, and making the type and number of winning information commands determined by the audio lamp control device 113 irregular. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute performances that are not intended by the player.

In other words, the winning information included in the winning information command is acquired by the main controller 110 when a ball enters each ball entrance (first ball entrance 64 or second ball entrance 640) or through gate 67. The sound lamp control device 113 is a result of determining each counter value in advance before the lottery is executed based on the entered ball, or a value based on the counter value. Even if the winning information command is not reliably acquired on the side, there will be no problem with the game, so if the predetermined conditions are met (the winning information command for special drawings and the winning information command for general drawings are received at the same time) The above-mentioned effect is achieved by intentionally not acquiring one of the winning information commands in the following cases. Furthermore, in a configuration where there are multiple acquisition conditions (ball entry) for one symbol (first special symbol), such as the left first ball entry port 64a and the right first ball entry port 64b of this embodiment, winning The information command includes information that allows the voice lamp control device 113 to identify which acquisition condition is based on which winning information command is established, and based on the identification result, processing based on the winning information command is performed. may be made variable. Specifically, for example, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a winning information command based on a ball entering the left first ball entrance 64a, a performance based on the received winning information command (so-called pre-reading performance) is performed. may be configured to be performed more frequently than when a winning information command based on the ball entering the right first ball entry port 64b is received. Thereby, even if the first special symbol is the same, the frequency at which the pre-read performance is performed can be easily varied. According to the configuration shown in the above-described example, during a game (left-handed game) in which the ball is aimed at the first left ball entrance 64a, the look-ahead effect based on the first special symbol can be executed (can be executed frequently), During a game (right-handed game) in which the player aims at the ball entrance 64b, it may be difficult to perform a look-ahead performance based on the first special symbol (possible to perform with a low probability). Thereby, it is possible to set the performance mode according to the gaming state.

Returning to FIG. 61, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3209, if it is determined that a winning information related command has not been received (S3209: No), then it is determined whether a winning related command has been received (S3211). If a winning related command is received (S3211: Yes), a winning related process (S3212) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 65, the winning related process (S3212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the win-related processing (S3212). This win-related process (S3212) is a process that is executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) that a win-related command has been received.

In the win-related process, it is first determined whether a jackpot start command has been received (S3601). If it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S3601: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S3602), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 60). The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, it displays on the third symbol display device 81 an effect suggesting (notifying) the start of the jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S3601: No), then it is determined whether or not a round number command has been received (S3603). In the process of S3603, if it is determined that the round number command has been received (S3603: Yes), 1 is added to the round number cumulative counter (S3604). Thereafter, a display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter (S3605), and the present process ends.

In the process of S3603, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S3603: No), it is determined whether or not a jackpot end command has been received (S3606). In the process of S3606, if it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S3606: Yes), a jackpot end command for display is set (S3607), and this process is ended.

In the process of S3606, if it is determined that the jackpot end command has not been received (S3606: No), it is determined whether the small win start command has been received (S3608).

In the process of S3608, if it is determined that the small win start command has been received (S3608: Yes), a small win start command for display is set based on the small win type (S3609), and this process ends. In the process of S3608, if it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S3608: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit end command has been received (S3610).

In the process of S3610, if it is determined that the small winning end command has been received (S3610: Yes), a small winning ending command for display is set in order to execute a production suggesting the end of the small winning game (S3611). , this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3610, if it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S3610: No), it is determined whether or not the V passing command has been received (S3612).

In the process of S3612, if it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S3612: Yes), the process based on the ball entering the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 is executed, and the V passing command for display is executed. is set (S3613), and this processing ends. Note that this embodiment has a measuring means for measuring the number of times the V passing command is received during the period in which the consecutive game flag 223i is set to ON, and a display screen corresponding to the number of times measured by the measuring means is provided. It is configured so that the V passing command can be set. Specifically, the display V passage command is set so that the bonus effect is executed only when the number of times the measurement means exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). As a result, the player can aim to pass more Vs, and can be motivated to play the game.

Note that other conditions may be set as conditions for setting the contents of the display V passing command. For example, the number of small winning games that did not pass V and the number of small winning games that passed V, respectively. A means for measuring and calculating the ratio may be provided, and the content of the display V passage command may be set based on the ratio calculated by the means. As a result, players who have executed a large number of small winning games that do not pass the V can perform a congratulatory effect when they have passed the V, and players who have executed a high percentage of small winning games that have passed the V. It is possible to perform a performance to celebrate the event.

In the process of S3612, if it is determined that the V passing command has not been received (S3612: No), this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 61, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3211, if it is determined that a winning-related command has not been received (S3211: No), then it is determined whether a notification command has been received (S3213). If it is determined in the process of S3213 that a notification command has been received (S3213: Yes), a notification sound is set, a display command for notification is set (S3214), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3213, if it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S3213: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received (S3215). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S3215: Yes), status information based on the received status command is stored in the status storage area 223k (S3216), and this process ends. The status commands received here include a normal status command to indicate that the gaming status is normal, a jackpot status command to indicate that the gaming status is jackpot, and a jackpot status command to indicate that the gaming status is jackpot. A small winning state command to show that the gaming state is a time saving state, a time saving state command to show that the game state is a time saving state, a state that the electric accessory 640a is operating, and how many times it is operating. These are status commands related to the gaming status that can be grasped by the main control device 110, such as operation status commands for indicating.

The above-described status command is configured to be received from the main controller 110 when the gaming status is transferred. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the process of determining the content of the received status command from becoming complicated, and to reduce the processing load. Further, when a power outage or the like occurs and the data in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is erased, the currently set status command is output in the power outage recovery process. Note that the output timing of the status command is not limited to this, and the currently set gaming status may be periodically output, or the gaming status may satisfy a specific output condition without transitioning. (For example, the timing when a predetermined round is reached during a jackpot game, or the timing when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number in a normal state) may be output. This allows the audio lamp control device 113 to grasp the current gaming state more reliably.

On the other hand, in the process of S3215, if it is determined that no status command has been received (S3215: No), then processes corresponding to other commands are executed (S3217). In the process of S3217, for example, it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main control device 110, and when it is determined that a stop command has been received, a display stop command is set based on the received command, or a game When receiving a ball entry command that is set based on a ball entering each ball entry port provided on the board 13, the number of balls entered is accumulated for each type of ball entry port into which the ball entered. , executes processing such as setting the number of balls entered for display command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the variable display setting process (S3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S3113). This variable display setting process (S3113) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (see FIG. 66) is a process executed to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, in this embodiment, each symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2, general symbol) corresponding to the main symbol mainly produced and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed according to the set presentation state. Designed to be variable. In addition, in the variable display setting process, a display variable pattern command is set for each of the above-mentioned symbols and is notified to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 controls the main symbol (the symbol to be displayed in the first display area Dm) and the secondary symbol (the second symbol) based on the received display variation pattern command and the received display performance state command. It is configured such that an effect display corresponding to the pattern displayed in the display area Dn is displayed. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 in a gaming machine in which different performance displays are executed in response to a plurality of performance states.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S3113), first, it is determined whether the special symbol fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3701). If it is determined that the special figure variation start flag 223d is off (S3701: No), the process moves to S3707 since the variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol variation start flag 223d is on (S3701: Yes), the detailed mode of the variation display of the current special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Each process of S3702 to S3706 is executed to determine.

More specifically, first, the special figure variation start flag 223d is set to OFF (S3702), then the extracted variation pattern is obtained (S3703), and it is determined whether the time saving flag 223g is on ( S3704). In the process of S3704, if it is determined that the time saving flag 223g is on (S3704: Yes), then the time saving flag is set to OFF (S3705), and the special figure display variation pattern command is set ( S3706), the process moves to S3707. On the other hand, in the process of S3704, if it is determined that the time saving flag 223g is not on (off) (S3704: No), the process of S3705 is skipped and the process of S3706 is executed.

In addition, when executing the process of S3706, subtract 1 from the value of the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, and set the value to the subtracted value. Based on this, the data in the special figure winning information storage area 223a included in the command storage area is shifted.

In the process of S3707, it is determined whether the flag indicating the stop type of the special map among the stop type selection flags 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3707). When it is determined that the flag indicating the stop type of the special figure out of the stop type selection flags 223e is off (S3707: No), the process moves to S3712. On the other hand, in the process of S3707, if it is determined that the flag indicating the stop type of the special figure out of the stop type selection flags 223e is on (S3707: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e (for special figures) is turned off. (S3708), then obtains the stop type extracted in the process of S3205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 61) (S3709), and sets the obtained stop type as is (S3710). Then, a display stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type (S3711). Thereafter, the ordinary figure fluctuation display setting process (S3712) is executed, and the present process ends.

This common symbol variation display setting process (S3712) is a process executed to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81 when a variation pattern command regarding common symbol variation is received from the main control device 110. Here, the ordinary figure fluctuation display setting process (S3712) will be explained with reference to FIG. 67.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ordinary figure fluctuation display setting process (S3712). When the ordinary figure fluctuation display setting process (S3712) is executed, first, it is determined whether the ordinary figure fluctuation start flag 223u is set to on. If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223u for ordinary figures is off (S3801: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command for ordinary figures has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S3810. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol variation start flag 223u is on (S3801: Yes), the detailed mode of the variation display of the current special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Each process of S3802 to S3810 is executed to determine.

Note that among the various processes executed in the general pattern fluctuation display setting process (S3712) in FIG. 67, the same processing as the fluctuation display setting process (S3113) described with reference to FIG. 66 is executed as follows. A detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S3801, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223u for regular symbols is on (S3801: Yes), S3702 and S3703 for special symbols executed in the above-mentioned fluctuation display setting process (S3113) are executed. For the process, the process of S3802 and S3803 is executed with the target changed to the ordinary map, and then it is determined whether the timing at which the variation based on the received variation pattern command is executed is in a time saving state (S3804). Here, the determination is made based on the status information stored in the status storage area 223k and the remaining time saving period information stored in the remaining time saving period storage area 223h.

In the process of S3804, if it is determined that the fluctuation start timing is in the time saving state (S3804: Yes), then the timing at which the fluctuation based on the received fluctuation pattern command ends (in the case of a win, the electric accessory 640a (S3805). Here, by calculating the difference between the remaining time saving period information stored in the remaining time saving period storage area 223h and the fluctuation time included in the obtained fluctuation pattern, it is determined whether there is a time saving state at the timing when the fluctuation ends. do.

In the process of S3805, if it is determined that the variation end timing (movement start timing of the electric accessory 640a) is within the time saving period (S3805: Yes), the general pattern valid flag 223q is set to ON (S3806), and then the variation is It is determined whether the end timing is within 2 seconds of the time saving end (S3807). In the process of S3807, if it is determined that the variation end timing is within 2 seconds of the time saving end (S3807: Yes), the replacement flag 223v is set to on (S3808), and the display variation pattern command (for general pattern ) is set (S3810), and the process moves to S3811.

On the other hand, if the determination is No in the process of S3804 or S3805, the ordinary map valid flag 223q is set to OFF (S3809), and the process moves to the process of S3810 described above. Further, in the process of S3807, if it is determined that the variation end timing is not within 2 seconds of the time saving end (S3807: No), the process of S3808 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S3810.

Next, the process of S3811 to S3815 similar to S3707 to S3711 described above with reference to FIG. 66 is executed, and this process ends. In addition, in the processing executed in S3811 to S3815, the target of the stop type command is a stop type command for special figures in S3707 to S3711, and a stop type command for regular figures in S3811 to S3815. The only difference is that the other contents are the same, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the effect state setting process (S3114) executed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 60) will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the production state setting process (S3114). This performance state setting process (S3114) is a process for setting the performance state according to the state command output from the main control device 110 and the current gaming situation, and is a process for setting the performance state according to the state command output from the main control device 110 and the performance state set in this process. By outputting the based information (display performance state command) to the display control device 114, the display mode of each symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2, general symbol) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The display mode of the number of reserved storage numbers (number of pending symbols) of each symbol is configured to be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the performance state.

When the production state setting process (S3114) is executed, first, the state information (game state) stored in the state storage area 223k is read out (S3901). This status information is stored in the status storage area 223k based on the status command received from the main controller 110 in the command determination process described above (see S3112 in FIG. 61). Therefore, it is used to determine the current gaming state on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

Next, with reference to the status information stored in the status storage area 223k, it is determined whether the current state (status information stored in the status storage area 223k) indicates the start of a jackpot (S3902). Here, if it is determined that it indicates the start of a jackpot (S3902: Yes), the consecutive winning flag 223i is set to ON (S3903), and the process moves to S3918. On the other hand, in the process of S3902, if it is determined that it does not indicate the start of a jackpot (S3902: No), then it is determined whether it indicates the end of a jackpot (S3904).

In the process of S3904, if it is determined that it indicates the end of the jackpot (S3904: Yes), then it is determined whether to shift to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot (S3905). The determination in S3905 is made based on the jackpot type information stored in the status storage area 223k. In the process of S3905, if it is determined that the time saving state is to be entered (S3905: Yes), the time saving flag 223g is set to ON (S3906), and then the process moves to S3918.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3905 that the time saving state is not to be entered (S3905: No), the continuous game flag 223i is set to OFF (S3907), the bonus performance execution flag 223w is set to OFF (S3908), The end effect execution flag 223x is set to OFF (S3909), and the process moves to S3918.

If it is determined in the process of S3904 that it does not indicate the end of the jackpot (S3904: No), then it is determined whether it is time for the time saving state to end (S3910). If it is determined that it is the timing to end the time saving state (S3910: Yes), then the special 2 reservation flag 223n for determining whether or not the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is reserved is set to ON. It is determined whether it has been set (S3911). Here, if it is determined that the special 2 reservation flag 223n is not on (off) (S3911: No), the consecutive game flag 223i is set to off (S3912), and the process moves to S3918. Furthermore, when it is determined that the special 2 suspension flag 223n is set to on (S3911: Yes), the process similarly moves to S3918.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the jackpot starts, the flag 223i is set to ON, and when the time saving state is not given after the jackpot ends, or when the time saving state ends, the special drawing 2 flag 223i is set to on. The configuration is such that when the pending memory is "0", the consecutive game flag 223i is set to OFF. As a result, during the jackpot game, the time saving state, and the state where the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed when transitioning from the time saving state to the normal state, are repeatedly executed. (during a specific period that is advantageous to the player), the consecutive games flag 223i can be set to ON continuously. Therefore, by measuring various values (for example, the number of jackpots, the number of acquired balls, etc.) during the period when the consecutive game flag 223i is turned on, various values during the consecutive game mode can be easily determined. In the pachinko machine 10 that has a consecutive game mode that transitions to a plurality of different game states, processing can be simplified.

Returning to FIG. 68, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3910, if it is determined that it is not the timing to end the time saving state (not the time saving end timing) (S3910: No), it is determined whether it is the small winning start timing (S3913), and at the small winning start timing. If it is determined that there is one (S3913: Yes), it is determined whether the current state is normal (S3914). In the process of S3914, if it is determined that the current state is normal (S3914: Yes), the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON (S3915), and the process proceeds to S3918. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3914 that the current state is not the normal state (the time saving state) (S3914: No), the process of S3915 described above is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3918.

In the process of S3913, if it is determined that the current time is not the small hit start timing (S3913: No), then it is determined whether the current time is the small hit end timing (S3916), and if it is the small hit end timing (S3916: Yes), the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to OFF (S3917), and the process moves to S3918. Here, when it is the small winning end timing, if it is determined that the pseudo effect flag 223r is not set to ON (that is, the small winning ending timing executed during the time saving state), step S3917 is executed. The process proceeds to S3918 without executing any process.

In the process of S3916, if it is determined that the current time is not the small winning end timing (S3916: No), the process moves to S3918. In the process of S3918, the current performance state is selected based on the performance state selection table 222b (S3918). Then, a display performance state command indicating the selected performance state is set (S3919), and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the specific effect setting process (S3115) executed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 60) will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific effect setting process (S3115). This specific effect setting process (S3115) is a process for setting a display command for displaying a specific effect on the third symbol display device 81 when a specific condition is satisfied.

In the first embodiment, the bonus performance (see FIG. 21) is executed when the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) reaches the upper limit (4 pieces) during the time saving state. And, during the time-saving state, when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is not stored and the remaining period of the time-saving state (fluctuating remaining period of special symbol 1) reaches the predetermined period (10 seconds). The end effect (see FIG. 19(b)) that is executed in the above is configured to be executed as a specific effect.

In addition, when the display control device 114 receives a display command indicating the content of a specific production, the display mode corresponding to the received specific production content is displayed regardless of the fluctuating display state of each symbol (whether it is fluctuating or not). is configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the specific effect setting process (S3115) is executed, it is first determined whether the flag 223i is set to ON (S4001), and if the flag 223i is not set to ON (set to OFF). (S4001: No), this process is immediately terminated. If it is determined that the consecutive show flag 223i is set on (S4001: Yes), then it is determined whether the bonus performance execution flag 223w is set on (S4002), and if it is set on. If it is determined that there is not (S4002: No), it is determined whether the special 2 pending upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S4003).

In the process of S4003, if the special 2 reservation upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S4003: Yes), a privilege presentation command for display is set (S4004), and a privilege presentation execution flag 223w is set to ON (S4005). ), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special 2 reservation upper limit flag 223p is not set to on (set to off) (S4003: No), or in the process of S4002, the privilege performance execution flag 223w is already set to on. If it is determined that it is (S4002: Yes), the process moves to S4006.

In the process of S4006, it is determined whether the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S4006). Here, if it is determined that the end effect execution flag 223x is not set to on (set to off) (S4006: No), then it is determined whether the special 2 pending flag 223n is set to on. (S4007), and if it is determined that the special 2 hold flag 223n is not set to on (set to off) (S4007; No), it is determined whether the time saving remaining period is 10 seconds (S4008 ).

In the process of S4008, the information indicating the remaining time saving period stored in the remaining time saving period storage area 223h is read out and the determination is executed. In the process of S4008, if it is determined that the time saving remaining period is 10 seconds (S4008: Yes), a display end effect command is set (S4009), and an end effect execution flag 223x is set on (S4010). ), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4006 that the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S4006: Yes), or if the special 2 pending flag 223n is set to ON in the process of S4007 (S4007 :Yes), the process of S4008 to S4010 is skipped and the process ends.

As described above, in the specific effect setting process (S3315) of this embodiment described with reference to FIG. When the special 2 reservation upper limit flag 223p is set to on during (time saving state) (when the number of reservations stored in special map 2 reaches the upper limit), the bonus effect (see FIG. 22) is configured to be executed. There is. By executing this bonus performance, it is possible to provide a high value-added performance to the player, so that the player can be motivated to play the game during the time saving state. In addition, when the bonus performance is executed, the general pattern main symbol Dmc is no longer displayed, so the number of reserved memories for special symbol 2 cannot be increased (the number of reserved memories for special symbol 2 has already reached the upper limit). In this state), it is possible to suppress the performance that encourages the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640, and it is possible to suppress giving a large sense of discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned bonus performance is configured to be executed continuously until the consecutive game flag 223i is set to OFF (until the consecutive game mode ends), so it provides added value to the player. Since it is possible to provide a high-value-added performance for a long period of time (at least until the number of reserved memories for special drawing 2 is used up), the high-value-added performance ends in a short period of time, which reduces the player's desire to play. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as a decrease in

In addition, as a second specific effect, the number of reserved memories of special figure 2 is not acquired (the number of reserved memories of special figure 2 is 0" state), and when the remaining period of the time saving state reaches a predetermined period (10 seconds remaining), there is an ending effect (see FIG. 19(b)) that suggests that the consecutive game mode will end. configured to run. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand the possibility that the consecutive game mode will end, and the advantageous period for the player (consecutive game mode) will end without him noticing. It is possible to prevent such problems from occurring.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the counter update process (S3111) executed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 60) will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the counter update process (S3111). This counter update process (S3111) is a process for updating the value of the variable time counter 223j and calculating the elapsed time (remaining time) of the executed variable display. Information regarding the remaining time of the variable time (remaining time saving period) referred to here (remaining time saving period command for display) is output to the display control device 114, displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and , is referred to when setting the performance content in the audio lamp control device 113.

When the counter update process (S3111) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current value of the variable time counter 223j is "0" (S4101). If it is determined that the value is "0" (S4101: Yes), that is, the value of the variation time counter 223j is not updated (a state in which the special figure 1 variation in the time saving state is not executed), next, It is determined whether the current time is being shortened (in a time saving state) (S4102). Here, the determination is made based on the status information stored in the status storage area 223k.

In the process of S4102, if it is determined that the current time is being shortened (S4102: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the timing to start the fluctuation of special figure 1 (S4103), If it is determined that it is the timing to start the fluctuation (S4103: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is set to "1" (S4104), and the remaining fluctuation time is calculated based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j. A period (remaining time saving period) is calculated, and information indicating the calculated remaining time saving period is stored in the remaining time saving period storage area 223h (S4105).

Thereafter, a display time reduction remaining period command is set (S4106), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S4102, if it is determined that the current time is not in the time saving state (in the time saving state) (S4102: No), or in the process of S4103, if it is determined that the current time is not the start timing of the special figure 1 variation (S4103: No), the process of S4104 to S4106 is skipped and this process ends.

In the process of S4101, if it is determined that the value of the variable time counter 223j is not "0" (S4101: No), that is, the value of the variable time counter 223j has already been updated (special figure 1 in the time saving state). In the state in which variation is being executed), it is determined whether the value of the variation time counter 223j is "150000" (150 seconds have elapsed) (S4107). Here, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is not "150000" ("less than 150000") (S4107: Yes), "1" is added to the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j (S4108). , the process moves to step S4105 described above. On the other hand, in the process of S4107, if it is determined that the value of the variable time counter 223j is "150000" (S4107: Yes), the value of the variable time counter 223j is set to "0" (S4109), and the process of S4105 is performed. Move to processing.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of special figure 1 executed during the time saving state is all specified as "150 seconds" regardless of the lottery result of special figure 1, so As shown, the upper limit of the value of the variation time counter 223j is set to "150000" which corresponds to "150 seconds", but the variation pattern (variation time) of special figure 1 executed during the time saving state can be changed to multiple variation patterns ( If the pachinko machine 10 is configured to select from among the variable time (variable time), the upper limit value of the variable time counter 223j can be reset based on the contents of the variable pattern to be executed (variable time to be set). It may be configured to determine whether the value of the variable time counter 223j being updated has reached a set upper limit value.

<About the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 84. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing that is executed for one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thereby, the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 71, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, this main processing is started according to the following flow. When power is applied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" depending on its hardware configuration, and , specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of processing according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 will not know that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can be used at high speed. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S5001), and the display control device 114 executes various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start.

Here, the boot process (S5001) will be explained with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S5001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of images to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can have a large capacity with a small area, so it can sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs, etc. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, the first program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled. A predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S5101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a (S5102). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a through the process of S5101.

Furthermore, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a in the process of S5102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S5102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs currently stored are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b (S5103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and among the fixed value data, the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S5104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S5002 in FIG. 71) (S5105), the execution of the boot program is finished and the main boot process is ended.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S5001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined location, and from then on, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. It is used to perform various processes.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read control programs and fixed value data from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated performances can be easily executed using the auxiliary performance section.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 72, all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are included in the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a in the process of S5101. The predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S5102. It may be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further transfers the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a. Then, the processes of S5103 to S5105 may be executed using all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S5101 further transfers a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then transfers a portion of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute a process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a. In addition, some of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a through this process are further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then a part of the remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, in step S5101, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. After repeating the steps S5102 and S5102 multiple times, the steps S5103 to S5105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount of the boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a using the boot program.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S5103 to S5105 without performing the processes of S5101 and S5102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to either the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, it is possible to start controlling the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 more quickly, which becomes possible after the boot process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 71. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S5002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I/O device, etc. are performed. Further, processing for clearing the memories in the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. Note that the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected to see whether an image of a color corresponding to the machine type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S5003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, resident video RAM 235), and information on the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image in the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can understand that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. Note that when the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. You may also write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237 to determine that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You can do it like this.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S5003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S5004). This transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235). , and the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination.According to this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S5004, the simple image display flag 233c is then set. is turned on (S5005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 82(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer (see S6502 in FIG. 82(a)).

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is terminated. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73(b)), a simple power-on main image and a power-on variation image (not shown), which are power-on images, are drawn. Command determination processing (see S5308 in FIG. 73(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S5309 in FIG. 73(b)) are executed.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer the data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying the image data on the third symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can display the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. On the other hand, the player etc. can recognize that some initialization process is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Until the desired image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. By using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on variation image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts playing the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize), and the main controller 110 issues an instruction to start the variable performance through audio lamp control. If received via the device 113, that is, if a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. be able to. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Since it is constituted by a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes time to transfer the data, so the time during which the main image continues to be displayed after power is turned on becomes long. However, in this pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind even while the main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on.

After the process in S5005, interrupt permission is set (S5006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing in S5006, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 73(a). FIG. 73(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, upon receiving a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt processing, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S5201), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the commands is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 73(b). FIG. 73(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 36) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing for the image.

As described above, execution of this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231 . Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be explained, and then details of each process will be explained with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 73(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301), and if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S5301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so the normal performance is displayed instead of the power-on image (not shown). In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S5302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S5303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S5302), the content of the command from the audio lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processing is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variable pattern command, a display stop type command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113, and create the effect image according to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 74 to 78.

In the display setting process (S5303), one frame of image to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S5302) etc. Specifically specify the content. Further, depending on the processing situation, etc., the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and a display data table corresponding to the determined performance mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Note that details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S5304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S5303) or the simple display setting process (S5309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (displayed object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S5305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent to the image controller 237 from the character ROM 234 for normal use based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when a continuous preview command or rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the preview effect and the image data of the changed rear image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S5306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, which were determined in the task process (S5304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S5305) are used. , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. 59, and transmits the drawing list together with the drawing target buffer information to the image controller 237. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Note that details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84.

Next, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S5307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. The counter updated by the process of S5307 includes, for example, a stopped symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stopped symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and updated every time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, front/back off reach, front/back off reach, complete off/off) , chance) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S5301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S5308) is executed, and then a simple display setting process (S5309) is executed, and the steps in S5304 are executed. Move to processing.

Next, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S5302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 78. First, FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 74, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S5401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S5401: No), The command determination process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S5303) that a new command has been processed is set to ON (S5402), and then the command The types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S5403).

Then, it is first determined whether there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S5404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S5404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S5405), and the process returns to S5401.

Here, details of the variable pattern command processing (S5405) will be described with reference to FIG. 75(a). FIG. 75(a) is a flowchart showing variable pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the variable pattern command processing, first, the performance state stored in the performance state storage area 233k is read out (S5501). Then, among the variable display data tables corresponding to the variable effect pattern indicated by the display variable pattern command, a variable display data table corresponding to the effect state read out in the process of S5501 is determined, and the determined variable display data table is It is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5502).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of a fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is not performed. When executing the command, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly used for display. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variable pattern command. In the process of S5501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variable effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table will actually be displayed by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying a variation effect according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by setting a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to actually display fluctuations that are longer than the set display data table. Even if a fluctuating performance with time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating performance according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 will issue a command for the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the changes in the 3 symbols.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S5502 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5503). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set in the process of S5502 is turned on, and other variation The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S5504). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set in the process of S5503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can be judged.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S5502, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S5505), and the pointer is 233f is initialized to 0 (S5506). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S5507), the variable pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S5506, the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5502 is updated. , extracts the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, transfers data to the transfer data table buffer 233e through the process of S5503. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h whose time data was set in the process of S5505 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table is finished. If it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As explained above, in the display pattern command processing in this embodiment, the display content (production content) of the third symbol display device 81 is based on the display variation pattern command output (received) from the audio lamp control device 113. ), the display contents (display mode of each symbol, display mode of the number of reservations for each symbol) are determined in accordance with the display performance state command output (received) from the audio lamp control device 113. It consists of Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 15 to 22, a display suitable for each performance state can be executed. In addition, in order for the display control device 114 side to discriminate between the display performance state command and the display variation pattern command and execute the process of determining the display content, the audio lamp control device 113 performs a process corresponding to each performance state. There is no need to set a display variation pattern command, and the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the variable pattern command processing, the display content corresponding to the performance state is determined and the determined display content is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but other than that, As a configuration, based on the display variation pattern command, the above-mentioned display processing is executed for the display contents corresponding to all performance states, and among them, only the display content corresponding to the currently set performance state is displayed to the player. It may be configured so that it is displayed so that it can be visually recognized. Specifically, a display layer is provided corresponding to each presentation state, and a process is executed to make layers other than the layer corresponding to the set presentation state transparent, or a display layer is created for each presentation state. Place the layer corresponding to the layer in front. As a result, even if the performance state changes while the display based on the variable pattern command is being executed and the display contents are changed, it is possible to respond immediately. In addition, the area where the same display content is always displayed regardless of the set effect state (for example, the second display area Dn) is displayed on a separate layer, and the display effect state command is referred to. The display contents may be determined only by the variable pattern command without any modification.

Here, we return to the description of FIG. 74. In the process of S5404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S5404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S5406), If there is a display variation type command (S5406: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S5407), and the process returns to S5401.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S5407) will be described with reference to FIG. 75(b). FIG. 75(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A, jackpot B, front/back off reach, reach other than front/back off, complete miss, or chance) indicated by the display stop type command is created. (S5601), and compares the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed at 81 is finally set (S5602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S5602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned off. (S5603), this stop type command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the data table, type information that specifies the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used as type information. , offset information from the stopped symbols (symbol offset information) set by the process of S5602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S5304), after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of variation, the stop symbol set in the process of S5602 is identified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set in S5603, and the identified stop symbol is The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Incidentally, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, but before drawing is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the normal video is stored from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Note that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, it will not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore executes the command determination process. Although it is unlikely that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly displayed as a display stop type command. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a type command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S5601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is changed assuming that the stop type is completely off. Decide on the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S5602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will display the "special symbol" even if it is actually a "miss of the special symbol". A stop pattern corresponding to a "jackpot of a special symbol" is displayed, causing a player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has won a "jackpot of a special symbol", and there is a risk of lowering the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss, in reality, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 receives a "special symbol jackpot", so the player can be pleased.

Here, we return to the description of FIG. 74. In the process of S5406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S5406: No), then it is determined whether there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S5408), If there is an image change command (S5408: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S5409), and the process returns to S5401.

Here, details of the rear image change command processing (S5409) will be described with reference to FIG. 76(a). FIG. 76(a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command processing, first, a back image change flag is set to on (S5701), which notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S6503) of the change in the back image caused by receiving the back image change command in the on state. . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back faces A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S5702), this back image change command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S5701 is turned on, the changed back image type is identified from the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S5702. . When the identified back image type is back B or back C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of back images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C should be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image determination flag set in S5702 determines whether The type of back image to be displayed at a time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified over time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously for less than 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise etc., and another command may accidentally change the rear image. There is a possibility that it may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S5702, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image determination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted and a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the Pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the Pachinko machine 10.

Here, we return to the description of FIG. 74. In the process of S5408, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S5408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S5410), and if there is an error command, it is determined that there is no error command. If (S5410: Yes), error command processing is executed (S5411), and the process returns to S5401.

Here, details of the error command processing (S5411) will be described with reference to FIG. 76(b). FIG. 76(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to an error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S5801). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S5802). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S5801, the type of error that has occurred is determined based on the error determination flag set in the process of S5802, and a response is taken according to the error type. Processing is executed so that a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S5802, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that players and hall personnel can accurately grasp the error occurrence situation.

Here, we return to the description of FIG. 74. In the process of S5410, if it is determined that there is no error command (S5410: No), then it is determined whether there is a display effect state command among the unprocessed commands (S5412), and the display effect is If there is a status command (S5412: Yes), performance status information based on the received command is stored in the performance status storage area 233k (S5413), and the process returns to S5401.

Here, we return to the description of FIG. 74. In the process of S5412, if it is determined that there is no display performance state command (S5412: No), it is determined whether there is a winning related command (S5440). In the process of S5440, if it is determined that there is a win-related command (S5440: Yes), the win-related command process is executed (S5441), and the process returns to S5401. On the other hand, in the process of S5440, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command (S5440: No), other command processes are executed (S5414), and the process returns to S5401.

In the process of S5401, which is executed again after each command process is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes). ), the processes of S5402 to S5413 and S5419 are executed again. Then, the processes of S5401 to S5413 and S5419 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S5401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this Command determination processing ends.

Note that the simple command determination process (S5308) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary to display the power-on image (not shown) are selected from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display variation pattern command. Only the stop type commands are extracted and the processing corresponding to each command, that is, the variable pattern command processing (see FIG. 75(a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 75(b)), is executed. Regarding the command, the process is performed to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 75(a)) executed in this case, in the process of S5501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is transferred to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S5502, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b and the contents are cleared.

Next, details of the win-related command processing (S5441) will be described with reference to FIG. 77. This win-related command process (S5441) is a process that is executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 146) that there is a win-related command.

In the win-related command processing (S5441), first, it is determined whether there is a jackpot start command for display (S5901). If it is determined in the process of S5901 that there is a winning start command for display (S5901: Yes), the jackpot start command process is executed (S5902), and the process moves to S5903.

Here, details of the jackpot start command processing (S5902) will be described with reference to FIG. 78(a). FIG. 78(a) is a flowchart showing jackpot start command processing (S5902). This jackpot start command process (S5902) is a process that is executed when it is determined that there is a jackpot start command for display in the win-related command process (FIG. 77), and the effect that suggests the start of a jackpot is This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

In the jackpot start command processing (S5902), first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6002). After that, time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the jackpot start display data table (S6003), the pointer 233f is initialized (S6004), the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6005), This process ends.

Returning to FIG. 77, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S5901, if it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command (S5901: No), the process moves to S5903. After completing the processing in S5901 or S5902, it is determined whether there is a display round number command (S5903). In the process of S5903, if it is determined that there is a round number command for display, the round number command process is executed (S5904), and the process moves to S5905.

Here, details of the round number command processing (S5904) will be described with reference to FIG. 78(b). FIG. 78(b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing (S5904). This round number command processing (S5904) is a process that is executed when it is determined that a display round number command has been received in the winning related command processing (FIG. 77), and the round number during the jackpot game is updated. This is a process for displaying an effect on the third symbol display device 81 when the game is played.

In the round number command processing (S5904), first, a round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6102), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S6103). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6104), the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S6105), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 77, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S5903, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S5903: No), the process moves to S5905. After completing the process of S5903 or S5904, it is determined whether or not a display jackpot end command has been received (S5905).

In the process of S5905, if it is determined that there is a display jackpot end command (S5905: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S5906), and the process moves to S5907.

Here, details of the jackpot end command processing will be explained. This jackpot end command process (S5906) is a process that is executed when it is determined that a jackpot end command has been received in the win-related command determination process (FIG. 77), and the effect that suggests the end of the jackpot game is This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

In the jackpot end command processing (S5906), first, a jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the jackpot end display data table. Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 77, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S5905, if it is determined that there is no display jackpot end command, the process of S5906 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5907.

After completing the process of S5905 or S5906, it is determined whether there is a small winning start command for display (S5907). In the process of S5907, if it is determined that there is a display small win start command (S5907: Yes), the small win start command process is executed (S5908), and the process moves to S5909.

Here, details of the small hit start command processing (S5908) will be explained. This small win start command process (S5908) is a process that is executed when it is determined that a small win start command has been received in the win related command determination process (see FIG. 77), and it suggests the start of a small win game. This is a process for displaying the effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the small win start command processing (S5908), first, a small win start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small winning start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereafter, time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small winning start display data table, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF, and this processing is ended.

Returning to FIG. 77, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S5907, if it is determined that there is no small winning start command for display (S5907: No), the process of S5908 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5909.

After completing the process of S5907 or S5908, it is determined whether there is a small winning end command for display (S5909). In the process of S5909, if it is determined that there is a small hit end command (S5909: Yes), the small hit end command process is executed (S5910) and this process ends.

Here, details of the small hit end command processing (S5210) will be explained. This small win end command process (S5210) is a process that is executed when it is determined that a small win end command has been received in the win related command determination process (see FIG. 77), and it suggests the end of the small win game. This is a process for displaying an effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the small win end command processing (S5210), first, a small win end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared, and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small winning end display data table. Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF, and this process ends.

Next, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S5303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be explained with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 79, it is determined whether the new command flag is on (S6201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S6201: No), It is determined that no new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, so the process skips steps S6202 to S6204 and moves to the process S6205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S6201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S6202), S6203 to S6204 The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

In the process of S6203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S6203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S6203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S6204).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to on are Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S6301).

In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (displayed object) that makes up the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, information necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, rotation angle, etc. Determine various parameters.

In the warning image setting process, after the process of S6301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S6302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 79. After the warning image setting process (S6204) or in the process of S6203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S6203: No), then the process moves to S6205.

In S6205, pointer update processing is executed (S6205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6401). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in such a way that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. In addition, as mentioned above, in the various data tables, the Start information is written at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, that value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so each Substantive data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f through the process of S6401, it is then determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. (S6402). As a result, if it is End information (S6402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S6403), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S6403: Yes), the display data table is The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S6404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S6405), and this processing ends. and returns to display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S6403, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demonstration display data table (S6403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S6406), this process ends and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is written is Since the drawing content of is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S6402: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to FIG. 79, the explanation will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6206). In task processing, the types of sprites (displayed objects) that make up the image are specified based on the drawing contents developed in the process of S6206 as well as the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as magnification, rotation angle, etc.

Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S6207), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S6208: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S6208: Yes), it means that the presentation time of the presentation corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and stop display, so check whether the fixed display flag is on or not. (S6209).

As a result, if the final display flag is off (S6209: Yes), the final display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the final display, so first, the final display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. setting (S6210), and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6211). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6212), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6213). Then, after setting the confirmed display flag indicating that the confirmed display performance is in progress in the on state (S6214), the contents of the stopped symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6215), returning to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, in a case where a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of that effect. You can set the drawing contents as follows. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, there is no heavy load on the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Incidentally, the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S6215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable performance. In other words, as mentioned above, the display of the third symbol in a fluctuating performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance, and in the fluctuating display data table, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating performance changes based on the data table. Until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance is written. In task processing (S5304), until a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S6215, and the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is identified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S6209, if the confirmed display flag is not on but off (S6209: No), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S6216). If the demo display flag is off (S6216: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the confirmed display effect, so the demo display data table is changed to the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S6217), and then Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6218). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6220), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration performance is in progress is set to ON (S6221), and this process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if a display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variable production is not received after the confirmed display production is finished, the demonstration production will be automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can set the content of the drawing.

In the process of S6216, if the demo display flag is on (S6216: Yes), it means that the demo effect will be performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and that the demo effect has ended, so the display setting process is immediately terminated. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, the pointer update process executed in the next V-interrupt process makes various settings so that the demonstration effect is started again as described above, so the audio lamp control device 113 The demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S5309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the variation effect using the power-on variation image has ended, for a predetermined period of time, the power-on variation image (Fig. A process is performed in which a display data table that specifies that the image (not shown) is to be stopped and displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S5305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. First, FIG. 82(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is set. The process is executed (S6502), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Note that details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 82(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S6501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S6501: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82(b), the resident image transfer setting process (S6502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 82(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S6502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S6601), and if the transfer instruction has been sent (S6601: Yes). ), and further determines whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S6602). In the process of S6602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S6602 that the transfer process has not finished (S6602: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S6602: Yes), the process moves to S6603. Furthermore, as a result of the process in S6601, if no transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S6601: No), the process proceeds to S6603.

In the process of S6603, it is determined whether all the resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S6603), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S6603: No), the untransferred resident target image data is transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6604), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the image data to be transferred here). The start address of the area (provided in the resident video RAM 235) in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. Then, it is transferred to the designated address in the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

As a result of the process in S6603, if all the resident image data has been transferred (S6603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S6605), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 73(b)), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 74 to 78) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 79 to 81) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) (see S6501: No in FIG. 82(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images that should reside in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred during the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfers the image data to the image controller 237. Image drawing processing can be performed using . As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third symbols, character symbols, and error messages, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by the above method, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it will not be affected by various operations performed by the player at any timing. , it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the normal image transfer setting process (S6503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S6503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6205) of the previously executed display setting process (S5303) is used. The information written in the indicated address is acquired (S6701). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S6702), and if it is transfer data information (S6702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored is determined based on the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S6703), the transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer should be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S6704), and the process proceeds to S6705.

Further, in the process of S6702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S6702: No), the process of S6703 and S6704 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S6705. In the process of S6705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S6705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S6705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S6706).

In the process of S6706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S6706 that the transfer process has not finished (S6706: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is not completed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S6706: Yes), the process moves to S6707. Also, as a result of the process in S6705, if no image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S6705: No), the process proceeds to S6707.

In the process of S6707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6707). If the transfer start flag is on (S6707: Yes), there is image data to start transferring, so the transfer start flag is set. is turned off (S6708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S6703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process moves to the process of S6717. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S6707: No), it is then determined whether the back image change flag is on (S6713). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S6713: No), there is no image data to start transferring, and the normal image transfer setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S6713: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S6714), the back image provided for each back image type is Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S6715). Furthermore, the start address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally (S6716), and proceeds to the process of S6717.

Note that if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S6715, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is for the back surface A, the normal image transfer process is immediately terminated.

In the process of S6717, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6717). The determination in the process of S6717 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is normal video data. If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "off," it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the process in S6717, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6717: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , and then ends the normal image transfer setting process. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be achieved.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S6717, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6717: Yes), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S6718). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). This includes the start address of a subarea (provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers the image data to the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forwarded to the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After the process of S6718, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S6719), and this normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, the storage image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image will be changed. Among the image data used in the video RAM 235, image data that is not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this embodiment, the display data table is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc. At the same time that the display data table is set, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends the image to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. I can do it.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S5306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S5304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification rate, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S5305), a drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated (S6801). That is, in the process of S6801, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S5304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of that sprite is stored are identified. , the specified storage RAM type and address are associated with parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing. Then, after sorting the sprites in the order of the sprite that should be placed at the backmost side of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed at the front side, the details for each sprite are A drawing list is generated by describing, as drawing information (detailed information), the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set in the transfer setting process (S5305), the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored (storage source start address) is added as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As mentioned above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Once the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S6802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and develops the images by overwriting into the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

In addition, if the drawing list includes transfer data information, from the transfer data information, the first address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored are determined. ) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and sequentially reads the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 at a time when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and images are drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is being developed, the image developed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

In the drawing process, after the process in S6802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S6803). Then, the drawing process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". It will be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 73(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image 20 milliseconds after the drawing process and display process for the image for one frame are completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the image for one frame is The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for 20 minutes is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By specifying alternately, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, the state of the starting port provided on the game board is changed from the first state, in which it is difficult for game balls to enter, to the second state, in which it is easy for game balls to enter. There is one that performs the first lottery. In such a conventional gaming machine, a lottery is executed a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters the starting hole in a state that is easily changed to the second state, and the lottery result of the predetermined number of times is displayed. In a gaming machine that is set continuously, the probability that the lottery will be determined to be advantageous to the player after a predetermined number of draws is executed is constant, and the game becomes monotonous and the player quickly becomes bored. There was a problem with it getting stuck.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, during the period when the variation of the special figure 1 is executed during the time saving state, the player is allowed to acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 which is advantageous to the player. Since the period can be set such that the game is possible, the interest in the game can be improved.

Some gaming machines that perform a lottery with multiple symbols notify the player by displaying a symbol display to show the lottery result on the display means (third symbol display device 81). There was a problem in that a plurality of symbols were displayed variably at different timings, making it difficult for the player to understand the game content.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, among the third symbols corresponding to the plurality of symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the symbol that the player is most interested in in the current gaming state, that is, Since the symbols that can most affect the game result are displayed more emphatically than other symbols, it is possible to provide the player with a game that is easy to understand.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, depending on the various gaming states (normal state, time saving state, jackpot state, etc.) that are set, games that are advantageous to the player (left-handed game or right-handed game) are selected. are configured differently. This allows the player to change the content of the game while grasping the current gaming state, thereby further preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

In the first embodiment, since it is possible to provide different gameplay depending on the type of special symbol variation executed when the time saving state is entered, it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored with the game early. I can do it.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 92. The first embodiment described above is configured such that when the special symbol changes once during the time saving state, the time saving state ends, and in the time saving state where the first special symbol is changing, the second special symbol is changed. It was configured to allow the child to acquire retained memories.

Then, when the variation of the first special symbol during the time saving state is completed, if the pending memory of the second special symbol has been acquired, the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol is executed next, and the variation A jackpot game is executed based on the (lottery), and after the jackpot game ends, the time saving state is entered again. On the other hand, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol during the time saving state is finished, the second special symbol is changed. It was configured so that if it could not acquire retained memory, it would simply transition to the normal state.

In the first embodiment configured in this way, the end timing of the time saving state is the end timing of one variation of the first special symbol, so the player can easily predict the timing when the time saving state ends. There is a problem. Furthermore, in order to make it difficult for the player to predict, it is necessary to be able to set a plurality of different fluctuation times for the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the storage capacity of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 must be increased. There was a problem with letting it happen.

Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, if the second special symbol is retained in memory when the variation of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state is completed, the advantageous state for the player continues and the player cannot acquire the second special symbol. If not, the advantageous state for the player ends, which is easy for the player to understand, but on the other hand, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the player quickly becomes bored with it.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a plurality of conditions for ending the time saving state are provided to make it difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the time saving state. Specifically, the condition for ending the time saving state is set if either the first special symbol changes (lottery) twice or the second special symbol changes (lotteries) once. .

By configuring in this way, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the first rotation in the time saving state (time saving 1st rotation) is completed, if the reserved memory of the second special symbol is not secured, the time saving The variation (lottery) of the first special symbol in the second rotation in the state is executed. On the other hand, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the first rotation during the time saving state (first rotation of time saving) is completed, if the second special symbol has been reserved, the second special symbol that has been reserved A pattern variation (lottery) is executed.

Therefore, in the time saving state, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first rotation of time saving is completed, there are cases where the gameplay of acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol is continued, and a case where the retained memory of the second special symbol is acquired. The case where the variation (lottery) used is executed can be provided depending on the storage status of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state can be selected from a plurality (two). Therefore, the time saving state period (the period of variation of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state) can be diversified by combining a plurality of variation patterns, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, since the time saving state period is set by a combination of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, when preparing a plurality of fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol in a gaming machine where the number of time reduction is one as in the first embodiment described above, In comparison, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the time saving state is configured to end when the second special symbol variation (lottery) is performed once. As a result, for example, if the second special symbol changes in the first rotation of the time saving, the small win that is won is not the most advantageous for the player (a small win that is executed when the ball passes through a specific area). In the case of a small win in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is smaller than other small wins), the game is intentionally played so that the ball does not pass through a specific area, and the second special symbol of the second time-saving rotation that is executed next. It is possible to prevent a special game, such as a game aiming at a change in the number of players, from being executed.

Further, if the variation (lottery) result of the first special symbol in the first time-saving rotation is a small winning win, the small winning game is executed after the variation of the first special symbol in the first time-saving rotation is completed. During this small winning game, the time saving state is maintained (because the time saving end condition is not met), so the game feature that allows you to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol during the small winning game period, and the second variable winning device It is possible to set a period in which a plurality of games such as a game in which a ball enters a ball into a ball 650 and a ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 630) to be executed at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with novel gameplay, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In addition, as shown in the first embodiment described above, if the condition for ending the time saving state is the end of the special symbol variation that started changing during the time saving state, then the special symbol variation of the first rotation of the time saving state is Since the small winning game to be executed after the small winning game is no longer in a time saving state, it is not possible to provide a game in which the second special symbol can be retained and stored during the small winning game.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as a variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol during the time saving state, the first variation pattern (variation time) that allows the player to execute a game that allows the player to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol A second variation pattern (a variation pattern that is shorter than the normal pattern variation time in the time saving state) that makes it difficult to execute a game that allows you to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol. It is configured to be selectable. With this configuration, for example, if the second variation pattern is selected twice in a row, the time saving state is not substantially given (a game in which the second special symbol is acquired withholding memory during the time saving state). ), if the first variation pattern is selected twice in a row, there is a high probability that you will be able to acquire the second special symbol's hold memory during the time saving state. Status is given. Further, when the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern are each selected, a time saving state is provided in which the second special symbol can be stored in a reserved state.

That is, based on the variation pattern of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state, the degree of expectation of obtaining the second special symbol during the time saving state can be varied, thereby providing a surprising game to the player. can do. In addition, even if the structure is such that the time saving state is given after all the jackpot games are completed without preparing a jackpot type that shifts to the time saving state after the jackpot game ends and a jackpot type that does not shift to the time saving state, the first Based on the selection result of the special symbol variation pattern, it is possible to set the substantial time-saving state entry rate, so it is possible to suppress the increase in storage capacity due to preparing a plurality of jackpot types.

In addition, by preparing a plurality of variation pattern selection tables for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol during the time saving state, and configuring to refer to different variation pattern selection tables based on the gaming state and gaming situation, It is possible to make the actual rate of entry into the time-saving state more diverse.

The configuration used in the second embodiment (configuration using a plurality of time-saving termination conditions) may be used in a gaming machine having gaming properties other than the second embodiment, for example, winning a small hit with the second special symbol. If some of the small winning types are set among the plurality of small winning types set at the time, a small winning game in which it is impossible (difficult) for the ball to pass through the specific area (V winning switch 630e3) is executed. It may also be used in gaming machines such as

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the number of fluctuations (lotteries) is set to two as the condition for ending the time saving state based on the fluctuations (lotteries) of the first special symbol, but a greater number of times may be set. . Furthermore, the total number of changes (lotteries) of the first special symbol and the number of changes (lotteries) of the second special symbol may be set as the end condition for the time saving state, or other than the number of variations of the special symbol may be set. , the number of variations of the normal symbols, the variation (lottery) results of the special symbols, and various accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10 (electric accessories 640a, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, etc.) The conditions for ending the time-saving state may be set based on the operation status (presence or absence of operation, number of operations).

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in terms of configuration, including a partial configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, a partial configuration of the RAM 203, and a partial configuration of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. This is a process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Other various processes are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, the display screen executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. 85(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen during the time saving state. Here, regarding the display screen shown in FIG. 85(a), different points from the first embodiment described above (different points from the display contents of FIG. 15(a)) will be explained. Note that the same elements as in the first embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 85(a) is an example of a display screen in a state where the second special symbol has not been acquired at the time when the first time saving rotation is completed. As shown in FIG. 85(a), at the end of the first time-saving rotation, the reservation memory of the second special symbol has not been acquired (a display indicating the number of reserved symbols is displayed in the special symbol 2 main reserved symbol display area Dm5). (has not been done), next, a variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is started as a variation of the second time-saving rotation. Here, a variation pattern of 150 seconds is set as the variation pattern for the second time saving rotation, and in response to the display of "Remaining time 0 seconds" displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, "+150 seconds" is displayed as a display mode for adding the remaining time. This display of "150 seconds" is a display to indicate the variation time of the second time saving rotation.

Then, in the first main display area Dm, the characters "Not yet" are displayed as a continuation notification display mode indicating that the game for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is to be continued. By displaying such a display screen, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time saving state (the game state in which the game to acquire the reserved memory of special drawing 2 is executed) will continue. This allows the player to play the game with anticipation until the end.

In addition, the "remaining time" displayed in the sub display area Ds1 is set before the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation of the first rotation of time saving becomes "0", that is, during the special figure 1 variation of the first rotation of time saving. A value indicating part or all of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation that may be the second rotation may be added and displayed. In this case, if the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation of the first rotation of time saving is a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) and the reserved memory of special figure 2 has not been acquired, the addition display can be executed. good. Thereby, even if the remaining time is running low, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

On the other hand, if the reserved memory of special figure 2 has not been acquired at the end of the first time-saving rotation, a game that causes the reserved memory of special figure 2 to be acquired is executed as a variation of special figure 1 in the second time-saving rotation. If the difficult second variation pattern (variation pattern shorter than the normal pattern variation time in the time saving state) is selected, the display of adding the remaining time as shown in FIG. 85(a) is not performed, and the above-mentioned The display screen (time saving state end display) shown in FIG. 20(b) of the first embodiment is displayed. In this case, during the period when the time saving state end display is being executed, the special figure 1 variation of the second time saving rotation is executed.

In other words, when the second fluctuation pattern described above is set, the time saving state has substantially ended, so the time saving 2 When the rotation eye special figure 1 variation is executed, a time saving state end display is displayed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the end timing of the gaming state in which it is possible to acquire the reserved memory of special drawing 2, rather than the end timing of the internal gaming state (time saving state), and Easy-to-understand games can be provided.

In addition, the special figure 1 variation of the second time-saving rotation that is executed during the period when the time-saving state end display is displayed, and the number of pending symbols of special figure 1 that decreases when the second time-saving rotation is executed (the number of pending symbols Since the stored number) is displayed in the second display area Dn of the third symbol display device 81, it can be made difficult for the player to notice.

As explained above, in the second embodiment, the display timing indicating the end of the time saving state is varied based on the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol selected during the time saving state. Even if the game is internally in a time-saving state, if it is not possible to provide an advantageous gaming state to the player, a display indicating the end of the time-saving state is executed. This makes it possible to provide games that are easy for players to understand. In addition, in the second embodiment, when a second variation pattern (a variation pattern shorter than the regular symbol variation time in the time saving state) in which it is difficult to execute a game to acquire the reserved memory of the special symbol 2 is set, the internal This is a case in which an advantageous gaming state cannot be granted to the player even if the player is in a time-saving state, but in addition to this, if the normal pattern fluctuation time is longer than the remaining period of the time-saving state (at the end of the general pattern fluctuation In the case where the time-saving state ends), even if the time-saving state is internally set, it is determined that it is not possible to give the player an advantageous gaming state, and a display indicating the end of the time-saving state is executed. Good too.

Next, the display screen when the special figure 1 fluctuation of the first time saving rotation has won a small hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 85(b) to 86(b). FIG. 85(b) is an example of a display screen in a state where the special figure 1 has won a small hit and there is one reserved memory of the special figure 2 at the time when the first time saving rotation is completed. As shown in FIG. 85(b), in the first display area Dm, the special symbol 1 main symbol Dma is stopped and displayed as "341", which is a stop display mode indicating that the special symbol 1 has won a small hit, and the main reserved symbol is displayed. In the area Dm5, a display mode indicating that there is one reserved memory of the special figure 2 is displayed.

Then, "0 seconds remaining" is displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1, indicating that the special figure 1 variation of the first time-saving rotation has ended, and is further displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. "+60 seconds" is displayed as a display mode for adding the remaining time to the current display of "remaining time 0 seconds". This display of "60 seconds" is a display to indicate the playing time of the small winning game that is executed based on the small winning winning of special figure 1.

In other words, although the details will be described later, in the second embodiment, when the variation (lottery) of special figure 1 is executed twice or the variation (lottery) of special figure 2 is executed once, the time is saved. It is set to end the state, and at the time when the variation (lottery) of special drawing 1 shown in FIG. 85(b) is executed once, the conditions for ending the time saving state are not satisfied. Therefore, the time saving state continues during the small winning game executed by winning the small winning of the special drawing 1. Thereby, even if the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired, during the period in which the small winning game is executed, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 can be further acquired.

In this way, by playing the small winning game, the player can enjoy a game period in which he or she can simultaneously execute a game in which a ball enters the second variable winning device 650 that is opened and a game to acquire the reserved memory of the special drawing 2. ``Charge Combo Activation'' is displayed in the first display area Dm as a special game period notification mode for notification.

Then, when the small winning game is executed, as shown in FIG. 86(a), the general symbol main symbol Dmc is displayed in a variable manner in the first display area Dm, and the game that allows the special symbol 2 to be retained is displayed. executed. Furthermore, if the small winning game executed in the small winning of special drawing 1 is a small winning in which the ball can pass through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3), the ball will pass through the specific area during the small winning game. Then, as shown in FIG. 86(b), "V" is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the jackpot game is started.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed. Since other points are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 87(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the special figure 1 variation pattern table 202d4 defined in the variation pattern table 202d have been partially changed. However, since the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Although the details will be described later, the conditions for ending the time saving state are also different.

The special figure 1 time-saving variation pattern table 202d4a (see FIG. 88) of the second embodiment is the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 with respect to the above-mentioned special figure 1 time-saving variation pattern table 202d4 of the first embodiment. The difference is that different fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) are set based on the .

Specifically, regardless of whether the lottery result of special drawing 1 is a "miss", "small hit", or "big win", if the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 99", , a variation pattern with a variation time of 120 seconds is set, and in the case of "100 to 198", a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is set. With this configuration, the game content during the time saving state can be greatly varied depending on the selected variation pattern.

FIG. 87(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. In the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment, a special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is added compared to the first embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The special 2 variation flag 203r is a flag to indicate that the special figure 2 variation has been executed during the time saving state, and if it is set to on, it indicates that the special figure 2 variation will be executed during the time saving state. It shows. This special 2 variation flag 203r determines that the current variation is special symbol 2 in the time saving variation start process 2 (S303 in FIG. 91) executed in the special symbol variation start process (see S213 in FIG. 39). (S551: Yes in FIG. 91), is set to on (see S522 in FIG. 91), is referenced in the time saving end determination process (see S251 in FIG. 90) (see S2301 in FIG. 90), and is set to ON in the time saving mode counter 203g. After setting the value to "0", it is set to off (see S2303 in FIG. 90).

In this way, when the special figure variation starts, the result of determining whether the variation of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is executed is memorized (the corresponding flag is set on), and the time is saved. By determining whether to end the time saving state (whether or not the time saving state ending condition is satisfied) based on the stored determination result at the timing when it is determined whether to end the state, It is possible to appropriately manage the current gaming state and the type of special symbol variation executed during the time saving state.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the type of the special symbol (special symbol) determined at the timing when the variation (lottery) of the special symbol is started, and the determination result is stored, so that the special symbol Although the configuration is such that it is possible to determine whether or not to end the time saving state at the fluctuation end timing, other configurations may also be used. For example, when a special drawing fluctuation (lottery) is started, the current By determining whether or not the time-saving state ends at the timing when the fluctuation ends and storing the determination result, even if control is performed to end the time-saving state based on the determination result at the special symbol fluctuation end timing. Okay, at the end timing of the special figure variation, determine the type of special figure variation executed this time (type of special figure variation used for variation), and control to end the time saving state based on the determination result. It may also be executed.

<About control processing in the second embodiment>
In the control processing in the second embodiment, the contents of the control processing in the main control device 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 are changed from those in the first embodiment. Other processing is the same as in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92. In the second embodiment, the special symbol variation process in the first embodiment is changed to special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 89), and the time saved in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 89) is reduced. Added the end determination process (see Figure 90), changed the time saving fluctuation start process to time saving fluctuation start process 2 (see Figure 91), and changed the jackpot control process to jackpot control process 2 (see Figure 92). There is a difference.

First, special symbol variation processing 2 (S104) will be explained with reference to FIG. 89. This special symbol variation process 2 (S104 in FIG. 89) is different from the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment described above, in which the lottery result of the special symbol variation is a loss, and the value of the time saving counter 203g is 1 or more. In this case (S224: Yes), the difference is that the time-saving end determination process (see S251 in FIG. 89) is executed, and the other configurations are the same, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 in FIG. 89) explained with reference to FIG. 90 will be explained. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving end determination process (see S251) in the second embodiment. This time-saving end determination process (see S251) is to execute control for determining the end state of the time-saving state in the second embodiment, which has a plurality of end conditions for the time-saving state.

When execution of the time saving end determination process (S251 in FIG. 90) is started, first, it is determined whether the special 2 variation flag 203r is set to ON (S2301 in FIG. 90). In S2301, if the special 2 variation flag 203r is set to ON, that is, if the variation of special symbol 2 is being executed (S2301: Yes), at that point, the time saving end condition of the special symbol is satisfied. Therefore, next, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is set to "0" (S2303), the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is set to OFF (S2302), and the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is set to OFF. This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2301, if the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is not set to ON (S2301: No), then the time saving counter 203g is decremented by 1 (see S2304), and this process ends.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving variation start process 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91) used in the second embodiment. In this time-saving variation start process 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91), in contrast to the time-saving variation start process of the first embodiment described above, it is determined whether the type of special figure variation to be executed this time is special figure 1 or special figure 2. A process for determining the difference has been added, but the other contents are the same. Description of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 91, when the time saving variation start process 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91) is executed, the same processes of S501 and S502 as the time saving variation start process are executed. After completing the process of S502, next, it is determined whether the current variation is special map 2 (S551). If it is determined that the current variation is the special figure 2 (S551: Yes), the special 2 variation flag 203r is set to ON (S552), and the process moves to S503. On the other hand, in the process of S551, if it is determined that the current variation is not the special figure 2 (it is the special figure 1) (S551: No), the process of S552 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S503. Then, the same processes as S503 to S512 as the time saving variation start process are executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in the second embodiment, the value of the time saving counter 203g is decremented by 1 each time a variation of a special figure other than special figure 2 (that is, a variation of special figure 1) is executed, thereby reducing the time saving. When the time saving state is ended when the value of the medium counter 203g becomes 0, and by executing the variation of special drawing 2, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is forcibly set to 0 and the time saving state is terminated. There are two conditions for ending the time-saving state.

As a result, it is possible to execute the variation (lottery) of special drawing 1 multiple times during the time saving state, and the number of times that the variation (lottery) of special drawing 2 is executed during the time saving state is limited to a single number (one time). It can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92, jackpot control processing 2 (S1704 in FIG. 92) in the second embodiment will be explained. This jackpot control process 2 (S1704 in FIG. 92) differs from the jackpot control process described above only in that the number of time reductions given after the jackpot ends for some jackpots is changed from 1 to 2. However, the other contents are the same.

The same content will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S704 in FIG. 92). As shown in FIG. 92, when this process is executed, the same processes of S1801 to S1814 as the jackpot control start process described above are executed. Then, in the process of S1814, if it is determined that the jackpot type is not "B or D" (S1814: No), the value of the time saving counter 203g is set to "2", and this process ends.

As explained above, in the second embodiment, a plurality of time-saving state ending conditions are prepared to end the time-saving state, and furthermore, a plurality of variation patterns (variation time). Thereby, the games during the time-saving state can be more diversified, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the games early. Specifically, when the ratio of selecting jackpot types that give a time-saving state after the jackpot ends is fixed, a short variation pattern is continuously selected as a variation pattern (variation time) selected during the time-saving state. In this case, even though the time saving state has been given, the time saving state becomes such that it is substantially difficult to acquire the reserved memory of the special drawing 2. In this way, the substantial time-saving state entry rate can be varied depending on the selection result of the variation pattern (variation time) of the selected special figure 1 variation.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the time saving state is set as the number of time saving times to 2, and the time saving state is maintained until the variation of special figure 1 is executed twice or the variation of special figure 2 is executed once. However, regardless of the configuration of the set time saving number and the time saving state ending condition, it is sufficient that the same technical idea can be implemented as in the second embodiment described above. , the number of time saving times may be set to three or more times.

Also, as a time-saving end condition, even if you set the number of variations of special symbol 1 (for example, 5 times) that is greater than the number of reserved memory of special symbol 1 (upper limit of 4) or the number of variations of special symbol 2 is 1. good. As a result, even if the reserved memory of special figure 2 cannot be obtained while special figure 1 changes, special figure 2 can be reliably changed during the time-saving state, so when the time-saving state enters, the player can win a jackpot. can provide games.

Furthermore, as a time-saving end condition, the number of fluctuations of special map 1 is set to 2 times, or the number of fluctuations of special map 2 is set to 4 times (or the total number of fluctuations of special map 1 and special map 2 is 4 times), In addition, it is possible to set a jackpot type that is given a time saving and a jackpot type that is not given a time saver as a jackpot type that is executed when a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) is passed in the small winning type of special drawing 2. Another example may be used. By configuring this way, when one reserved memory of special figure 2 is acquired during the special figure 1 variation executed in the first time-saving rotation, it will be executed based on the special figure 2 variation of the second time-saving rotation. The special area (V winning switch 650e3) is passed during a small winning game to execute a jackpot game, or the specific area (V It is possible for the player to select whether to execute the time-saving third rotation (the second rotation of the special drawing 1) without passing the winning switch 650e3).

In other words, in the special figure 1 fluctuation (first preparation period) executed in the first rotation of time saving, if a game to acquire the reserved memory of special figure 2 is executed and one reserved memory of special figure 2 is acquired, The variation of the special figure 2, which is the priority variation, is started in the second time-saving rotation. When a small hit is won by the variation of the special figure 2, the small winning game is executed after the variation of the second time-saving rotation is completed. By passing the game ball through a specific area during this small winning game, a jackpot game (V winning jackpot) based on the small winning game is started. In this special example, as the type of the V winning jackpot of special figure 2, the type in which a time-saving state is given after the jackpot game and the type in which a time-saving state is not given can be set. If the jackpot based on the variation in FIG. 2 is a jackpot that does not give a time-saving state, the consecutive game mode ends with this jackpot game. Here, the player can execute the jackpot game in the second time-saving rotation while acquiring only one reserved memory of special figure 2, or do not execute the jackpot game in the second time-saving rotation (small During the winning game, without passing the game ball to the specific area (V winning switch 650e3), execute the special figure 1 variation (second preparation period) that is executed for the third time to save time, and create a new special figure 2. It is possible to select whether or not to play a game to acquire pending memory.

As a result, based on the number of reserved memories of special figure 2 acquired during the first preparation period, you can either discard one reserved memory of special figure 2 and aim to acquire more reserved memories of special figure 2, or acquire Since the player can select whether or not to reliably execute the jackpot game based on the reserved memory of the special drawing 2, the player can arbitrarily select the game content suitable for the player.

Furthermore, in this separate example, as the types of jackpots executed based on the reserved memory of special figure 2, there are types that give a time saving state after the end of the jackpot game and types that do not give a time saving state, so special figure 2 When a jackpot game (V winning jackpot) based on a small winning game is executed with only one pending memory, there is a possibility that the time saving state ends after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, depending on which of the above-mentioned game contents the player selects, subsequent game results can vary greatly, and the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased.

It should be noted that notification indicating the type of jackpot game based on the small win game executed in the second time saving rotation described above may be performed by the notification means (for example, an effect display by the third symbol display device 81). Thereby, the player can select the game content with reference to the notification content by the notification means. In this case, as the notification content by the notification means, it is preferable to notify the game content that is advantageous to the player in a notification mode that allows the player to understand. For example, if a jackpot executed based on a small winning game executed in the second time-saving spin is a jackpot in which a time-saving state is given after the jackpot game ends, it is recommended to set a notification mode to indicate this. . Thereby, the player can safely let the ball pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) in the time-saving second spin small winning game.

In addition, in this separate example, the time-saving end condition is set such that the number of fluctuations of special chart 1 is 2 times, or the number of fluctuations of special chart 2 is 4 times (or the total number of fluctuations of special chart 1 and special chart 2 is 4 times). (times), the game that selects the above-mentioned game content can only be executed if special figure 2 is held during the variation of special figure 1 that is executed in the first rotation of the time-saving number. The player can be made to play the game enthusiastically in order to acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 as soon as the state is given.

In addition, since the time-saving end condition is set so that the number of fluctuations of special drawing 1 is smaller than the number of fluctuations of special drawing 2, for example, the number of fluctuations of special drawing 2 executed during the time-saving state is Therefore, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 can be reduced. As a result, even if multiple (for example, 2) reserved memories of special figure 2 are stored during one variation of special figure 1, the second variation of special figure 1 can be executed during the time saving state. This increases the chances of selecting the above-mentioned game content. In addition, in this example, the time-saving end condition is that the number of fluctuations of special drawing 1 is 2 times, or the number of fluctuations of special drawing 2 is 4 times (or the total number of fluctuations of special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 is 4). However, the time-saving termination condition based on the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 may be set so that the number of fluctuations is greater than the time-saving termination condition based on the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1.

<Third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 100. In the first embodiment described above, 3 seconds is set as the variation time of the normal symbol variation (common symbol variation) executed during the time saving state, and the number of drawings of the normal symbol carried out during the time saving state is It was designed to stabilize. Further, in the second embodiment described above, in order to vary the period during the time saving state, a plurality of conditions are provided for ending the time saving state, and further, in the first embodiment described above, a plurality of conditions are provided for ending the time saving state, and further, It was configured so that multiple variable times for special figure 1 could be set.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbols executed during the time saving state can be set from among a plurality of variations, and the normal symbols that can be executed during the time saving state are set according to the content of the game. It is configured so that the number of drawings for the symbols is different.

Thereby, the player can be made to perform many lottery drawings of normal symbols during the time saving state, and to play the game with enthusiasm in order to obtain the special symbol 2 reservation. In addition, since the number of drawings of normal symbols executed during the time saving state can be varied, it is possible to set a time saving state that is advantageous to the player and a time saving state that is disadvantageous to the player, which can improve the interest of the game. can.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in terms of configuration, such as a partial configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, a partial configuration of the RAM 203, and a partial configuration of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. This is a process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Other various processes are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, the content of the game in the third embodiment will be explained. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured so that the time-saving state awarded based on the special drawing 1 lottery and the time saving state awarded based on the special drawing 2 lottery are different. Furthermore, the configuration is such that different time saving states are given based on the gaming state when the time saving state is given. By providing different time-saving states in this way, it is possible to provide a plurality of time-saving state game features, and it is possible to allow players to play a variety of games.

Specifically, by setting different time-saving states, the variation time of the normal symbols executed during the time-saving state is made different, thereby making the game performance during the time-saving state different. In other words, as explained in the first embodiment, the present pachinko machine 10 allows the normal symbol to be won during the special symbol 1 fluctuation in the time saving state, releases the electric accessory 640a, and causes the second ball to enter. Since the game is played in which the special symbol 2 hold is obtained by inserting a ball into the mouth 640, by varying the fluctuation time of the regular symbols, the number of draws of the regular symbols executed during the time saving ( (number of fluctuations) can be made different.

Further, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is configured to differ based on the number of lottery times (number of fluctuations) of the normal symbols executed during the time saving state. Specifically, when the number of normal symbol drawings (number of fluctuations) executed during the time saving state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 40 times), a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is set. ing. With this configuration, by executing a large number of normal symbol fluctuations during the time-saving state, it is possible to further increase the number of normal symbol drawings (number of fluctuations), thereby motivating the player to enter the time-saving state. A middle game can be executed. In addition, by shifting to a state in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is set, it is possible to increase the number of balls entering the second ball entry port 640 per unit time, so that the player It is possible to provide advantageous games to players.

In this way, by providing a plurality of time-saving states with different fluctuation times of the normal symbols, it is possible to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player and a time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player, thereby increasing the interest of the game. .

First, with reference to FIG. 93, the display screen executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 93(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen during the time saving state. Here, regarding the display screen shown in FIG. 93(a), different points from the first embodiment described above (different points from the display contents of FIG. 15(a)) will be explained. Note that the same elements as in the first embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 93(a), "39/40" is displayed at the lower right of the first display area Dm. This is a display mode written in the regular figure fluctuation display area for displaying the number of regular figure fluctuations during the time saving state (during the special figure 1 fluctuation in the time saving state), and a value of "39" is executed. This is a normal pattern variation number display mode for indicating the number of times, and a normal pattern target variation frequency display mode in which the value of "40" indicates a threshold value at which the variation time of the normal symbol becomes short. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a guide display is displayed to guide the period until the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes short.

When the game progresses from the state shown in FIG. 93(a) and the number of changes in the normal pattern during the time saving state reaches 40, the game state changes to a state where the normal pattern variation time becomes shorter, as shown in FIG. 93(b). The words "super charge time has entered" are displayed to indicate that the time has shifted, and a guidance display is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to inform the player that the normal pattern fluctuation time has become shorter.

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed. Since other points are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 94(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. In the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment, a time-saving state selection table 202f is added to the ROM 202 in the first embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The time-saving state selection table 202f is a table that is referred to when selecting a time-saving state based on the jackpot symbols (special symbols 1 and 2) and the gaming state stored in the gaming state storage area 203s. It is referred to in jackpot control processing 3 (see FIG. 99) which will be described later (see S1871 in FIG. 99).

Here, in the third embodiment, a time saving A and a time saving B, which is more advantageous to the player than the time saving A, are selectable as the gaming states to be set. Specifically, the jackpot symbol is special symbol 1 (first special symbol), and the gaming state stored in the gaming state storage area 203s is normal (that is, won the jackpot), or the specific area (V winning prize). When the ball passes through the switch 650e3), time saving A is selected as the time saving state, and in other cases, time saving B is selected as the time saving state as shown in FIG.

In other words, when the gaming state is normal, a jackpot occurs based on the lottery of special drawing 1, and only when a time-saving state is given after the end of the jackpot game, time-saving A is given as a time-saving state, and in other cases, a time-saving state is given. Time saving B is given as follows.

If time saving A is set as the time saving state, 3 seconds is set as the normal symbol fluctuation time (see S2409 in Figure 98), and if time saving B is set, the time saving time is set as the normal symbol fluctuation time. A shorter fluctuation time (2.5 seconds or 1.5 seconds) than when A is set is set (see S2405 and S2406 in FIG. 98). As a result, when entering the consecutive game mode for the first time, the game will be played during the time saving state where the variation time of the normal symbols is normal (4 seconds), and if the time saving state is entered again during the consecutive winning mode, the normal symbol fluctuation time will be played during the time saving state. The fluctuation time can be made shorter than usual. Therefore, once the continuous game mode, which is advantageous to the player, continues, it is possible to make it difficult to shift from the continuous game mode to the normal gaming state.

FIG. 94(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. In the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment, a game state storage area 203s, a time saving state storage area 203t, and a normal pattern number counter 203u are added to the first embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The gaming state storage area 203s is an area for storing the gaming state when the start of a jackpot is set, and is referred to when selecting the type of time saving state to be given after the end of the jackpot. This gaming state storage area 203s stores the gaming state after the jackpot start is set in the special symbol variation processing 3 (see FIG. 96) (see S271 in FIG. 96), and the gaming state is stored in the jackpot control processing 3 (see FIG. 99). ), it is determined that it is the timing to end the jackpot (S1811 in FIG. 99: Yes), and if the jackpot type is not B or D (S1814 in FIG. 99; No), it is referred to when setting the time saving state (S1871 ).

The time saving state storage area 203t is an area for storing the type of the selected time saving state (time saving A, time saving B), and is referred to when setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol during the time saving state. This time-saving state storage area 203t stores the selected time-saving state (see S1871 in FIG. 99) when the time-saving state is selected in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 99), and stores the variable time setting (see FIG. 98). ), the stored information is referred to when setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (see S2401 in FIG. 98).

The normal symbol number counter 203u is a counter for measuring the number of variations of the normal symbol during the time saving state, and is a counter for measuring the number of variations of the normal symbol during the time saving state. 1 is added (see S2403 in FIG. 98). In this embodiment, when the value measured by the normal symbol number counter 203u reaches a predetermined value (40), the setting process for the variation time of the normal symbols is configured to be different.

<About control processing in the third embodiment>
The control processing in the third embodiment is the same as that in the first embodiment, except that the contents of the control processing in the main control device 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 are changed from the first embodiment. , and its detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 99. In the third embodiment, compared to the first embodiment, the special symbol variation process is changed to special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 96), and the normal symbol variation process is changed to normal symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 97). The difference is that the jackpot control process has been changed to jackpot control process 3 (FIG. 99). Since the other elements are the same, the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the special symbol variation process 3 (see S104 in FIG. 96), as in the first embodiment described above, the processes in S201 to S219 are executed, and when the process in S219 is finished, the current gaming state is stored in the gaming state storage area 203s. It is stored (S271). Then, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the processes of S220 to S225 are executed, and the present process ends.

That is, in the third embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, the gaming state at the time when the start of the jackpot is set can be temporarily stored. Thereby, the gaming state that is set after the end of the jackpot game can be set based on the gaming state at the start of the jackpot (when the jackpot is won).

In addition, in this embodiment, the game state at the time when the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed and the start of the jackpot is set is stored in the game state storage area 203s. It may be configured to store the gaming state at the timing (for example, the timing when the special symbol variation start process (see S213 in FIG. 96) in the special symbol variation process 3 is executed).

Next, in the normal symbol variation process 3 (see S106 in FIG. 97), the processes of S901 to S912 are executed as in the first embodiment described above, and then the variation time setting process is executed (S951). Here, the variable time setting process (S951) will be explained with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable time setting process (S951).

When the variable time setting process (S951) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current time-saving state is time-saving A (time-saving state A) (S2401), and if it is determined that it is time-saving A (time-saving state A). (S2401: Yes), the normal symbol fluctuation time (ordinary symbol fluctuation time) is set to 3 seconds (S2409), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2401, if it is determined that the current time-saving state is not time-saving A (time-saving state A) (S2401: No), next, check whether the value of the regular drawing count counter 203u is larger than "1" or not. (S2402).

In the process of S2402, if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern number counter 203u is not larger than "1" (S2402: No), the value of the normal pattern number counter 203u is set to "1" (S2403), and in S2404 Shift to processing. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern number counter 203u is larger than "1" (S2402: Yes), the process moves to S2404.

In the process of S2404, it is determined whether the value of the normal figure number counter 203u is "40" or more (S2404). In the process of S2404, if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern number counter 203u is not greater than "40" (less than 40), the normal pattern fluctuation time (normal pattern fluctuation time) is set to 2.5 seconds. (S2405). In this case, the fluctuation time is set shorter than the regular pattern fluctuation time set in the process of S2409.

On the other hand, in the process of S2404, if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern number counter 203u is "40" or more, the normal pattern fluctuation time (normal pattern fluctuation time) is set to 1.5 seconds (S2406). In this case, a fluctuation time shorter than the normal pattern fluctuation time set in the process of S2405 is set. When the processing of S2405 or S2406 is finished, "1" is added to the value of the number of ordinary drawings counter 203u (S2407), the number of ordinary drawings command is set (S2408), and this processing is ended.

The common figure count command set in the process of S2408 is a command output to the audio lamp control device 113, and is output processed in the same way as the various commands set in the main control device 110 described above. .

As described above, in the third embodiment, different general pattern fluctuation times are set based on the type of time saving state to be set and the number of general pattern fluctuations performed during the time saving state. By configuring in this way, the number of regular pattern fluctuations executed during the time saving state can be made different based on the type of the time saving state and the number of regular pattern fluctuations performed during the time saving state. It is possible to improve the interest in a game in which the player wins the regular symbol and acquires the reserved memory of the special symbol 2.

In addition, when "Time saving B" which is more advantageous than "Time saving A" (shorter fluctuation time is set as the ordinary pattern fluctuation time) is set as the time saving state, the number of ordinary pattern fluctuations is a predetermined number or more (40 or more times). ), the configuration is such that an even shorter normal pattern fluctuation time is set, allowing the player to continue playing the game during the time saving state.

Although the third embodiment has a configuration in which a specific regular pattern fluctuation time is set based on each time saving state and the number of regular pattern time reductions, other configurations may also be used. A regular figure fluctuation time selection table is provided that is referred to in order to set the regular figure fluctuation time in correspondence with the number of figure fluctuations, and based on a predetermined acquired value (for example, a counter acquired value) from the regular figure fluctuation time selection table. It is also possible to select the ordinary figure fluctuation time. In this case, the regular pattern fluctuation time selection table corresponding to each time saving state and the number of regular pattern fluctuations should be provided with a table in which a long regular pattern fluctuation time is likely to be selected and a table in which a short general pattern fluctuation time is likely to be selected. Then, as in the third embodiment, it is possible to change the common symbol fluctuation time that is likely to be selected based on each time saving state (time saving A, time saving B) and the number of regular symbol fluctuations, and to store the special symbol 2 on hold. It is possible to improve the interest in the game in which the player acquires the following.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, two types of time-saving states, “time-saving A” and “time-saving B” are provided, but more types may be provided. Further, although one opportunity for changing the general pattern fluctuation time selected based on the general pattern fluctuation number of times is provided (the number of general pattern fluctuations is 40 times), two or more may be provided.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when a predetermined condition is met, a shorter normal pattern fluctuation time is selected (facilitated). If the number of fluctuations exceeds 50 or the number of reserved memories of special drawing 2 reaches the upper limit), the selected general pattern fluctuation time will be longer than usual (for example, 10 seconds). ) may be selected. Thereby, it is possible to prevent excessive bonuses from being given to the player due to excessive fluctuations in common figures.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, jackpot control processing 3 (S1704) of the third embodiment will be explained. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot control processing 3 (S1704). This jackpot control process 3 (S1704) is different from the jackpot control process of the first embodiment described above in that a process is added when it is determined that it is the timing to end the jackpot, and other than that, the process is the same. is executed. Descriptions of the same processes will be omitted.

When the jackpot control process 3 (S1704) is executed, similar to the jackpot control process of the first embodiment, the processes of S1801 to S1814 are executed, and in the process of S1814, the jackpot type is "jackpot B" or "jackpot D". ” (in other words, it is a jackpot in which a time-saving state is given after the jackpot ends) (S1814: No), a time-saving state is set based on the time-saving state selection table 202f, and the set time-saving state is It is stored in the time saving state storage area 203t (S1871). Then, the value of the time saving counter 203g is set to "1" (S1815), and this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the command determination process is changed to command determination process 3 (see FIG. 100). Since the other elements are the same, the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 (S3112). When this command determination process 3 (S3112) is executed, the processes of S3201 to S3214 are executed similarly to the command determination process of the first embodiment. Then, if it is determined in the process of S3213 that the notification command has not been received (S3213: No), it is then determined whether the general map count command has been received (S3251). When the general figure number command is received (S3251: Yes), a general figure number command for display is set (S3252). The display normal pattern number command set here is output to the display control device 114 like other display commands, and is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to change the normal pattern to be executed during the time saving state. The number of times is displayed (see Figure 93).

<Modification 1 of the game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, a first modification of the game board 13 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In the first embodiment described above, as explained with reference to FIG. 750 and a non-electric accessory 710. This reliably prevents a ball from entering the right first ball entry port 64b unless the non-electric accessory 710 is in the open state. On the other hand, in the present modification example 1, a configuration is used that restricts the entry of balls into the right first ball entry opening 64b without using the storage device 750 and the non-electric accessory 710. Specifically, a constantly movable valve 1500 is provided above the first right ball entrance port 64b to restrict entry of the ball into the first right ball entrance port 64b.

In addition, in the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above, the through gate 67 and the second ball entry port 640 are provided in the first flow path 701, and furthermore, the through gate 67 and the second ball entry port 640 are provided, and the ball passes through the through gate 67. A second ball entrance is provided below the through gate 67 so that the ball passes through the ball in a shorter period (0.2 seconds) than the fluctuation time (3 or 4 seconds) of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol) executed based on the 640 prevents the ball passing through the through gate 67 from directly entering the second ball entry port 640. In contrast, in this modification, a through gate 67 is provided in the first flow path 701 and a second ball entry port 640 is provided in the second flow path 702. Thereby, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can be physically prevented from entering the second ball entry port 640.

The difference between the configuration of the game board 13 in Modified Example 1 and the configuration of the game board 13 in the first embodiment described above is that the storage device 750, the non-electric accessory 710, and the specific general ball entrance 630 are eliminated. , the location of the right first ball entry port 64b has been changed, and the location of the second ball entry port 640 has been changed from the first channel 701 to the second channel 702. The other configurations are the same. Identical components will be given the same reference numerals and their descriptions will be omitted.

FIG. 101 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the first modification. As shown in FIG. 101, in the game board 13 of the present modification 1, a constantly movable member 1500 is provided along the ball rolling surface at the most upstream part of the first flow path 701. When the ball is moved to the open position (in the open state), the ball is configured to be able to enter the right first ball entry port 64b.

Here, the operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will be explained in detail. This constantly movable valve 1500 is configured to be variable between an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on power being turned on to the pachinko machine 10. There is. Specifically, in the movable member drive process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 53), the operation is controlled based on the movable scenario stored in the ROM 203. has been done. In this movable scenario, the operation of constantly opening the movable member 1500 for 0.1 seconds and then closing it for 1.2 seconds is repeatedly executed.

That is, in the game board 13 of the present modification 1, the balls fired in the right-handed game flow into the first flow path 701 at 1.2 second intervals, and the rolling ball in which the constantly movable member 1500 is disposed It flows downstream while rolling on the surface. When the timing at which this ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls onto the always movable member) matches the timing at which the always movable valve 1500 becomes open, The ball passes through the constantly movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the right first ball entry port 64b.

The timing of rolling on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falling onto the constantly movable member) is at 1.2 second intervals, and the timing at which the constantly movable valve 1500 becomes open is 0 within 1.3 seconds. Since it is .1 second, the timing at which both of them match is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when a right-handed game is played continuously, about four balls will enter the right first ball entrance 64b in one minute.

In other words, in a gaming state where a right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a time-saving game, the ball will periodically enter the right first ball entrance 64b, so that the jackpot game will not be possible. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state in which the special drawing 1 is not held when the time saving state is entered after the end of the play. In addition, since the period during which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened at one time is set as a period (0.1 seconds) during which it is difficult for the player to aim, the first ball entered on the left in the normal gaming state. A right-handed game can be more disadvantageous to the player than a left-handed game in which the player aims at the opening 64a.

To explain specifically, when playing a left-handed game in the normal gaming state, about 15 out of 250 balls fired will enter the first left ball entrance 64a. It is designed so that if a ball enters the ball, five prize balls will be paid out. Further, it is designed so that about 5 balls enter the general ball entrance 63, and when a ball enters, 5 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in a left-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, it is possible to enter approximately 20 balls into the left first ball entrance 64a, taking into account that the prize balls that are paid out will be fired again. becomes.

On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state and a right-handed game is performed, the ball is designed so that about 9 of the 250 balls fired will enter the first right ball entrance 64b. If the ball hits the ball, two prize balls will be paid out. Further, the general ball entrance 63 is not provided in the right side area. Therefore, in a right-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, approximately 10 balls must enter the right first ball entrance 64b, even considering that the prize balls that are paid out will be fired again. I can only do it. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is possible to prevent the player from playing right-handed games.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the general ball entry port 63 is not provided in the game area (right side area) through which the ball fired in the right-handed game passes, when the game state is normal, the ball fired in the right-handed game is more likely to be hit right than in the left-handed game. The general ball entry hole 63 may be provided based on a design concept that does not give the player an advantage over the game. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls paid out as prize balls in a right-handed game during a time saving state or a jackpot state.

Next, among the configurations arranged in the right side area of the game board 13 in this modification 1, the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 are different from the configuration of the game board 13 in the first embodiment described above. I will mainly explain the points.

In the present modification example 1, a through gate 67 is provided downstream of the first flow path 701 having the bent path 701a, and a second inlet is provided downstream of the second flow path 702 (lower end of the fifth flow path 704b). A ball mouth 640 is provided. With this configuration, the balls flowing into the second flow path 702 at 1.2 second intervals can be caused to flow down toward the second ball entry port 640 without reducing the speed of the balls flowing down. Therefore, since the interval between the balls flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, the balls are connected in the second flow path 702 and a plurality of balls enter the second ball entry port 640 at the same time. It is possible to prevent this from happening. In addition, if you do not notice that the electric accessory 640a has been opened and the third symbol display device 81 notifies you that the electric accessory 640a is opened (see FIG. 23(b)), The ball can enter the second ball entry port 640.

In addition, the through gate 67, which triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery, and the electric accessory 640a, whose operation is controlled by winning the normal symbol, are divided into different channels (first channel 701, Since the distribution member 700 is disposed in the second flow path 702), if the distribution member 700 is destroyed so that the balls flow down only to one of the flow paths (if the distribution function is disabled), the second ball entry port It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the ball at 640. In other words, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessories 640a are arranged in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is destroyed and a state is created in which the balls flow down only in one flow path. This makes it possible to create a situation in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second ball entry port 640, but by using the configuration of this modification, it is possible to create a situation in which it is easy to enter the ball into the second ball entry port 640. It is possible to suppress the creation of a situation where it is easy to cause this.

<Modification 2 of the game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, a second modification of the game board 13 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In the first embodiment described above, as explained with reference to FIG. 750 and a non-electric accessory 710. This reliably prevents a ball from entering the right first ball entry port 64b unless the non-electric accessory 710 is in the open state. On the other hand, in the present modification example 2, a constantly movable plate 1700 is provided between the storage device 750 and the specific general ball entry port 630, and when the storage device 750 is released, the ball that has passed through the storage device 750 is There are two cases in which the ball enters the specified general ball entrance 630 and a case in which the ball does not enter.

Specifically, the constantly movable plate 1700 is changed every second between a guiding position (protruding position) where the ball can be guided to the specific general ball entrance 630 and an open position (retreating position) where it is impossible (difficult) to guide the ball. A variable control means is provided, and the flow of the balls passing through the storage device 750 can be controlled by variable control by the variable control means.

The operation of this constantly movable plate 1700 is controlled by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Specifically, a movable plate solenoid (not shown) that variably operates the movable plate 1700 is placed in an on state (a state in which the movable plate 1700 is constantly protruded) and an off state (a state in which the movable plate 1700 is constantly retracted). It has a variable control means for making the change, and the variable control means controls a predetermined variable scenario based on a predetermined counter value that is updated every time the main processing of the main control device 110 is executed. Variable control is executed according to the following.

The movable plate solenoid used in this modification is configured such that the movable plate 1700 is always located at the retracted position while energized. As explained in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, this is a condition for ending the game period that is advantageous to the player (the time-saving state period in which it is easy to acquire the reserved memory of special drawing 2). This is because the condition is set that the variation (lottery) of the special symbol (special symbol 1) is executed once. In other words, unless this end condition is met, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (common symbol) will be shorter than the normal state (common symbol fluctuation time is 3 seconds), and if the normal symbol (common symbol) is won, the execution will be executed. This is because the opening operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a that is advantageous to the player (long opening) is continuously executed. As mentioned above, each special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) starts to fluctuate in the state where there is no reserved memory for special symbol 1 until the retained memory for special symbol 2 is acquired. (time-saving standby state), and only the fluctuation of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol) is executed. In this case, the time-saving state will continue until the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 after winning the normal symbol. In order to prevent such a situation from being intentionally created, the movable plate 1700 is configured so that it is always located in the protruding position when the power to the movable valve solenoid is cut off. Thereby, even if an act of intentionally stopping the supply of power to the movable valve solenoid is performed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of major damage.

In the configuration of this modified example explained above, depending on the timing at which the storage device 750 is released (that is, the timing at which the jackpot game is started) and the variable state of the constantly movable plate 1700, the ball is transferred to the first right ball entrance 64b. The entry of balls can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect at what timing the jackpot game will start.

To this modification described above, a configuration may be added that allows different timing to be set as the timing for bringing the storage device 750 into the released state. Specifically, a jackpot type that causes the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750 to be released and a jackpot type that does not release are set in advance according to the jackpot type selected when the special symbol (special symbol) wins the jackpot, Furthermore, as the jackpot type for releasing the storage valve 750a, a first timing (for example, the timing of starting the first round) and a second timing (for example, the timing of starting the third round) are set in advance. Configure.

With this configuration, the timing at which the storage device 750 is released and the ball passes through the storage device 750 can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the timing at which the jackpot game is started and the variable state of the constantly movable board 1700 is an advantageous timing for the player, and even after the jackpot game has started, the player It is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation. Further, it is possible to suppress the act of starting a jackpot game at a timing advantageous to the player.

Note that the above-described configuration in which whether or not to release the storage device 750 and a plurality of release timings are set depending on the jackpot type may be used in each of the embodiments described above. This makes it possible to provide more complex gameplay and improve the interest of the game.

<Variation 3 of the game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a third modification of the game board 13 in the first embodiment described above will be described. This third modification is different from the game board 13 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 2) in that the arrangement positions of the storage device 750 and the specific general ball entrance 630 are different from those of the first embodiment. The configuration is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 103, in the present modification 3, the storage device 750 and the specific general ball entrance 630 are arranged on the right side of the lower center of the game board 13. With this configuration, it is easier to store balls in the storage device 750 in a right-handed game than in a left-handed game. Specifically, of the balls fired in the right-handed game, the ball that has flowed down on the first variable prize winning device 65 is configured to be most likely to be stored in the storage device 750.

When the balls are stored in the storage device 750, the configuration is such that the next and subsequent balls flow down above the stored balls. Specifically, the upper surface position of the balls stored in the storage device 750 is set below the extension line in the downward direction of the balls flowing down on the first variable winning device 65 (the first variable winning device 65 A storage device 750 is disposed so as to have a downward step with respect to the upper surface of the unit provided. Therefore, the balls stored in the storage device 750 do not affect the subsequent flow of balls. In this modified example 3 configured in this way, when a right-handed game that is advantageous to the player is started, it is possible to more reliably ensure that the special drawing 1 is held.

You may apply each modification of the game board 13 explained above to each embodiment mentioned above, respectively. This makes it possible to provide more complex games to players, thereby increasing their interest.

<Modified example of electric accessory 640a>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107, a modification of the electric accessory 640a used in each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In each of the embodiments described above, the game board is provided with the second ball entry port 640 so as to prevent two or more balls from entering the second ball entry port 640 while the electric accessory 640a is in the opening operation. It is configured to restrict the ball flow in the right area of No. 13. In other words, measures have been taken to restrict the flow of balls to the electric accessory 640a so that a plurality of balls do not continuously flow in at the same time. On the other hand, the electric accessory A200 described in this modification is configured such that two or more balls cannot enter the second ball entry opening 640.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104, the shutter part A222 has a cross section perpendicular to the rotating shaft parts 223, 223 that is curved in a substantially dogleg shape, and the rotating door A220 opens the side starting prize opening A40A. It consists of a door main wall A222A that is located on the front side and stands up substantially vertically when in the closed state, and a winning auxiliary wall A222B that extends rearward from the upper end of the door main wall A222 in this state. The main door wall A222A has a V-shaped cross section to prevent game balls from getting caught. Further, the door main wall A222A is located away from the pivot shafts 223, 223, and rotates forward from a substantially horizontal state as the pivot door A220 pivots from the open state to the closed state. It will stand up almost vertically. The winning auxiliary wall A222B is inclined downward toward the back side of the side start winning opening A40A when the rotating door A220 is open.

Further, the width of the shutter part A222 is slightly narrower than the width of the side start winning hole A40A, while the width of the pair of side walls is wider than the width of the side start winning hole A40A. When the rotating door A220 is completely closed, the front surface of the side wall comes into contact with the side edge of the side starting winning opening A40A, and the rotating door A220 further moves toward the side that closes the side starting winning opening A40A. Prevents rotation.

Door rotation protrusions A224 and A224 are respectively provided on the opposite side of the shutter part across the rotation shaft between the pair of side walls. Furthermore, positioning contact portions A225, A225 are formed on the side wall, and are located behind the door rotation protrusion A224 and protrude downward when the rotation door A220 is in the fully opened open end position. ing.

A detection sensor is housed in the switch housing section 215B of the resin housing. The detection sensor has a flat rectangular parallelepiped shape, and a game ball passage hole is formed vertically through the rear end thereof. Corresponding to the game ball passage hole, through holes are formed on both upper and lower sides of the switch housing part 215B, and the game ball that has entered the tongue piece housing part 215A passes through the game ball passage hole 281 and is housed in the switch. 215B. Note that a duct (not shown) is provided below the switch accommodating portion 215B for taking in game balls and guiding them to the ball circulation system of the game hall.

A movable tongue piece A230 is accommodated in the tongue piece accommodating portion 215A of the resin housing. The movable tongue piece A230 has a flat structure that is shorter in the width direction than in the front-rear direction and thinner in the vertical direction, and is supported so as to slide back and forth while slidingly contacting the inner surface of the tongue piece accommodating portion 215A.

When viewed from above, the movable tongue A230 has a symmetrical shape, and its front end is provided with a protruding and retracting protrusion whose width is stepped and narrower than the whole. The protruding and retracting piece part is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball, and has a width that allows it to be inserted into the lower wide part of the side starting prize opening A40A.

A pair of outer downwardly inclined surfaces 240S, 240S which are inclined downwardly toward both sides are formed on both sides of the upper surface of the protruding and retracting piece part in the width direction. In addition, between the pair of outer downward slopes 240S and 240S of the protruding and retracting protrusion part, there is a retraction slope that slopes very gently downward toward the center and gently slopes downward toward the rear. 240H is formed. Furthermore, a guide slope 240Y that descends relatively steeply toward the rear from the rear end of the retraction slope 240H is formed on the upper surface of the projecting piece.

When viewed from above, the movable tongue piece A230 has a trapezoidal protrusion 231D that protrudes rearward from the widthwise center of the rear end of the substantially rectangular base. There is. A ball passage elongated hole is vertically formed in the center of the base portion in the width direction from the front end position to the rear end position. The ball passage slot has a width that allows just one game ball to pass through and is slightly smaller than the width of the projecting piece. In addition, the front end of the ball passage elongated hole is semicircular and a part reaches the base end of the protruding and retracting piece, and the rear end of the ball passage elongated hole is parallel to the base of the trapezoidal protrusion 231D. It has reached a position near the rear end of the base.

In the movable tongue piece A230, a pair of doors extending vertically along both side edges of the ball passage elongated hole are provided in a range from the proximal end of the protruding/retracting protrusion part to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the base part. A driving projecting wall is formed to protrude. The entire rear portion of the base portion from the door driving projecting wall is a power receiving portion A230P that is thick in the vertical direction so as to have an upper surface that is flush with the upper surface of the rear end of the door driving projecting wall.

A pair of connecting recesses are formed on opposing inner surfaces of the power receiving portion A230P that are opposite to each other across the ball passage elongated hole. Each connection recess includes an approximately triangular interference avoidance recess with a narrowed lower end, and an engagement groove that extends in the vertical direction and is recessed in the inner surface of the interference avoidance recess on the side away from the ball passage elongated hole. Become. A front sliding surface 236A disposed on the front side of the engagement groove extends straight in the vertical direction. The rear sliding contact surface 236B disposed on the rear side of the engagement groove portion has a lower portion projecting forward from an intermediate position in the vertical direction, and serves as a stopper portion for a seesaw according to the present invention. The stopper contact surface 237S at the upper end of the seesaw stopper portion is slightly inclined downward toward the front sliding contact surface 236A.

Each door driving protrusion wall has an intermediate recessed part at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction, the front side of the intermediate recessed part becomes the front pressing protrusion A241 according to the present invention, and the rear side of the intermediate recessed part becomes the rear pressing part A241 according to the present invention. It is a protrusion A242. The rear pressing protrusion A242 has the same height as the power receiving part A230P, and the front pressing protrusion A241 is lower than the power receiving part A230P. Further, the bottom surface of the intermediate recessed portion is a horizontal and flat intermediate recessed flat surface 233N. The rear surface of the front pressing protrusion A241 is a closing pressing part A241K according to the present invention, rising vertically from the intermediate depressed flat surface 233N. Moreover, the upper surface of the front pressing protrusion A241 is a door stopper part A241J according to the present invention, and is horizontally flat. On the other hand, the front surface of the rear pressing protrusion A242 is an open pressing part A242Z according to the present invention, which also rises perpendicularly from the intermediate depressed flat surface 233N. The front surface of the front pressing protrusion A241 is parallel to the closing pressing portion A241K, which is the rear surface, and slopes gently toward the front from the middle, extending to the rear end of the outer downwardly inclined surfaces 240S and 240S described above. .

The lower end of the seesaw member A250 is engaged with the connecting recess in the movable tongue piece A230, and the door rotation protrusions A224, A224 of the rotating door A220 are respectively engaged with the door drive protrusion on the movable tongue piece A230. are doing. As a result, the movable tongue piece A230 is driven by receiving power from the solenoid via the seesaw member A250, and the rotating door A220 is driven by receiving power from the movable tongue piece A230.

First, the transmission of power from seesaw member A250 to movable tongue piece A230 will be explained. Each connection arm of the seesaw member A250 is received in each interference avoidance recess of each connection recess of the movable tongue piece A230, and the lower end connection convex portions A255, A255 of each connection arm are received in each engagement groove of each connection recess. engaged.

Here, when the solenoid is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward as shown in FIG. 104, and at this time, the lower end connecting projections A255, A255 are located at the lower end of the engagement groove. At this time, the movable tongue piece A230 is arranged at the rear end position of the linearly movable range, and the protruding and retracting piece part is retreated to the back side of the side starting prize opening A40A. In this case, that is, in a state where the protruding and retracting piece is retracted to the back side of the side starting prize opening A40A, the tip of the retracting and protruding piece is retracted to a position where it is completely covered inside the side starting winning opening A40A. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from colliding with the side starting prize opening A40A during the sheltered state.

When the solenoid is energized from this state and the plunger is attracted backward, the seesaw member A250 rotates around the rotation shafts A253, A253, and the connecting arm rotates forward, thereby The lower end connecting convex portions A255, A255 press the front sliding surfaces 236A, 236A forward while slidingly contacting the front sliding surfaces 236A, 236A. As a result, the movable tongue piece A230 is pushed out to the front of the gaming machine, and as shown in FIG. 104, the protruding and retracting piece portion protrudes from the side starting prize opening A40A to the front side of the gaming board. Then, for example, the end surface of the base part of the movable tongue piece A230 comes into contact with the opening edge of the side starting prize opening A40A from the rear side, and the movable tongue piece A230 is positioned at the "front end operating position" according to the present invention and stopped. Then, the protruding and retracting piece portion 240 is in a state of protruding to the maximum extent from the side starting prize opening A40A (see FIG. 106).

When the excitation of the solenoid is stopped with the movable tongue piece A230 in the front end operating position (the state shown in FIG. 106), the plunger projects forward by the compression coil spring A276. Then, the lower end of the seesaw member A250 rotates toward the rear of the game machine around the rotational shafts A253, A253, and the lower end of the seesaw member A250 moves from the position in front of the rotational shafts A253, A253 to the rear position. Moving. At this time, the lower end connecting convex portions A255, A255 slide into contact with the rear sliding surfaces 236B, 236B of the engagement groove and push rearward. As a result, the movable tongue piece is retracted to the rear of the gaming machine, and the protruding and retracting piece part retreats to the back side of the side starting prize opening A40A (see FIG. 107).

Specifically, when the excitation of the solenoid is stopped and the lower end of the connecting arm of the seesaw member A250 rotates rearward, the upper edge portion E1 (the first The rear end edge of one plane M1) contacts the stopper contact surface 237S of the seesaw stopper part. As the seesaw member A250 rotates, the lower end connecting convex portion A255 comes into sliding contact with the rear sliding surface 236B, and the lower end connecting convex portion A255 is positioned at the rear of the rotation shaft portions A253, A253 of the seesaw member A250. When the lower edge E2 (lower edge of the second plane M2) of the stopper recess comes into contact with the lower part of the rear sliding contact surface 236B than the seesaw stopper, the rear sliding surface of the engagement groove Push the contact surfaces 236B, 236B backward. Thereby, the movable tongue piece can be returned to the initial position (rear end retracted position) by the elastic force of the compression coil spring A276.

By the way, if a fraudulent act is carried out in which the movable tongue piece A230, which is retracted to the back of the side starting prize opening A40A, is pulled out to the front of the game board using a wire inserted through a gap in the game machine, for example, the following will occur. become that way. That is, the power is not transmitted from the solenoid to the seesaw member A250, but the power of the seesaw member A250 is transmitted from the movable tongue piece A230, and the connecting arm of the seesaw member A250 is pushed forward by the rear sliding surface 236B in the engagement groove portion 236. When the first plane M1 in each stopper recess of the lower end connecting convex portions A255, A255 comes into surface contact with the stopper contact surface 237S of the seesaw stopper portion. When the movable tongue piece A230 is further pulled forward from this state, the pulling force becomes an upward force F1 orthogonal to the stopper contact surface 237S of the stepped portion, and the center of the first plane M1 and the rotation axis It faces in a direction substantially parallel to the direction connecting the center of A253, that is, a direction substantially perpendicular to the rotating direction of the stopper recess. As a result, the rotation of the seesaw member A250 is restricted, and it becomes impossible to pull the movable tongue piece A230 toward you and make the protruding and retracting piece part protrude in front of the side starting prize opening A40A. Further, even if the seesaw member A250 is slightly lifted obliquely upward by the upward force F1, the triangular protrusion formed on the connecting wall 252 of the seesaw member A250 engages with the flange portion 274F of the plunger. Thereby, rotation of seesaw member A250 is more reliably prohibited.

Next, the transmission of power from the movable tongue piece A230 to the rotating door A220 will be explained. The door rotation protrusions A224, A224 of the rotating door A220 are respectively engaged with the door driving protrusion wall of the movable tongue piece, so that the rotating door A220 receives power from the movable tongue piece A230 and rotates. do. Specifically, when the movable tongue piece A230 is arranged at the rear end retracted position and the entire protruding and retracting piece part is retracted to the back side of the side starting prize opening A40A, the door rotation protrusion A224 is pressed against the front side. It is arranged above the door stopper part A241J in the protrusion 241 (state in FIG. 104). At this time, the rotating shaft portion of the rotating door A220 is located diagonally forward of the door rotating protrusion A224. At this time, a first space AS1 according to the present invention is formed between the lower end of the door rotating protrusion A224 and the opening pressing part A242Z of the rear pressing protrusion A242.

When the movable tongue piece A230 moves forward from the rear end retracted position, the front pressing protrusion A241 moves forward and engages the lower end of the door rotation protrusion A224, as shown in the changes from FIGS. 104 to 107. The door stopper part A241J of the front pressing protrusion A241 no longer faces the door stopper part A241J in the vertical direction, and the lower end of the door rotation protrusion A224 faces the intermediate depressed flat surface 233N in the vertical direction and the intermediate depressed flat surface 233N. A rotation space for the door rotation protrusion A224 is secured between the two.

Then, when the movable tongue piece A230 moves further forward, the lower end of the door rotating protrusion A224 moves in the first space AS1, and during this time, the movable tongue piece A230 moves forward, but the rotating door is maintained in a stopped state. As shown in FIG. 105, when the retractable protrusion part of the movable tongue piece A230 protrudes by a predetermined amount from the side starting prize opening A40A, the lower end part of the door rotation protrusion A224 is pressed against the rear pressing protrusion A242. It comes into contact with the front surface A242Z. Then, as the movable tongue piece moves forward further, the door main wall A222A of the rotating door A220 is lifted, the side starting prize opening A40A is opened (see FIGS. 105 and 106), and the movable tongue piece A230 moves to the front end. When the operating position is reached, the rotating door A220 is fully opened, and a game ball can be won in the side starting prize opening A40A. More specifically, when the rotating door A220 is pushed by the rear pressing protrusion A242 and rotated by a certain angle, the rotating door A220 rotates toward the open end position due to its own weight. In other words, the rotating door A220 starts rotating when the retractable projecting piece protrudes about half from the side starting prize opening A40A, and after the retractable projecting piece protrudes about half way, it continues until it completely protrudes. During a relatively short period of time, the side start prize opening A40A changes from a fully closed state to a fully open state. In this way, in this embodiment, the front opening prize is achieved by a two-step operation in which the movable tongue piece A230 starts moving forward, the rotating door A220 is stopped halfway, and the rotating door A220 starts opening halfway. Mouth A40A is opened. Then, when the game ball falls onto the upper surface of the retractable projecting piece 240 protruding from the side starting prize opening A40A, the game ball is guided by the retracting projecting piece 240 and enters the side starting winning opening A40A, winning a prize. The game ball is detected by a detection switch.

In addition, when the rotating door A220 is completely opened, as shown in FIG. positioned in position. This restricts rattling of the rotating door A220. Further, in this state, a second space AS2 according to the present invention is formed between the lower end of the door rotating protrusion A224 and the opening pressing part A242Z of the rear pressing protrusion A242.

Further, when the movable tongue piece A230 retreats from the front end operating position, the front pressing protrusion A241 moves rearward, as shown in the transition from FIG. 106 to FIG. 107. At this time, the lower end of the door rotation protrusion A224 moves relatively toward the front pressing protrusion A241 within the second space AS2. As a result, a part of the protruding/retracting protrusion part 240 of the movable tongue piece A230 moves into the front open prize opening A40A (from the state where the door rotation protrusion A224 abuts the opening press part A242Z to the state where it abuts the closing press part A241K). The rotating door A220 is maintained in an open state while moving in the second space AS2 until the door A220 touches the second space AS2. Then, the movable tongue piece A230 opens the front by a predetermined amount (the distance that the door rotating protrusion A224 moves in the second space AS2 from the state in which it contacts the opening pressing part A242Z until it contacts the closing pressing part A241K). When moving into the opening A40A, the closing pressing part A241K of the front pressing projection A241 comes into contact with the lower end of the door rotating projection A224. At this time, approximately half of the protruding and retracting protrusion portion 240 of the movable tongue piece A230 is accommodated in the side starting prize opening A40A. Then, when the movable tongue piece A230 further retreats, the rotating door A220 operates to close as the movable tongue piece A230 retreats, and when the protruding and retracting piece part has completely retreated, the rotating door A220 closes. The side starting prize opening A40A is completely closed and stopped, and the movable tongue piece A230 further retreats on the back side of the side starting winning opening A40A, and the lower end of the door rotation protrusion A224 is vertically connected to the door stopper part A241J. Return to the initial state where they face each other in direction. In this way, in this embodiment, the front opening prize is achieved by a two-step operation in which the movable tongue piece A230 starts to retreat, the rotating door 220 is stopped halfway, and the rotating door A220 starts closing halfway. Mouth A40A is closed.

By the way, when the side starting prize opening A40A is closed (the state shown in FIG. 104), if you try to pry open the rotating door A220 with a wire or the like, the door rotating protrusion A224 will rotate to the opening side. , vertically abuts against the door stopper portion A241J of the front pressing protrusion A241. This prevents unauthorized opening of the rotating door A220. Here, the direction of the force of the door rotation protrusion A224 pushing the door stopper part A241J of the front side pressing protrusion A241 is in the vertical direction, which is orthogonal to the movable direction (back and forth direction) of the movable tongue piece A230. Therefore, when an unauthorized external force is applied to the rotating door A220, the door stopper portion A241J of the movable tongue piece A230 is not moved in the movable direction, thereby reliably preventing unauthorized opening of the rotating door A220. I can do it.

<Other production examples 1 using the configuration of each embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, other examples of effects performed using the configurations of the above-described embodiments will be described. In the second embodiment described above, as a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 15(a), each symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2, It was configured to display the number of pending figures for each symbol. On the other hand, in the production example described with reference to FIG. 108, a production is performed in which the symbol display of special figure 1 and the number of reservations are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this sub-display area Ds, it is displayed in a variable display mode that changes a specific display mode (for example, numbers) in response to the fact that the symbol of the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variation is being executed). , the reserved number of special drawings 1 is displayed in a variable display mode in a suggestive display mode that suggests the display mode to be displayed next. Here, the contents of this production example will be explained with reference to FIG. 108(a).

The display screen of FIG. 108(a) is a display screen showing an example of the case where the special figure 1 is not held while the special figure 1 is changing during the time saving state (first time saving). As shown in FIG. 108(a), in the special figure 1 variable display area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds, "remaining time seconds" is displayed as an auxiliary display mode to give meaning to the variable status of the variable display mode. A display of "10" is displayed in the variable display area Ds4 as a variable display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is changing. By changing the display mode ("10" in FIG. 108(a)) displayed in this variable display area Ds4, it is configured to notify that the special figure 1 is changing during the variable display. There is.

In addition, the display mode (for example, "10") displayed in the variable display area Ds4 while the special figure 1 is fluctuating is such that the player may mistakenly think that the variation of the special figure 1 has stopped due to the display mode. In order to prevent this, the display is temporarily stopped for a period (for example, 0.5 seconds) in which the player can recognize the display mode in a slightly swaying state, and then the display mode is changed to the next display mode. The display mode (for example, "∞" (see FIG. 108(b))) displayed in the variable display area Ds4 when the variation of the special figure 1 has stopped is determined by the player's ability to change the display mode of the special figure 1 in that display mode. In order to recognize that the fluctuation has stopped, it is configured to stop for a longer period (for example, 1 second) than the above-mentioned temporary stop display (for example, 0.5 seconds).

With this configuration, the player can easily understand the content of the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4. Note that other configurations may be used as long as the player can easily grasp the content of the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4. For example, the period during which special figure 1 is variably displayed , change the color of the background image of the special figure 1 variable display area Ds3, change the display content of the auxiliary display mode, and change the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 depending on the period when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. You may also change the color of the text or the thickness of the text. This allows the player to easily understand the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4.

Furthermore, according to the configuration used in this production example, it is possible to notify that the special figure 1 is changing and the remaining period of variation of the special figure 1, depending on the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4. ing. Thereby, in one display area (variable display area Ds4), it is possible to display a plurality of pieces of information regarding fluctuations in the special figure 1.

In addition, in this production example, in order to notify the player that the special figure 1 is changing, a production display that counts down the time is executed in the special figure 1 fluctuation display area Ds3, but other than that, For example, a story development type effect display may be used, such as an effect in which a question is asked and the user answers the question, or an effect in which a mission is accomplished. Even when configured in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure 1 is changing by changing the content displayed in the special figure 1 fluctuation display area Ds3.

In the sub display area Ds, in the special figure 1 reservation display area Ds5, a reservation number suggestion mode for indicating the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is displayed based on the reservation number of the special figure 1 (Fig. 108 ( a)). This reservation number suggestion mode is displayed in a display mode that suggests the display mode to be displayed in the variable display area Ds4 from the next time onwards. That is, the display mode displayed corresponding to each pending number suggestion mode is changed together every time the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 is changed.

According to the display screen shown in FIG. 108(a), four reservation number suggestion modes are displayed in the special drawing 1 reservation display area Ds5, each of which is "V", "9", or "∞". The display mode is displayed. The display mode displayed as this reserved number suggestion mode suggests the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 as described above, and the "V" display mode indicates that the lottery result of special drawing 1 is a hit. The "9" display mode suggests the remaining fluctuation period of the special figure 1, and the "∞" display mode suggests that there is no pending memory of the special figure 1.

According to the gaming state shown in FIG. 108(a), since there is no pending memory for special drawing 1, the display is set so that the number of "∞" displayed increases as the pending number suggestion mode. In this way, the display mode of each reservation number suggestion displayed in the special figure 1 reservation display area Ds5 is the lottery result of the special figure 1 that is changing, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 that is changing, and the special figure 1 that is changing. Since the display content is set based on the number of reserved balls of 1, the player can play the game while predicting the future progress of the game based on the display format displayed in the special figure 1 reserved display area Ds5. It can be carried out.

According to the display screen shown in FIG. 108(a), four reservation number suggestion modes are displayed, but regardless of the reservation number of special drawing 1, four reservation number suggestion modes are always displayed. It is configured so that In other words, the special drawing 1 reservation display area Ds5 is configured to notify (suggest) the number of reservations of special drawing 1 to the player based on the display content of each reservation number suggestion mode, rather than the number displayed in the reservation number suggestion mode. There is. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the current number of reservations.

In addition, in this production example, the display number of the pending number suggestion mode displayed in the special figure 1 pending display area Ds5 is configured to always display 4 (regardless of the pending number of special figure 1), Other configurations may be used, and for example, the number of reserved special symbols 1, the remaining fluctuation time of special symbols 1, and the lottery results of special symbols 1 are displayed in the special symbol 1 pending display area Ds5. The number of pending number suggestion modes displayed may be different. In this case, for example, when the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 1 becomes shorter (for example, when the remaining time becomes 10 seconds), the number of pending number suggestion modes displayed in the special figure 1 pending display area Ds5 will decrease. It is recommended to configure Thereby, the number of choices predicted by the player can be reduced, and the prediction accuracy of the player can be increased.

Furthermore, as in the second embodiment described above, in a gaming machine configured such that a game advantageous to the player is executed when there is no reserved number of special drawings 1 at the time the time saving state ends, By indicating (displaying) the presence or absence of the reserved number of special drawings 1 as in this performance example, it is possible to make the player play the game in the time saving state while making the player look forward to the end.

Then, when the effect display shown in FIG. 108(a) has elapsed and the fluctuation of the special figure 1 has stopped, the display screen shown in FIG. 108(b) is displayed. The display screen in FIG. 108(b) is a display screen showing an example of a case where neither special figure 1 nor special figure 2 is held in a state where the variation of special figure 1 executed during the time saving state has stopped. be. As shown in FIG. 108(b), when the first time saving cycle ends with no special symbols 1 and 2 on hold, the special symbols do not start changing (the special symbol variation in the second time saving cycle ends). (without starting), it will be on standby for a short time. During this time-saving standby, by continuing to execute the right-handed game, a game is executed in which the normal symbols are continuously varied (lottery) and a ball is entered into the second ball entry opening 640.

In the configuration of the game board 13 described above with reference to FIG. 2, even if a right-handed game is executed during the time saving state, the ball will not enter the right first ball entrance 64b, so as shown in FIG. 108(b). The state shown in is a game state in which the time saving state is maintained continuously until the ball enters the second ball entry port 640. On the display screen, the general pattern main symbol Dmc corresponding to the normal pattern is displayed in a variable manner in the first display area Dm, and the special pattern 1 pending display area Ds5 displays the current number of pending special patterns 1. The characters "entering super release mode" are displayed to indicate that the is on standby for time saving, and the special figure 1 variable display area Ds3 is displayed as a display indicating that the special figure 1 is not changing. The characters "Remaining time ∞ seconds" with the "∞" display mode stopped are displayed.

According to the above-described performance example, the player can change the display mode in which the fluctuation status of special drawing 1 (lottery result, remaining fluctuation time) and the number of pending special drawings 1 during the time saving state are displayed on the display screen. Since the presentation is displayed in such a way as to predict the subsequent progress of the game, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the example of production mentioned above, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 both shift to a time-saving standby state that can occur in a state without reservation (the "∞" display mode is stopped and displayed in the variable display area Ds4). An effect display is also executed to suggest the effect, but the decision as to whether or not to execute this effect display is made based on the number of reserved memories (presence or absence of reservation) of special figures 1 and 2. For example, if the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 is 1 or more, it is preferable not to execute the above-mentioned effect display.

In the first embodiment described above, when the gaming state at the timing when the normal symbol variation (lottery) is executed and the gaming state at the timing when the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set are both time saving states, Although the electric accessory 640a is configured to set an operation pattern advantageous to the player (long opening) as the operation pattern, other configurations may be used. For example, a normal pattern variation (lottery) is executed. The timing at which it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (the timing at which the determination condition is satisfied) may be used instead of the timing at which the determination is made by the determination means.

In addition, the timing at which the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set (the timing at which the operation mode is set by the operation mode setting means) is not the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed (the timing at which the operation means executes the operation). ) may be used.

Furthermore, when the movement pattern of the electric accessory 640a is to operate the electric accessory 640a multiple times, the content of each operation may be determined at each timing when each operation of the electric accessory 640a is performed. . Specifically, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a has an operation pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened three times, and when an operation pattern (long opening) advantageous to the player is set, each release is When the period is set to 2 seconds and an operation pattern disadvantageous to the player (short release) is set, when each release period is set to 0.2 seconds, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is a long release. is set and the time saving state ends between the second and third openings, the opening period may be set to 0.2 seconds only for the third opening. With this configuration, while the electric accessory 640a operates to the end to be advantageous to the player during the time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, after the gaming state transitions to the normal state, the player This makes it easier to prevent the provision of excessively advantageous conditions.

In this case, only the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be set in advance, and the opening period may be set at the timing when the electric accessory 640a is opened according to the operation pattern. The timing at which the movement of the electric accessory 640a starts and the content of the movement may be individually controlled for each movement without setting the movement pattern of the object 640a.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second ball entry port 640 while the electric accessory 640a is open, no balls enter the second ball entry port 640. The entry of one ball is a condition for ending the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, and furthermore, in order to prevent multiple balls from entering the second ball entry port 640 at the same time, it is possible to enter the second ball entry port 640. A distributing means is provided for alternately distributing balls into a flow path (first flow path) in which a ball cannot enter the second ball entry port 640 (second flow path), was constructed so that the distance between the balls flowing down is wide. Other configurations may be added to more reliably prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second ball entry port 640 at the same time.

For example, if a gear-type sprocket mechanism is provided upstream of the second ball entry port 640 in the channel (first channel) through which the ball can enter the second ball entry port 640, Even if a plurality of balls successively flow down the path, the sprocket mechanism may guide the balls one by one to the downstream side, thereby widening the interval between the balls flowing down. Thereby, it is possible to physically prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second ball entry port 640 at the same time. In this way, if a ball sending member is provided on the upstream side of the second ball entry port 640 to send the balls downstream so that the intervals between balls flowing down are constant, it is not necessary to use the above-mentioned distribution member. . Further, the ball feeding member may have a configuration other than the above-mentioned sprocket mechanism. For example, a magnetic body that can be moved with a certain motion is provided, and the ball is sent in the downstream direction at a predetermined timing depending on the movement position of the magnetic body (flowing down). ) configuration may be used.

Further, in this embodiment, a configuration is used in which the distribution member (distribution device 700) distributes the balls fired in a right-handed game into two channels, but a configuration in which the balls are distributed into three or more channels is used. may also be used. In this case, a configuration may be used in which one distribution member distributes the balls to three or more channels, or a combination of multiple distribution members may be used to distribute the balls to three or more channels. It may be configured to be distributed. Thereby, it is possible to further widen the interval at which the balls flow down the channel through which the balls can enter the second ball entry port 640.

Furthermore, although this embodiment uses a distribution member (distribution device 700) that can evenly distribute balls to a plurality of channels, it is not necessary to equalize the distribution ratio of balls to each channel. Instead, for example, a distribution member may be provided such that the number of balls flowing down the first flow path 701 and the number of balls flowing down the second flow path 702 is 1:2, or the distribution destination of the balls may be A configuration may be provided in which the selection is made at random. Thereby, it is possible to make the player interested in the manner in which the ball falls.

In the second embodiment described above, a configuration is used in which a plurality of conditions for ending the time saving state are provided and the time saving state is ended when any of the conditions is satisfied, but other configurations may also be used. The time saving state may end when all set end conditions for the time saving state are satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to use a configuration in which among the plurality of time-saving state end conditions, the conditions that have already been satisfied are outputted to the outside so that the player can understand them.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment described above, one of the conditions for ending the time saving state is that the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed multiple times (twice) as the number of times the time saving state is continued. However, such a configuration may be used to perform the following gameplay.

In the third embodiment described above, when the time saving state B is set, the variation time of the normal symbols is varied when a predetermined condition is met, and the time saving state B is set. When the number of fluctuations of the normal symbols in the middle exceeds 40, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is shortened to provide an advantageous state to the player, but the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is different. Therefore, it may be configured to provide a disadvantageous state to the player, for example, a plurality of normal symbol fluctuation times may be provided based on the type of winning symbol or the gaming state at the time of winning. In the configuration in which one selection table is selected from among the selection tables and the normal pattern variation time to be executed is selected from the selected normal pattern variation time selection table, the variation time of the first special symbol during the time saving state is A configuration may also be used in which a longer ordinary figure variation time (ordinary figure length variation time) can be selected.

In this case, if the normal symbol length variable time is selected, no more normal symbol lottery can be executed during the time saving state, so the gaming state advantageous to the player ends in effect. With this configuration, the player can grasp how long the actual time saving state (the state where the gaming state is the time saving state and the normal symbol length variation time is not selected as the normal symbol variation) will continue. It is possible to provide gameplay that is difficult to achieve.

In addition, when selecting the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol), a configuration may be used in which the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is selected in advance based on the number of fluctuations of the ordinary symbol. When setting the fluctuation time of a symbol (common symbol), a configuration may be used in which the fluctuation time corresponding to the obtained counter value is selected from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on a predetermined counter value. In addition, when starting the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol (common symbol), a prescribed lottery is executed, and if the lottery result is the prescribed lottery result, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol (common symbol) is set as the fluctuation time of the regular symbol (common symbol). A longer (for example, 150 seconds) regular symbol variation time (common symbol length variation time) may be selected than the variation time of the first special symbol in .

In this way, when a predetermined condition is met, by lengthening the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, it is possible to end the substantial time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, thereby providing a benefit to the player. It is possible to make the player concentrate on playing the game while always maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a regular pattern fluctuation time (common pattern length fluctuation time) that is longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the time saving state is selected, the third symbol display device 81 executes When the flat pattern length variable time is selected as the performance to be performed, it is preferable to turn off the notification of the right-handed game and guide the left-handed game even if the time is shortened. In this case, since the special figure 1 variation in the time-saving state is actually still being executed, the third symbol display device 81 will display the time-saving state until the time-saving state special figure 1 variation ends. It is preferable to perform an effect to notify that the (consecutive game mode) has ended. This allows the player to think that the special symbol 1 variation during the time saving state has ended and that the time saving state has ended.

In addition to the above-mentioned normal symbol length variation time (150 seconds), the normal symbol fluctuation time may be shorter than the normal symbol length variation time (3 seconds), but longer than the normal symbol variation time (3 seconds), for example. 30 seconds or 50 seconds) may be configured. In this case, when the variable time in the medium pattern is set, an effect display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 that makes it seem that the time saving state has ended, similar to the case where the variable length in the pattern pattern described above is set. While making the player think that the time saving state has ended, it is displayed at the timing when the fluctuating time in a regular game ends, or just before the fluctuating time in a regular game ends (for example, in response to the normal fluctuating time in a regular game). 3 seconds before), the effect display during the time saving state may be displayed again. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the time saving state has been shifted to the time saving state multiple times by using one time saving state, and it is possible to provide a surprising game to the player.

Furthermore, by combining the above-mentioned two general figure fluctuation configurations, the time saving state end effect that is executed when the set general figure fluctuation time exceeds the remaining period of the time saving state, and the set general figure fluctuation time It may be configured such that both the time-saving state end suggestion effect, which is executed when the period of time is shorter than the remaining period of the time-saving state, can be displayed. As a result, even after the time-saving state end performance is executed, the player can be made to play the game with enthusiasm while having the expectation that the time-saving state will immediately shift to the time-saving state.

In the first embodiment described above, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set so that the ball cannot enter the second ball entry port 640 in the normal state (non-time saving state). When a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, it is preferable to provide a game stopping means for stopping the game. In this case, the game stopping means includes a means for executing a firing prohibition process in which the ball is not fired even if the operation handle 51 is operated, and a means for executing a firing prohibition process in which the ball is not fired even if the operation handle 51 is operated, and a means for executing a firing prohibition process in which the ball is not fired by operating the operation handle 51. A ball recovery process that allows the ball to be collected before it reaches the front surface), a firing regulation process that restricts the firing strength of the operating handle to a firing strength that is disadvantageous to the player (a firing strength that cannot reach the playing area), Even if a ball enters each ball entry hole provided in the gaming area, a ball entry invalidation process may be considered that invalidates all benefits (the privilege of paying out prize balls and the privilege of executing a lottery).

In addition, as a process for executing the game stopping means, first, when it is determined that a ball has entered the second ball entry port 640, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a time saving state or not. If it is determined that the game is not in a time saving state, then it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is currently being played. If it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress, it is preferable to determine that the current ball entry is an illegal ball entry and to execute the game stop processing by the above-mentioned game stop means.

Furthermore, in the above-described game stopping means execution process, if it is determined that a ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 during a jackpot game, instead of executing the game stopping means, a special bonus performance is executed. It's good to do that. That is, during the jackpot game, although the player is not in a time saving state, he is in a game state in which he plays a right-handed game, so a ball may rarely enter the second ball entrance 640. In this case, the game stopping means will not be executed, but instead a special performance will be executed to congratulate the player, thereby making the player realize that he has had a very rare experience. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute the above-described dedicated performance, during a jackpot game, the normal symbol fluctuation display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a manner that the player can recognize, and the electric accessory 640a is The opening timing (short opening timing) may be predicted. Thereby, the player can play the jackpot game while watching the normal symbol fluctuation display displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

<Other production examples 2 using the configuration of the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 109 to 111, a second example of other effects using the configuration of the third embodiment will be described. In this production example, the configuration for setting the variation time of the normal symbol is different from the third embodiment described above, and the variation time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol variation pattern provided according to the gaming state. The settings are configured based on the selection table 203aa. Here, with reference to FIG. 109, the content of the effect executed in this example 2 of effect will be explained.

FIG. 109 shows an example of a display screen of the effect executed in this effect example 2, and FIG. 109(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when the time saving state is started. 109(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when a long variation is set as the variation time of the normal symbol during the time saving state. Note that the same elements as in each embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 109(a), on the display screen of this production example 2, a picture imitating a bomb is displayed as a termination suggestion display mode Dm10 that is an opportunity to reduce the remaining period of the time period, and a picture imitating a bomb is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In the second sub-display area Ds2, characters "Pinch when a bomb explodes" indicating the content of the termination suggestion display mode Dm10 are displayed.

Then, when a fluctuation time longer than the remaining period of the time period is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, as shown in FIG. 109(b), the end suggestion display mode Dm10 is displayed in an exploded display mode, In the second sub-display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, the words "Unfortunately ended" are displayed, and the remaining time is displayed as "? seconds".

In this way, the actual time short period (the fluctuation time of special symbol 1 whose fluctuation started during the time shortening) does not change, but if it is determined that the fluctuation of the normal symbol (common symbol) does not end within the short period of time, Since the electric accessory 640a does not perform an opening operation (long opening) that is advantageous to the player during the time period, the state that is advantageous to the player has essentially ended.

In addition, in this production example 2, the display screen shown in FIG. 109(b) is configured to be displayed when a variation time longer than the remaining period of the time period is set as the variation time of the normal symbol. However, if it is configured so that a longer fluctuation time (for example 10 seconds) than the normal fluctuation time (3 seconds) can be set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and a similar display screen is displayed when that fluctuation time is selected. good. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the advantageous period has ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202aa used in the second production example will be explained. FIG. 110(a) is a schematic diagram in which the contents of the ordinary pattern variation pattern selection table 202aa are defined. As shown in FIG. 110(a), the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202aa includes a normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202aa1 that is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state, and a normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202aa1 that is referred to when the gaming state is the time saving A. A normal figure variation pattern selection table 202aa2 for time saving A that is referred to and an attached figure variation pattern selection table 202aa3 for time saving B that is referred to when the gaming state is time saving B are defined, and the selection table 202aa2 differs depending on each gaming state. The variation pattern selection table is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 110(b), the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202aa1 is defined so that a variation pattern (variation time) of 4 seconds is always selected, and the normal pattern variation pattern selection table for time saving A 202aa2 and the attached diagram fluctuation pattern selection table 202aa3 for time saving B, as shown in FIGS. 110(c) and 110(d), respectively, the value of the fluctuation type counter and the normal symbol (common symbol) fluctuation during the time saving state. The configuration is such that a variation pattern (variation time) is selected based on the number of times.

It should be noted that the means for measuring the number of normal symbol (ordinary symbol) fluctuations during the time saving state is the same as in the third embodiment described above, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the normal symbol variation process 4 executed in the present performance example 2 will be explained. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation process 4. This normal symbol variation process 4 is different from the above-described normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45) in that the process for setting the variation time (S914, S915) is changed, and other than that is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted. When normal symbol fluctuation processing 4 is executed and it is determined in the processing of S912 that the time is not being shortened (S912: No), or when the processing of S913 is finished, the fluctuation time is set based on the ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern selection table 202aa. Then, this process ends.

As described above, according to the second production example described above, the period during which the player is advantageous during the time period (the period during which the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time) can be varied depending on the fluctuation time of the set normal symbol. Therefore, the player can always keep an eye on how long the advantageous period will last.

In addition, based on the ordinary symbol winning information command output from the main controller 110, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol stored in storage is determined in advance, and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is changed based on the determination result. may be set. In this case, for example, if there is no general pattern fluctuation in the variation time that exceeds the time saving remaining period in the prior discrimination information of the general pattern, the end suggestion display mode Dm10 may not be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to provide a period in which the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Further, the effect display mode may be changed depending on whether or not the special figure 2 is stored in a reserved memory. In this case, it is preferable to display the end suggestion display mode Dm10 only when there is no pending memory of the special figure 2. This allows the player to play a game with a sense of crisis, thereby increasing the performance effect.

<Other examples using the configuration of each embodiment described above>
In each of the embodiments described above, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) lottery (symbol hit), and when the ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) ( Although we have described an example using a pachinko machine 10 (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which a jackpot game is executed for V winning prizes, the configuration of each of the above-mentioned embodiments is adopted only for the above-mentioned symbol winnings. It may also be used for gaming machines (so-called type 1). Next, a gaming machine in which the configuration of each embodiment described above is used for one type of game machine will be described.

In the gaming machine used in other examples, a jackpot game is executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) lottery, and a predetermined condition is satisfied depending on the type of the won jackpot. (until the special symbol changes 5 times), a gaming machine (so-called, 1 A jackpot win based on the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than a jackpot win based on the first special symbol (a jackpot game with a large number of rounds, a jackpot that is likely to have a variable probability state) The system is configured so that games) are easily awarded.

Furthermore, when the gaming state shifts to a variable probability state, a variation pattern with a long variation time (for example, 150 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, as in each of the above-described embodiments. Make it easier. In a state where both the first special symbol pending memory and the second special symbol pending memory are present, the variation (lottery) based on the second special symbol pending memory is executed with priority. (So-called special map 2 priority fluctuation).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform a game in which the second special symbol is acquired withholding memory in a state where the first special symbol is fluctuating over a long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game during the predetermined period (during the first special symbol variation in the probability variation state). In addition, when using such a configuration, the first ball entry means is an opportunity to acquire the reserved memory of the first special symbol by playing a game (for example, a right-handed game) that aims at a predetermined location in the game area. (the first ball entrance 64) and the second ball entrance means (the second ball entrance 640) which is an opportunity to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol. It is a good idea to provide means. Further, it is preferable that the second ball entering means is configured to be more difficult to enter the ball than the first ball entering means.

As a result, in the variable probability state, a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and for a predetermined period during which the variable probability state continues (a period until the number of variations of the special symbol ends 5 times). A game (disadvantageous game) in which the first special symbol is changed without the lottery of the second special symbol being executed (without the ball entering the second ball entering means), or the first special A fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is selected as a symbol fluctuation pattern, and a lottery of the second special symbol is executed during a predetermined period in which the probability variation state continues (a period until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol ends 5 times). (The ball enters the second ball entering means), and one of the games (advantageous game) in which the second special symbol is varied is executed.

In this way, the variable probability state that is advantageous to the player and the variable probability state that is disadvantageous to the player are executed depending on the variation pattern of the first special symbol set during the variable probability state, so the variation of the special symbol executed during the variable probability state is The player can be made to pay close attention to the player. Further, as in each of the above-described embodiments, even if a small hit is won with the first special symbol, it is possible to continue the game of acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol.

In addition, in the other examples mentioned above, as a type 1 variable type gaming machine, a configuration was used in which the variable probability state ends when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times, but other configurations may also be used. For example, there is a configuration in which the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot is won, or a lottery is held to determine whether or not to end the variable probability state every time a special symbol change (lottery) is executed, and based on the lottery result, You may use the structure which terminates a variable probability state.

In addition, in the other examples mentioned above, a configuration is used in which the variation (lottery) based on the reserved memory of special drawing 2 is executed preferentially than the variation (lottery) based on the reserved memory of special drawing 2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be used in which special symbols are changed (lottery) in the order in which the reserved memory is obtained (in the winning order) regardless of the special symbols 1 and 2. Furthermore, the consecutive number of consecutive times (upper limit number of times) that the variable probability state is given may be set in advance, and when the upper limit number is reached, the variable probability state may not be provided after the end of the jackpot.

Next, in the first embodiment described above, by acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) during the variation of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) executed during the time saving state, Although we used a configuration in which the time-saving state is granted again after the end of the jackpot game based on the suspended memory, it may also be configured to set an upper limit (for example, 5 times) to the number of times the time-saving state is consecutively granted. .

In this case, depending on the number of jackpot rights acquired during one time-saving state (the number of reserved memories in special drawing 2), the number of jackpots executed until the number of consecutive grants of time-saving state reaches the upper limit is changed. be able to. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game in an attempt to acquire a larger number of reserved memory numbers of the special drawings 2.

In addition, in the first embodiment described above, the time saving state is always given after the end of the jackpot game based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2, but the time saving state is always given after the end of the jackpot game based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2. It may also be configured such that a jackpot type that does not give a time saving state after the end is selected. Thereby, by continuously using up the reserved memory of the special figure 2, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of times the time-saving state is given when jackpots are executed continuously.

In other words, for example, if there are 4 reserved memories for special figure 2, and the jackpot game based on the reserved memory has a time reduction four times in a row, the time saver will be applied when the 4 reserved memories for special figure 2 are used up. While the next special symbol change is executed when the number of consecutive state grants is 4, in the jackpot game based on the reserved memory of special symbol 2, the last one is based on the reserved memory that is consumed. If the jackpot is with a time saver and the others are without a time saver, the number of times the time saver state is continuously applied will be 1 when the 4 reserved memories of the special drawing 2 are used up.

Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the number of times that the time-saving state can be continuously applied has reached the upper limit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the maximum number of jackpots when the number of times the time-saving state is consecutively given reaches the upper limit can be varied depending on the jackpot type of the reserved memory of the acquired special drawing 2, so that the player is provided with a surprising game. be able to.

In addition, as a method of measuring the number of consecutive grants of time saving state, it is possible to measure the number of times time saving is set for consecutive jackpots, or to measure the number of fluctuations of special figure 1 fluctuation executed during time saving state. It is also possible to do this. When the latter measurement method is used in the first embodiment described above, when the number of times the time saving state is consecutively given reaches the upper limit (5 times) in one consecutive game mode, a maximum of 25 jackpots (special If the number of reserved memories in Figure 2 is the upper limit (4 pieces) each time, and the fluctuation result of special figure 1 is a jackpot every time), the minimum number of retained memories of special figure 2 is 1 piece each time, and the special If the variation result in FIG. 1 is off every time) is provided. In this way, if an upper limit is set for the number of times that the time saving state is consecutively granted, the number of jackpots executed during one consecutive game mode can be varied, so it is possible to It is possible to make the player play the game with enthusiasm.

In addition, in a right-handed state that is advantageous to the player (for example, time saving state or variable probability state), an advantageous special symbol (second special symbol) that is advantageous to the player among the special symbols and a disadvantageous special symbol that is more disadvantageous than the advantageous special symbol. The special symbol (first special symbol) is configured to be variable (lottery), and the second special symbol is configured to more easily satisfy the variation execution condition than the first special symbol during the right-handed state. In the gaming machine, when it is determined that the second special symbol is changing by the determining means that determines the type of the special symbol that changes during a right-handed game, the display means (third symbol display device 81) displays the second special symbol. 2. Execute an effect display that fluctuates identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, and if the determining means determines that the first special symbol is fluctuating, display the lottery result of the first special symbol. Rather than changing the display of the identification information for the change, we emphasize the guidance display (for example, "Accumulate the reservation of special symbol 2") that urges you to acquire the reservation memory of the second special symbol during the fluctuation period, and display the third symbol. It may be configured to be displayed on the display device 81.

In this way, by changing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 (in particular, the variable display mode of the special symbol) based on the type of special symbol to be executed in a specific gaming state, the currently set An appropriate gaming method can be notified to the player based on the current gaming state and the current gaming content. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

Further, a determining means is provided for determining the fluctuation time of the first special symbol executed during the right-handed game, and the determining means determines that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol being executed is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). If it is determined that the above is the case, the above-mentioned guidance display may be displayed. Thereby, the player can understand the content of the guidance display and can correct the game content of the game being executed. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the period during which the guidance display is displayed from becoming shorter, which would confuse the player.

Furthermore, in each of the embodiments described above, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a during the time saving state is an opening pattern of 11 seconds in total (long opening period) of 3 seconds for the first opening period, 5 seconds for the closing period, and 3 seconds for the second opening period ), and when the opening scenario corresponding to the set opening pattern is completed, or when one ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, the electric accessory Although the configuration is such that a condition (termination condition) for terminating the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is satisfied, a different opening pattern and termination condition are set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a, and it is possible to set a different opening pattern and termination condition as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a. may configure gaming machines with different gaming properties.

In each of the embodiments described above, when the electric accessory 640a is released during the time saving state (when winning a normal symbol lottery during the time saving state), the number of balls entering the second ball entrance 640 is By limiting the amount to one, excessive benefits are prevented from being given to the player. However, by using such a configuration, a benefit is given to the player when winning a normal symbol lottery during the time saving state (a benefit that makes it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640). There was a problem in that the player's desire to play the game decreased as the amount of money remained constant.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, as an opening pattern (long opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a executed during the time saving state, the interval at which the ball reaches the electric accessory 640a (the distance between the balls and the ball by the distribution member 700) is determined. An opening pattern is set in which an opening scenario is repeated five times for 0.2 seconds at an interval of 1.2 seconds (distributed interval), and the opening scenario is terminated as a condition for ending the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Alternatively, a configuration may be used in which the termination condition is set to the case where four balls enter the second ball entry port 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a.

With this configuration, when the timing at which the electric accessory 640a is released in the long opening pattern and the timing at which the ball reaches the electric accessory 640a match, the electric accessory 640a is released in one opening operation. In this case, it is possible to enter a maximum of four balls into the second ball entry port 640. Therefore, the privilege that will be given to the player if he wins in the regular symbol lottery during the time saving state (the privilege that makes it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640) is determined by the game situation (ball launch timing, ball launch timing, This can be varied depending on the timing at which the ball reaches the electric accessory 640a, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, the opening interval of the electric accessory 640a is set such that when a right-handed game is being played continuously (when a game in which 100 balls are fired per minute), the electric accessory 640a is Since the timing is set to 1.2 seconds, which is the same as the timing at which can do.

In addition, as explained using the above-mentioned first embodiment, in the right side area of the game board 13, there is a distribution member 700 that alternately distributes game balls, and a flow of balls distributed by the distribution member 700. Since the configuration is such that the ball reaches the electric accessory 640 via a rectifying means (a bending path 701a or a direct passage that does not reduce the velocity of the ball) to keep the interval constant, it is possible to play right-handed games. When continuously executed, the accuracy of the interval at which the fired ball reaches the electric accessory 640a can be further improved.

In addition, when such a configuration is used, it may be configured to perform suggestion notification for suggesting to the player the opening timing of the electric accessory 640a. By executing this suggestion notification, it is possible to have the player play the game at a timing when it is easy for the player to enter the ball into the second ball entry port 640.

In each of the embodiments described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the frame button 22 is used to determine that the operation means has been operated when the player presses it. However, other configurations are possible. It may also be possible to use a lever-shaped operating means that can determine whether the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or forward or backward, or whether it has been operated by the player touching or coming close to it. It is also possible to use a touch sensor type operation means, a wireless type operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like.

In each of the embodiments described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol that is highlighted and displayed to the player and displaying the secondary symbol. In addition, as the structure of the display means, a structure other than a liquid crystal display may be used, and a display that applies the organic electroluminescence (EL) phenomenon that emits light when a voltage is applied to a layered structure using a certain type of organic compound. The device (organic EL display) or the surface of various three-dimensional objects (accessories, etc.) installed in the pachinko machine 10 is used as a screen, and after identifying the position of the three-dimensional surface (protruding, buried relationship), images are displayed using a projector. A display device that illuminates (project mapping) may also be used.

In addition, when using the above-mentioned project mapping as a display means, the irradiation of video data is based on the data of the three-dimensional surface of the movable accessory provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the position data of the movable accessory at the time of irradiation. By configuring the display so that the position and content are determined, flexible display can be performed and the presentation effect can be enhanced. In addition, in consideration of the case where an abnormality occurs in a movable accessory that can serve as a screen, it is determined whether the movable accessory's movement status is normal, and if the determination result is that it is not normal, the non-movable accessory is It is preferable to perform abnormality control such that the location is used as a screen and image data is irradiated. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player cannot grasp the display content displayed on the display means due to an abnormality of the movable accessory.

In each of the embodiments described above, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed when the player is in a gaming state advantageous to the player (time saving state), and a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed when the player is in a normal gaming state. Although the configuration is such that a left-handed game is executed in which the game is aimed at, it is only necessary to change the target area of the game board 13 depending on the game state. It is also possible to have the player execute a right-handed game. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that games can be executed in different game states while aiming at the same area.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Characteristics Group A> (Probable change in the special 1 fluctuation period in 1 type and 2 types of configurations)
a first acquisition means that acquires first information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition; a first determination means that performs a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means; and a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means; a first benefit granting means for granting a first benefit to a player when the game is stopped; a second acquisition means for acquiring second information based on establishment of a second acquisition condition; a storage means for storing the acquired second information; and a second judgment for executing a second judgment that is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the first judgment based on the second information stored in the storage means. and a second state in which the second acquisition condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first state. A gaming machine having a state setting means, further comprising a priority means for executing the second determination corresponding to the second information stored in the storage means with priority over the first determination. , a gaming machine configured such that when the first state is switched to the second state, the first determination is executed before the second determination is executed. A1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the state of the starting port provided on the game board is changed from a first state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the game ball to a second state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the game machine. There is one that performs the first lottery of whether or not it is true. In such a conventional gaming machine, a lottery is executed a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters the starting hole in a state that is easily changed to the second state, and the lottery result of the predetermined number of times is displayed. A gaming machine with continuous settings has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the probability that the lottery will be determined to be advantageous to the player after a predetermined number of lottery draws is executed is constant, and the game becomes monotonous and the player loses control quickly. The problem was that I got bored.

According to the gaming machine A1, even in a special state in which the second acquisition condition is more likely to be satisfied, the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed, and the second determination is performed during the dynamic display period. Since execution is regulated, at the start of the special state, there is a period in which the first judgment, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second judgment, is executed, and after that, the second judgment, which is advantageous to the player, is executed. Since the second determination is configured such that the second determination is given priority over the first determination by the priority means with respect to the second information stored in the storage means, the second determination that is advantageous to the player is made consecutively. By switching to a period in which the game is more likely to be executed, it is possible to improve the player's interest and suppress the problem of the player getting tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine A1, the first ball entering means triggers the establishment of the first acquisition condition when a game ball enters the ball, and the first ball entrance means triggers the establishment of the second acquisition condition when the game ball enters. a second ball entry means; a variable member that can be changed between an open state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a closed state where it is difficult to enter the second ball entry means; and a variable member that allows the game ball to pass through a predetermined passage area. A detection means capable of detecting whether or not a game ball has been played, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means, and lottery information for indicating a lottery result by the lottery means are dynamically displayed. lottery information dynamic display means, and when the lottery information for indicating a specific lottery result is stopped and displayed, the variable member is moved to the closed state or the open state in a variable pattern set according to a predetermined rule; and variable control means for changing the lottery, and the lottery means is configured to be able to execute the lottery even during a period when the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed. A game machine A2 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, even during the period when the special state is set and the first identification information is dynamically displayed, the lottery can be drawn by passing the gaming ball through the passing area. By executing the execution and letting the game ball enter the second ball entry means, it becomes possible to satisfy the second acquisition condition. This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game by letting the game ball pass through.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a variable winning means that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where it is difficult for a game ball to enter, and a specific area through which a game ball that has entered the variable winning means can pass. , a bonus game execution means that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the specific area; and a bonus game execution means that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player; A gaming machine A3 characterized in that it has variable game execution means for changing the variable ball entry means from the state in which it is difficult to enter the ball to the state in which it is possible to enter the ball.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, by executing the second determination, it is possible to shift to a game in which the game ball passes through a specific area, and the player This has the effect of being able to provide a variety of games.

In either gaming machine A2 or A3, the variable pattern varied by the variable control means is set variably in accordance with a period in which the special state is set. Game machine A4.

According to the gaming machine A4, since the variable pattern is varied in accordance with the period in which the special state is set, it is possible to execute the variable pattern in accordance with the period in which the special state is set.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, a first storage means in which the first information acquired by the first acquisition means is stored, and the first identification dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. a first dynamic display period setting means for determining a dynamic display period of information; The dynamic display period of the first identification information is at least a first dynamic display period shorter than a dynamic display period in which the lottery information is dynamically displayed by the lottery information dynamic display means, and a first dynamic display period in which the lottery information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that it is possible to set a second dynamic display period that is longer than the dynamic display period in which the dynamic display is performed.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the second input state is set as the second state depending on the length of the dynamic display period set by the first dynamic display period setting means. It is possible to set an advantageous state in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the ball means and a disadvantageous state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to play the game so that the second state becomes an advantageous state.

The gaming machine A5 includes a display means capable of displaying predetermined information, and a display control means for causing the display means to display state information for indicating the gaming state set by the state setting means, and the display means The control means is characterized in that when the second dynamic display period is set by the first dynamic display period setting means, the state information for indicating the second state is not displayed. Game machine A6.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, even though the second state is set, the game ball is not entered into the second ball entering means during the dynamic display period of the first identification information. If a second dynamic display period that is difficult to display is set, the state information for indicating the second state is not displayed, so that the problem of spoiling the player's expectations due to the information displayed on the display means is avoided. It has the effect of being able to suppress it.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6 has a game regulating means capable of regulating the game of the player based on the second acquisition condition being satisfied while the first state is set. A game machine A7 characterized in that it is a game machine.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the player's satisfaction is based on the fact that the second acquisition condition is met in the first state where the fulfillment of the second acquisition condition is regulated. Since the game can be regulated, it is possible to prevent the second acquisition condition from being established fraudulently.

In the gaming machine A7, the gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the game regulating means regulates the firing of game balls.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A7, since the firing of game balls is regulated by the game regulating means, there is an effect that fraud can be effectively suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the first ball entry means has a first flow path in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a game ball can enter the second ball entry means. The first ball entry means arranged in the second flow path allows the game ball to enter the ball entrance arranged in the second flow path, thereby allowing the player to play the game. The game ball is brought into a state in which the ball can enter, and the game ball enters the first ball entry means disposed in the second flow path, thereby making it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball. A gaming machine A9.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A8, by letting the game ball enter the ball entrance, the second state is set, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means. Even when a game ball is caused to flow down the second channel in order to make a ball, the game ball enters the ball entrance, which makes it easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means. This has the effect that the judgment can be configured to be easily executed.

In the gaming machine A9, a holding means capable of holding a game ball at a position where the game ball can enter the ball entry hole, and a holding release means that releases the holding by the holding means based on the establishment of a release condition. A gaming machine A10 characterized in that it has the following.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A9, there is an effect that the timing at which the game ball enters the first ball entry means can be controlled by the release condition.

The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the cancellation condition is canceled based on the first privilege being awarded by the first privilege granting means.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A10, the cancellation condition is satisfied at the timing when the first benefit is granted, so that the first acquisition condition is easily satisfied after the first benefit is granted. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristics Group B> (Special 1 winning regulation during normal times)
A first flow path through which the game ball can flow down, a second flow path through which the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and a position where the game ball that has flown down the first flow path can enter the ball. a second ball entering means disposed in the second flow path into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. An acquisition means that can acquire information based on the ball, a determination means that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information that indicates the determination result by the determination means is dynamic. In a gaming machine, the gaming machine has a dynamic display means for displaying, and a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to a player when the identification information for indicating that the determination result is the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. , setting a special state in which playing a game by letting a game ball flow down the second flow path is more advantageous to the player than playing a game by letting the game ball flow down the first flow path; and when a game is played by causing a game ball to flow down the second flow path in a state where the special state is not set by the state setting means, the first input A gaming machine B1 characterized in that it has a regulating means that makes it more difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means than the ball means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the state of the starting port provided on the game board is changed from a first state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the game ball to a second state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the game machine. There is one that performs the first lottery of whether or not it is true. In such a conventional gaming machine, a lottery is executed a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters the starting hole in a state that is easily changed to the second state, and the lottery result of the predetermined number of times is displayed. A gaming machine with continuous settings has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the probability that the lottery will be determined to be advantageous to the player after a predetermined number of lottery draws is executed is constant, and the game becomes monotonous and the player loses control quickly. The problem was that I got bored. In addition, if the game is configured to be played by changing the falling route of the game ball in order to give variety to the game, the game ball may flow down a different route than the expected falling route, giving the player an unfair advantage. There was a problem where the .

According to the game machine B1, when a special state is set, the game can be changed by causing the second channel to flow down and play a game. If not, the game ball is regulated to be more difficult to enter the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means, so when the special state ends, the first flow path is allowed to flow down and the game is started. This has the effect of suppressing problems such as fraud by inevitably encouraging the player to do so.

In the game machine B1, the second flow path is formed with at least a third flow path through which game balls can flow down, and a fourth flow path through which it is difficult for game balls that have flowed down the third flow path to flow down. It has a distribution means capable of distributing the game balls flowing down the second flow path into the third flow path and the fourth flow path, and the game balls flowing down the second flow path are disposed in the second flow path. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that the means are arranged.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, among the gaming balls flowing down the second channel, the gaming balls distributed to the third channel can enter the second ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the amount of game balls that can enter the second ball entering means can be reduced compared to the first ball entering means.

In the game machine B2, a third ball entry means into which a game ball can enter is arranged in the third flow path, and based on the game ball entering the third ball entry means, the Information is acquired by the acquisition means, and advantageous determination means executes an advantageous determination that is more advantageous to the player than the determination based on the information acquired when a game ball enters the third ball entrance means. and variable control means for changing the state from a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the third ball entry means to a state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means by setting the special state. Game machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, when the special state is reached, the ball is easily allowed to enter the third ball entering means, so that the player is not allowed to let the game ball flow down into the second flow path. This has the effect of encouraging the user to play the game.

A game machine B4 in the game machine B2 or B3, wherein the distribution means alternately distributes game balls to the third flow path and the fourth flow path.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, by distributing them alternately, half of the gaming balls flowing down into the second channel can be caused to flow down by half, and the second ball entering means can effectively This has the effect of reducing the number of game balls that enter the ball.

In the game machines B1 to B4, switching is made between a holding means capable of holding the game balls flowing down the first flow path or the second flow path, and a state in which the game balls held by the holding means are allowed to flow downstream. a switching means, an opening into which a game ball that has flown down after being switched to the flowing state by the switching means can enter; and a game ball entering the opening, which causes the second ball to enter. A game machine B5 characterized in that it has variable means for bringing the means into a state in which a game ball can enter.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, since the holding means and the switching means restrict the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means, the game ball may be released at an unintended timing. This has the effect of suppressing the problem of the game ball entering the second ball entering means.

In the game machine B5, the switching means switches to a state in which game balls can be held after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after switching to the state in which the game balls are allowed to flow down.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B5, it is possible to define a period during which the game ball can enter the second ball entering means, so that the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means is possible. This has the effect of making it more regulated.

In the gaming machine B5 or B6, the second ball entry means is characterized by being configured to be variable by the variable means to a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter, based on the entry of the game ball. Game machine B7.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B5 or B6, even during the period when the switching means is switched to the sulfurizing state, the game ball enters the second ball entering means. In this case, since the second ball entry means is changed to a state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from entering the second ball entry means in succession. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving excessive benefits to players.

In any of the game machines B5 to B7, a first position is provided in an area where the game ball held by the holding means can flow down, and a first position where the game ball that has flown down can be guided to the first flow path; A variable guiding means that is variable to a second position where it is difficult to guide the flow path, and a guiding member variable control that variably controls the variable guiding means to the first position and the second position at a predetermined interval. A game machine B8, characterized in that the opening is arranged in a region into which a game ball flowing down the first channel can enter.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines B5 to B7, the timing at which the game ball held by the holding means can flow downstream by the switching means and the variable guiding means at the first position It is possible to enter the game ball into the opening only when the timing that is varied satisfies a predetermined condition, so the player is encouraged to be conscious of the timing of the game and play the game with enthusiasm. The effect is that it can be done.

When a special state is set by the state setting means in any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the remaining period of the special state is shortened by dynamically displaying the identification information. A gaming machine B9 is characterized in that it has a variable means.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the remaining period of the special state is shortened by dynamically displaying the identification information. This has the effect of making the game more interesting and making the game more interesting. Note that the longer the dynamic display period is executed, the longer the special state that is advantageous to the player becomes, so the player can expect a longer dynamic display period.

<Characteristics Group C> (Control for one consecutive game)
A first flow path through which the game ball can flow down, a second flow path through which the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path has difficulty flowing down, and a position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter the ball. a second ball entering means arranged in the second flow path into which a game ball can enter; and a game ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. An acquisition means that can acquire information based on the ball entering the ball, a determination means that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information that indicates the determination result by the determination means are dynamic. In the gaming machine, the game machine has a dynamic display means for displaying a dynamic display, and a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. 2. A variable means for changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entering means and a second state in which entering the ball is more difficult than the first state, and a variable means for changing the state from the second state to the above. variable execution means for changing the state to a first state based on the establishment of a variable condition; and execution of a game by causing a game ball to flow down into the second flow path rather than the first flow path based on the establishment of a specific condition. special state setting means for setting a special state that facilitates execution of a bonus game that is advantageous to the player; and a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information after the bonus game is executed. and a variable condition determining means that determines whether the variable condition is met when the bonus game is executed. Gaming machine C1.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is a win that is advantageous to the player. A system has been proposed in which a game is executed and a high probability state is created in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased depending on the type of the winning game, so that successive winning games are easily executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is difficult for the player to check whether the lottery is actually drawn with high probability before playing the game, and there is a problem that the player's interest tends to decrease.

According to the gaming machine C1, when a bonus game is executed, it is determined whether a variable condition that determines whether to change the variable means to the first state is satisfied. By changing the variable means to the first state, it becomes easier to dynamically display the identification information and release the special state, and if the variable means is not changed, it becomes difficult to dynamically display the identification information, This has the effect that the special state can be easily set continuously, and that the interest can be improved depending on whether the variable condition is satisfied when the bonus game is executed.

The gaming machine C1 includes a type determining means for determining the type of the bonus game when the bonus game is executed, and the variable condition determining means determines the type of the bonus game determined by the type determining unit. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that it determines whether the variable condition is satisfied based on the above.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the fulfillment of the variable condition is determined based on the type of bonus game to be executed, so the fulfillment of the variable condition is determined based on the rate at which the type of bonus game is determined. The ratio can also be set, which has the effect of allowing stable game content to be set.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the benefit granting means executes the benefit game as one of the benefits, and the type determining means determines the type of the benefit game to be executed by the benefit granting device. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that the special state is set based on the type of the bonus game executed by the bonus granting means.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C1 or C2, the rate at which special conditions are set can be varied by setting the type of bonus game, and the game machine C3 can be designed to easily adjust the game playability. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, a third ball entering means into which a game ball can enter is arranged in the second flow path, and the acquiring means inserts a game ball into the third ball entering means. The information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entering means, and the determining means is configured to determine whether the game ball is more accurate than the determination based on the information obtained when the game ball has entered the third ball entering means. The third ball entering means has a regulating means that is variable between a state of regulating entry of the game ball into the third ball entering means and a state of permitting the entry of the game ball. A gaming machine C4, characterized in that, by setting the special state, the regulating means is configured to be easily changed to a state that allows the ball to enter.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the game ball is more likely to be entered into the third ball entering means where an advantageous determination that is advantageous to the player is executed when a special state is entered. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to encourage the player to play the game by causing the game ball to flow down into the second channel.

In the gaming machine C4, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state where a game ball can enter and a closed state where a ball does not enter, and a specific area through which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass; and a bonus game execution means for executing the bonus game when a game ball passes through the specific area, and when the advantageous determination determines a specific result, the variable ball entry means changes from the closed state. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that it is variable to an open state.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, a bonus game is executed by passing a game ball through a specific area, so that the player can be interested in the flow of the ball, and the game can be played. It has the effect of increasing the interest of people.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, a first storage means capable of storing the information acquired based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means; judgment condition determining means for determining the information on which the determination is performed by the determining means based on the information, and the type determining means at least stores the information in the storage means during the bonus game. A first type corresponding to a first bonus game that is easy to store, and a second type corresponding to a second bonus game whose information is more difficult to store in the storage means than the first type. Features gaming machine C6.

According to the gaming machine C6, depending on the type determined by the type determining means, a bonus game in which information is easily stored in the first storage means and a bonus game in which information is difficult to be stored can be executed during the bonus game. As a result, when a special state is given after the end of the bonus game, it is possible to set a state in which identification information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means is dynamically displayed and a state in which it is not displayed. It becomes possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to dynamically display identification information based on the fact that a game ball enters the second ball entering means during the special state, and it is possible to diversify the games that are executed during the special state.

In the gaming machine C6, the special state setting means sets a first special state in which identification information based on the fact that a game ball enters the first ball entering means is dynamically displayed during the special state; 2. A second special state is set in which identification information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means is dynamically displayed, and the second special state is more convenient for gaming than the first special state. A gaming machine C7 is characterized in that a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is easily executed.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, the degree of advantage provided to the player can be varied depending on the type of identification information dynamically displayed during the special state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game.

<Feature D group> (Continuous Chan mode end effect)
a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a first determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. and a determining means for executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and a determination result by the determining means. a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for displaying the information; and a dynamic display means that is variable from a first state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means to a second state in which it is possible for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a state setting means capable of setting a special state that makes it possible to change the second ball entry means to the second state when a specific condition is met; a canceling means for canceling the special state based on the dynamic display of the identification information being executed when the state is set and the dynamic display period has ended; and the special state being set. In this case, dynamic display of the identification information is started, and effect execution means executes an effect based on information that determines whether the specific condition is met based on the remaining dynamic display period. Characteristic game machine D1.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is a win that is advantageous to the player. A system has been proposed in which a game is executed and a high probability state is created in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased depending on the type of the winning game, so that successive winning games are easily executed. In such gaming machines, after a symbol for informing players of the lottery result is displayed in a fluctuating manner on a liquid crystal display device, etc., a symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed in a static manner to inform the player of the lottery result. There is a known game that executes a winning game if it is a hit (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the game is monotonous due to repeated display of changing symbols based on the lottery results, and there is a problem in that the player quickly becomes bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine D1, the remaining period of the special state changes as the dynamic display period of the identification information that is executed when the special state is set changes, so it can be specified by the performance executed by the performance execution means. It is possible to recognize the establishment of the condition and the remaining period of the special state, and this has the effect of suppressing the problem of players becoming bored early.

The gaming machine D1 includes a detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed through the passage area, and a determination means for determining whether the specific condition is satisfied when the detection means detects the passing of the game ball. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the performance execution means executes a performance to show the determination result based on the determination performed by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, even when the identification information is displayed in the special state, it is determined whether the specific condition is met by passing the gaming ball through the passing area. This has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine D3 in the gaming machine D1 or D2, wherein the performance execution means executes a specific performance based on the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information being equal to or less than a predetermined period. .

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, by executing a specific effect, it is possible to determine that the remaining period of the special state is less than or equal to a predetermined period. .

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the second determination is performed by the determination means from among the information acquired by the acquisition means based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entrance means. The effect execution means stores the information in the storage means when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information becomes equal to or less than the predetermined period. A gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the specific performance is not executed on the condition that it is stored.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D1 to D3, even if the special state ends due to the information stored in the storage means, the game machine Since the player is in a state where it is easy to make an advantageous judgment, there is an effect that unnecessary anxiety can be suppressed from being caused to the player by executing the specific performance.

In any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying result information for a predetermined period of time and then stopping the display for showing the determination result by the determination means; and a period determination means for determining the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information at the time when the result information is stopped and displayed, and the effect execution means is configured such that the determination result by the period determination means meets a predetermined period condition. A gaming machine D5 characterized in that, when the following is satisfied, the stop display mode of the result information is switched to a stop display mode based on the determination result of the identification information.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the stop display mode can be switched when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information satisfies the period condition. It is possible to provide a surprising performance to the audience and enhance the performance effect.

In the gaming machine D5, the period condition is satisfied if the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information at the time when the result information is stopped and displayed by the second dynamic display means is within a predetermined period. The gaming machine D6 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D5, it is possible to suppress the problem that the result information and identification information are stopped and displayed at short intervals, making it difficult for the player to understand the displayed contents, and to improve the gaming experience. This has the effect of being able to provide games that are easy for players to understand.

<Characteristic Group E> (Change of normal figure fluctuation period in time saving state)
a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a first determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. and a determining means for executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and a determination result by the determining means. a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the game ball; and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for displaying the game ball, and a first state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and the game ball entering the second ball entry means becomes easier than in the first state. a variable means for changing the state to a second state; a state setting means capable of setting a special state that allows the variable means to change the state to the second state when a specific condition is met; When the special state is set by the means, dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the end of the dynamic display period, canceling means for canceling the special state, and the variable means. A lottery means for executing a lottery for determining whether to change from the first state to the second state, and a dynamic lottery information display for dynamically displaying lottery information for showing the lottery result by the lottery means. means, a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in which the lottery information is dynamically displayed, and a dynamic display period in which a plurality of dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determining means are set. a storage means for storing a plurality of display period groups; a selection means for selecting the type of the special state set by the state setting means; and a selection means for selecting the type of the special state set by the state setting means; A gaming machine E1 characterized in that the dynamic display period determining means includes dynamic display period group setting means for setting the dynamic display period group for determining the dynamic display period.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is a win that is advantageous to the player. A system has been proposed in which a game is executed and a high probability state is created in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased depending on the type of the winning game, so that successive winning games are easily executed. In such gaming machines, after a symbol for informing players of the lottery result is displayed in a fluctuating manner on a liquid crystal display device, etc., a symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed in a static manner to inform the player of the lottery result. There is a known game that executes a winning game if it is a hit (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the game is monotonous due to repeated display of changing symbols based on the lottery results, and there is a problem in that the player quickly becomes bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine E1, if a short dynamic display period of lottery information is determined, a lottery can be executed during the special state period, and the interest of the game can be improved by the determined dynamic display period group. This has the effect of suppressing the problem of players becoming bored early.

In the gaming machine E1, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on a game ball entering the first ball entrance means or the second ball entrance means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means are stored. A gaming machine E2 comprising: a storage means, wherein the determination means executes the first determination or the second determination based on the information stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the information acquired by the acquisition means can be stored in the storage means, so that the game machine E2 can continue to provide information to the player regardless of the judgment status of the judgment means. It is possible to make the game more efficient.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the determination means performs the first determination or the second determination during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, even when the information is stored in the storage means. A gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it waits for execution.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, while the identification information is being dynamically displayed, execution of the determination based on the information stored in the storage means is on standby. Multiple determinations based on information stored in the means are not executed simultaneously. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

Any of the gaming machines E1 to E3 has a detection means capable of detecting that the game ball has passed through a passage area through which the game ball can pass, and the lottery means detects passage of the game ball by the detection means. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the lottery is executed based on the lottery.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the passage area, the lottery means executes the lottery, so that the game This has the effect of encouraging players to play games using game balls with enthusiasm.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the dynamic display period group set by the dynamic display period group setting means is a short dynamic display period set such that a short dynamic display period is easily determined as the dynamic display period. A gaming machine characterized in that at least a display period group and a long dynamic display period group in which the short dynamic display period is set to be more difficult to determine than the short dynamic display period group are set. E5.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the length of the dynamic display period to be set is determined by the dynamic display period group set by the dynamic display period group setting means. It can be made variable. Therefore, it is possible to vary the number of drawings performed by the drawing means during the special state that is advantageous to the player, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines E2 to E5, the dynamic display period determining means is configured to determine the dynamic display period based on the number of the pieces of information acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entering means, which is stored in the storage means. The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that one dynamic display period is determined from the determined dynamic display period group.

According to the gaming machine E6, the dynamic display period is determined based on the number of information acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entering means, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E2 to E5. Therefore, it becomes possible to associate the game in which a game ball is entered into the second ball entering means with the number of drawings performed by the drawing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

Each of the gaming machines E1 to E6 has a notification means for notifying that the special state is set, and the notification means dynamically displays the lottery information determined by the dynamic display period determining means. A gaming machine E7 characterized in that notification is made only when the period is shorter than the remaining period of the special state set by the state setting means.

According to the gaming machine E7, only when the dynamic display of lottery information ends in a state where the special state is set, the notification means notifies that the current special state is present. Therefore, even if the special state is in progress, by notifying the player that the special state is in effect during the remaining period of the special state in which the variable means is not changed from the first state to the second state, players will be distrusted. This has the effect of being able to prevent people from giving a negative impression.

<Characteristic Group F> (Special 1 hit performance during time saving)
a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a first determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. and a determining means for executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and a determination result by the determining means. dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the specific determination result; and executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. and a bonus game execution means, the variable means for changing the second state from a first state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means to a second state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means. , a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a lottery information dynamic display means for dynamically displaying lottery information for showing the lottery result by the lottery means, and a specific lottery result. a state setting means capable of setting a special state that can be changed to the second state by the variable means when the lottery information for indicating that the lottery information is stopped and displayed; a canceling means for canceling the special status based on the dynamic display of the identification information being executed and the dynamic display period ending when the status is set, and the special status not being set; In this case, an effect execution means for executing an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information, and executing an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information based on the setting of the special state; The performance execution means specifies, when the special state is set, a state in which a performance corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information is executed to a performance corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information. A gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the game is switched and executed based on the establishment of a condition.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is a win that is advantageous to the player. A system has been proposed in which a game is executed and a high probability state is created in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased depending on the type of the winning game, so that successive winning games are easily executed. In such gaming machines, after a symbol for informing players of the lottery result is displayed in a fluctuating manner on a liquid crystal display device, etc., a symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed in a static manner to inform the player of the lottery result. There is a known game that executes a winning game if it is a hit (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-147965). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the game is monotonous due to repeated display of changing symbols based on the lottery results, and there is a problem in that the player quickly becomes bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine F1, when a special state occurs, the game ball is more likely to be able to enter the second ball entry means, so a specific lottery result that makes it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry means is determined. Since it is possible to switch to a performance that corresponds to whether the This has the effect of suppressing the problem of getting bored.

In the game machine F1, information acquisition means acquires information determined by the determination means based on the fact that a game ball enters the first ball entrance means or the second ball entrance means, and the information acquisition means A gaming machine F2 comprising: storage means for storing the acquired information.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, even when many game balls enter the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, the information acquired in the storage means is is memorized, so there is an effect that the player can be given more opportunities to be judged.

In the gaming machine F2, the determining means determines, based on the information acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entering means stored in the storage means, based on the determination condition being satisfied. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the determination is executed with priority over the information acquired based on the ball entering the first ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, when there is a plurality of pieces of information acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entering means, the plural pieces of information can be continuously determined. I can do it. Therefore, judgments that are advantageous to the player can be made consecutively, and the player's motivation to play can be improved.

In any of gaming machines F1 to F3, when the special condition is set in the specific condition, the remaining period of the dynamic display period of the identification information in which dynamic display has started is equal to or less than a predetermined period. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that at least one of the conditions for establishing the game has become true.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of identification information that is executed when the special state is canceled before the special state is canceled. This has the effect that the effect can be switched to when it is smoothly canceled.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the specific condition includes the identification information whose dynamic display is started when the special state is set being stopped and displayed with identification information for indicating the specific determination result. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that at least one of the conditions is that the gaming machine is set so that

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F1 to F4, when the dynamically displayed identification information is statically displayed to indicate that it is a specific determination result, At first, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of lottery information is performed to inform the player whether the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entering means, and then a specific judgment result is given. Since this can also be notified through a performance, it is possible to provide the player with a performance that effectively utilizes the dynamic display period of the identification information.

<Characteristics Group G> (Game support)
A ball entry means having an opening into which a game ball can enter; an open state in which a game ball can enter the opening of the ball entry means; and a closed state in which entry of the game ball is restricted. a variable member that can be changed; a determining means that executes a determination based on passage of a game ball; and when a determination result by the determining means is a specific determination result, the variable member is changed from the closed state to the open state. and variable control means for varying the opening in a specific variable pattern, the variable pattern being the open state after a first open pattern in which the open state is reached, and a closed pattern in which the closed state is in the closed state for a predetermined period of time. A gaming machine G1 comprising at least a second opening pattern.

Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a passage area through which the game ball can pass, and when the game ball passes through the passage area, a predetermined first lottery is executed, and the lottery result is a win. Some proposals have been made to make the variable member variable so that the ball can more easily enter a specific ball entry hole. In such gaming machines, when a ball enters a specific ball opening, a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery is executed, and a pattern is displayed on the liquid crystal display to notify the player of the lottery result. There is a known game in which the lottery result is announced by displaying a pattern that shows the lottery result in a fluctuating manner, and then, if the lottery result is a win, a winning game is executed (for example, 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since a variable display of symbols based on the second lottery result is displayed on a liquid crystal display device, etc., there is a problem that the player may overlook the result of the first lottery. Ta.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the first opening pattern and the second opening pattern are configured, the player who notices that the variable member is being variably controlled by executing the first opening pattern On the other hand, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the ball entering means during the second release pattern. Therefore, it is possible to support the game for players who do not understand the game content.

In the gaming machine G1, a closure determining means determines that the closing pattern among the variable patterns has been executed, and when the closing determining means determines that the closing pattern has been executed, a predetermined first A gaming machine G2 characterized by having a notification execution means for executing notification.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the first notification is executed by the notification execution means based on the completion of the execution of the first opening pattern and the execution of the closing pattern. The player can easily understand that variable control of the variable member is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to support the game for players who do not understand the game content.

The gaming machine G2 has a gaming area in which the variable member is provided, and an operating means for firing a game ball into the gaming area, and the period set as the closed pattern in the variable pattern is: A gaming machine G3, characterized in that the period is set to be longer than the period until the ball launched by the operating means reaches the variable member.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, the period set as the closing pattern is set longer than the period until the ball fired by the operating means reaches the variable member, Even if the player recognizes that the variable control of the variable member is being executed by the first notification by the notification executing unit and starts operating the operating unit, the ball entering unit will not operate while the second opening pattern is being executed. It becomes possible to let the ball enter the ball. Therefore, it is possible to support the game for players who do not understand the game content.

Any of the gaming machines G1 to G3 includes a termination condition determining means for determining that a termination condition for terminating the operation of varying the variable member by the variable control means is satisfied, and the termination condition determining means A gaming machine G4 characterized in that it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied when the predetermined variable pattern is executed or when a predetermined number of balls enter the ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the end condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of balls enter the ball entering means, so that the predetermined number of balls enter the first opening pattern. By allowing the ball to enter the ball entering means, it becomes possible to end the variable control of the variable member by the variable control means without executing the closing pattern. As a result, one variable control period can be shortened, and the player can be motivated to play the game. In addition, even if the closing pattern is set for a long period of time, by making it possible to satisfy the end condition of the variable control while the first variable pattern is being executed, it is possible for players who are playing normal games to This has the effect of suppressing feelings of dissatisfaction caused by long-term closure patterns.

In gaming machine G4, of the variable patterns, a period set as the first opening pattern is set longer than a period until the predetermined number of balls fired by the operating means reach the variable member. A gaming machine G5 characterized by being

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G4, it is possible to cause a predetermined number of balls to enter the ball entering means during the period in which the first release pattern is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the feeling of dissatisfaction caused by the execution of a long-term closed pattern for players who are playing normal games.

In gaming machines G1 to G5, when a ball enters the ball entry means while the second release pattern among the variable patterns is being executed, the notification execution means executes a predetermined second notification. A gaming machine G6 is characterized in that it executes.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the second notification is executed when a ball enters the ball entering means while the second opening pattern is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to have the player correct the operating method of the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to support the game for players who do not understand the game content.

Among the gaming machines G1 to G6, a gaming machine G7 is characterized in that, among the variable patterns, a period set as the first opening pattern is shorter than a period set as the second opening pattern.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G6, it is possible to make it easier to enter the ball into the ball entering means during the period when the variable pattern is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to support the game for players who do not understand the game content.

<Characteristics H group> (Production just before the end of the time-saving game)
a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a first determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. and a determining means for executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and a determination result by the determining means. dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a specific determination result, and executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine having a bonus game execution means, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on establishment of lottery conditions, and a lottery information dynamically displaying lottery information for indicating a lottery result by the lottery means. a display means, a variable member that is variable from a first state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means to a second state in which it is possible to enter the game ball, and a specific lottery result. a state setting means capable of setting a special state that makes it possible to change the variable member to the second state when the lottery information for indicating that the variable member is changed to the second state; a canceling means for canceling the special condition based on the dynamic display of the identification information being executed a predetermined number of times and the dynamic display period of the predetermined number of times being completed when the state is set; When the dynamic display of the lottery information is started during the state, the timing at which the lottery information is stopped and displayed is based on information that corresponds to the period in which the special state is set, and the performance is executed. A gaming machine H1 comprising: means.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is a win that is advantageous to the player. A system has been proposed in which a game is executed and a high probability state is created in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased depending on the type of the winning game, so that successive winning games are easily executed. In such gaming machines, after a symbol for informing players of the lottery result is displayed in a fluctuating manner on a liquid crystal display device, etc., a symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed in a static manner to inform the player of the lottery result. There is a known game that executes a winning game if it is a hit (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the game is monotonous due to repeated display of changing symbols based on the lottery results, and there is a problem in that the player quickly becomes bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine H1, since the performance is executed based on the state set as the stop display timing of the lottery information that starts dynamically displaying during the special state, when the lottery information is stopped and displayed from the performance. This has the effect of making it possible to recognize the timing of the lottery information, making the player interested in the state when the lottery information is stopped and displayed, and suppressing the problem of early boredom with the game.

In the gaming machine H1, the performance execution means executes a performance corresponding to the dynamic display period of the identification information when the special state is not set, and executes the performance corresponding to the dynamic display period of the identification information based on the special state being set. A gaming machine H2 characterized in that it switches to and executes a performance corresponding to a dynamic display period of lottery information.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, effects are executed by switching the corresponding dynamic display periods between special states and non-special states, so that different effects are provided to the player, and the game It has the effect of increasing the interest of people.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on a game ball entering the first ball entrance means or the second ball entrance means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means are provided. and a storage means for storing a game ball, and the determination means determines whether a game ball is selected from the information stored in the storage means by the second ball entering means based on the satisfaction of a predetermined determination condition. A gaming machine H3, characterized in that a determination is made with priority given to the information acquired based on the fact that a player has entered a ball.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, when there is a plurality of information acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entering means, the plurality of pieces of information are continuously determined. can do. Therefore, judgments that are advantageous to the player can be made consecutively, and the player's motivation to play can be improved.

In the gaming machine H3, the determination condition includes dynamic display of the identification information being stopped at the identification information for indicating the specific determination result, and the undetermined information being stored in the storage means. A gaming machine H4 characterized in that the following is set at least as a condition.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the determination condition is difficult to satisfy during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed, so the storage is performed during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed. It is possible to give the player an opportunity to store information in the means, and there is an effect that the player can play the game efficiently.

The gaming machine H4 includes a regulating means for regulating that the information acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entering means is stored in the storage means when the special state is set. A gaming machine H5 characterized in that it has the following features:

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H4, when a special state is set, information acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entering means is restricted from being stored. Therefore, at the timing when the special condition is set, the identification information for indicating the judgment result based on the information acquired by the ball entering the first ball entering means can be easily displayed dynamically, which is advantageous for the player. This has the effect that it is possible to delay the execution of certain judgments, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the variable member may stop displaying the lottery information indicating the specific lottery result if the special state is set during the lottery period by the lottery means. The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the gaming machine H6 is changed to the second state when the gaming machine H6 is played.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, it can be changed to the second state based on the setting status of the special state during the lottery period, which is advantageous to the player. This has the effect of making it easier to provide a unique state, and increasing the interest of the players.

<Features Group I> (Yamato specifications)
A first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. an information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entry means; a determining means for executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the information acquired based on the entry of a game ball into the second ball entering means; and the determining means a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result according to the above; and a benefit granting system for granting a benefit when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed. A normal state in which a game ball enters the first ball entering means more easily than the second ball entering means, and a second ball entering means than the first ball entering means. and a state setting means capable of switching and setting at least a special state in which a game ball easily enters the means, and when the special state is set by the state setting means, the special state is set. As cancellation conditions for canceling the state, it is possible to separately set the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the first determination and the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the second determination. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is a win that is advantageous to the player. A system has been proposed in which a game is executed and a high probability state is created in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased depending on the type of the winning game, so that successive winning games are easily executed. In such gaming machines, after a symbol for informing players of the lottery result is displayed in a fluctuating manner on a liquid crystal display device, etc., a symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed in a static manner to inform the player of the lottery result. There is a known game that executes a winning game if it is a hit (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the game is monotonous due to repeated display of changing symbols based on the lottery results, and there is a problem in that the player quickly becomes bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine I1, the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the first determination and the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the second determination can be respectively set as conditions for canceling the special state. , it is possible to variably set expectations for the execution of the second determination. That is, if the number of times the identification information corresponding to the first determination is dynamically displayed is set to be large, the player can be given more opportunities to execute the second determination, and conversely, the identification information corresponding to the first determination can be displayed more frequently. If the number of times of dynamic display is set to be large, the chances of the second determination being executed can be set to be small, and the player's interest can be varied.

The gaming machine I1 includes a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and the determination means determines whether the ball has entered the second ball entering means out of the information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the information acquired by the information acquisition means is prioritized and determined based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, determinations are given priority to information for which determinations that are advantageous to the player are executed, so that determinations that are advantageous to the player are executed consecutively. This has the effect of making the game easier to play and increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the special state is set, regulating means makes it difficult for the storage means to store information acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. A gaming machine I3 characterized in that it has:

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, when a special state occurs, the identification information based on the first determination can be easily displayed dynamically, and the second input information can be displayed during the dynamic display period. By letting the game ball enter the ball means, more information can be stored, and after the dynamic display of the first determination is completed, advantageous determinations can be easily executed in succession.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the cancellation condition is such that the number of times the identification information corresponding to the first determination is dynamically displayed is greater than the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed corresponding to the second determination. A gaming machine I4 characterized in that it is a gaming machine I4.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, it is possible to suppress the special state from being canceled due to the execution of only the first judgment that is disadvantageous to the player, and the special state can be suppressed. This has the effect of making it easier to make the second determination advantageous to the player during the state.

In gaming machine I4, gaming machine I5 is characterized in that the cancellation condition is set such that the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the second determination is one.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I4, it is possible to limit the number of times the second judgment advantageous to the player is executed during the special state to one time, so that excessive benefits are not given to the player. This has the effect of being able to suppress the addition of

A gaming machine I6 in any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, wherein the storage means is configured to be able to store up to an upper limit number of pieces of information.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I2 to I5, it is possible to store up to the upper limit of the information for executing the second judgment advantageous to the player, so that the special state ends. It becomes possible to execute the second determination even after the determination is made. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have expectations even after the special state ends.

In the gaming machine I6, the upper limit number is the first upper limit number for the information acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. The gaming machine I7 is characterized in that a second upper limit number of pieces of information is set for the information acquired based on the fact that the player has played the game.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I6, information obtained based on the fact that the game ball entered the first ball entering means and the information that the game ball entered the second ball entering means Since it is possible to set the upper limit of the number of pieces of information that can be stored based on the information acquired based on the first ball entering means, regardless of the number of pieces of information that can be stored based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means. , it is possible to store up to an upper limit number of information acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game in an attempt to cause the game ball to enter the second ball entering means during the special state.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I7, there is provided a variable ball entry means that is variable between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball, and a variable ball entry means that allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to pass through. A gaming machine I8 comprising: a specific area, and the bonus awarding means is configured to be able to award a bonus when a game ball passes through the specific area.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I7, a privilege is given by passing the game ball through a specific area, so that the player becomes interested in the flow of the ball. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine I9 in the gaming machine I8, wherein the special status is set by the status setting unit after the bonus is awarded by the bonus granting unit.

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I8, a special state is set after a privilege is given, so that it is possible to enhance the gameplay by passing a gaming ball through a specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I9, the state setting means has a setting determining means for determining whether or not to set the special state, and the setting determining means is configured to determine whether the first determination or the second determination is made by the determining means. The gaming machine I10 is characterized in that it determines whether or not to set the special state based on the execution.

According to the gaming machine I10, it is determined whether or not to set a special state after the award is given at the timing when the judgment by the judgment means is executed, so depending on the timing at which the game ball passes through the specific area, Whether or not a special state is set is variable. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting the timing at which the game ball passes through the specific area.

A gaming machine I11 in the gaming machine I10, further comprising a suggesting means for suggesting decision information determined by the setting deciding means during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine I11, it is possible to recognize by the suggestion means whether a special state will be set after a privilege is given, so whether to play the game by passing the game ball to a specific area or to move the game ball to a specific area. This has the effect that the player can refer to the content of the suggestion and decide whether to play the game so that the game ball does not pass through.

In any of the gaming machines I7 to I11, the gaming machine I12 is characterized in that the cancellation condition is set to a number of times of dynamic display for the first identification information that is greater than the first upper limit number.

According to the gaming machine I12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I7 to I11, when transitioning to the special state, the information already acquired regarding the ball entering the first ball entering means is changed to the first ball entering means. Even if the upper limit is stored, the special state will not be canceled even if all the information is subjected to the first judgment and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, so there is no opportunity for the second judgment to be executed in the special state. This has the effect of being able to be given by the player and increasing the value of the special state to the player.

<Characteristics J group> (Jackpot performance during consecutive games)
a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a first determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. and a determining means for executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and a determination result by the determining means. a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for displaying the information; and a dynamic display means that is variable from a first state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means to a second state in which it is possible for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a state setting means capable of setting a special state that makes it possible to change the second ball entry means to the second state when a specific condition is met; a canceling means for canceling the special status based on the dynamic display of the identification information being executed when the status is set and the dynamic display period has ended; and a canceling unit for canceling the special status by the canceling unit. determining means for determining whether the special state has been set by the state setting means after being released and before the dynamic display of the identification information is started; and based on the determination result of the determining means, A game machine J1 characterized in that it has a performance execution means capable of executing a performance in a variable manner.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is a win that is advantageous to the player. A system has been proposed in which a game is executed and a high probability state is created in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased depending on the type of the winning game, so that successive winning games are easily executed. In such gaming machines, after a symbol for informing players of the lottery result is displayed in a fluctuating manner on a liquid crystal display device, etc., a symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed in a static manner to inform the player of the lottery result. If it is a win, a winning game is executed and a performance is performed during the winning game (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, with the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there has been a need to further improve the interest of the games.

According to the gaming machine J1, even when the special state is canceled, the performance is changed based on the information as to whether the special state has been set again before the identification information is dynamically displayed, so that the player can It is possible to identify from the performance whether the special state has been set continuously, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine J1, the gaming machine J2 is characterized in that the performance execution means executes the performance in response to dynamic display of the identification information for indicating a determination result based on the second determination.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of identification information to show the determination result based on the second determination advantageous to the player is executed, so that the player This has the effect of increasing expectations regarding the determination result of the second determination.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the performance execution means is configured to be able to execute a performance that can identify information based on the number of times the determination means consecutively determines that the special state has been set. The gaming machine J3.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the number of consecutively set special states can be identified by the performance, so that the player can not only play the game but also set the special state. This has the effect of increasing interest in the game by making the player interested in the number of times the game has been played.

In gaming machines J1 to J3, information for executing the first determination is obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. A gaming machine comprising: an information acquisition means for acquiring information for executing the second determination; and an information storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means. J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines J1 to J3, information is acquired at the timing when a game ball enters the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means, and the information is stored in the information storage means. Since it is memorized, it is possible to save the opportunities judged by the judgment means, and there is an effect that a large amount of profit can be given to the player.

In the gaming machine J4, the performance execution means is configured to be able to vary the performance based on the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means for executing the second determination. The gaming machine J5 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J4, the performance is varied depending on the number of pieces of information for which the second judgment that is advantageous to the player is executed, so that the information reserved for the player can be easily changed. This has the effect of increasing interest in the performance.

<Feature K group>
a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a first determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. and a determining means for executing a second determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and an operation for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means. and a bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that it has a state setting means for setting a gaming state advantageous to the player during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed based on the establishment of a specific condition.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, and a pattern is displayed on a liquid crystal display device etc. to show the lottery results. The symbols are stopped and displayed in such a manner that the lottery result is notified at the timing when the dynamic display period ends. If the notification mode indicated by the symbol is a win, a winning game that is advantageous to the player will be executed, and depending on the type of the winning game, the lottery probability after the winning game will be increased to a high probability state, and the winning game will be played continuously. Some proposals have been made to facilitate implementation. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, if the dynamic display period for showing the lottery results is long, it is disadvantageous for the player as the number of lottery results decreases, and the longer the dynamic display period, the more bored the player becomes. There was a problem where players would get bored with the game. To provide a game machine capable of suppressing the problem of players becoming bored with games.

According to the gaming machine K1, the player is in an advantageous state during the period in which the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, so the player is made to expect that the dynamic display with a long dynamic display period will be executed. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine K1, the determination means executes a determination that the second determination is more advantageous to the player than the first determination, and determines that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means. information acquisition means for acquiring information for performing the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entrance means; , storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means; A gaming machine K2, characterized in that the gaming machine K2 executes a determination on the information that is present.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, even if information is acquired during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, it is stored in the storage means, so that the judgment means has more chances to make a judgment. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, a variable means for changing the second ball entering means from a first state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball to a second state in which it is possible to enter the game ball, and a lottery condition is established. and a lottery information dynamic display means for dynamically displaying lottery information for showing the lottery results of the lottery means, and the state setting means is configured to provide information to the player. When the lottery information indicating the particular lottery result is stopped and displayed as an advantageous gaming state, the variable means can change the game state to the second state. Game machine K3 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, when a special state is reached, the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entering means, and the gameplay can be varied, increasing the interest of the game. It has the effect of increasing the

In the gaming machine K3, when a gaming state advantageous to the player is set by the state setting means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the end of the dynamic display period, the A gaming machine K4 characterized in that it has a canceling means for canceling a gaming state advantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3, there is an advantageous effect for the player based on the completion of the dynamic display of identification information that was executed when a gaming state advantageous to the player is set. Since the game state is canceled, it is possible to make the player interested in the timing of the end of the dynamic display of the identification information, and it is possible to suppress the problem of players getting bored even if a long dynamic display period is set. There is an effect.

Any of the gaming machines K1 to K4 has a first flow path through which the game ball can flow down, and a second flow path through which the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path has difficulty flowing down, and the first entering ball The means are respectively disposed in the second flow path and at least at a position where a game ball that has flown down the first flow path can enter, and the second ball entry means is disposed in the second flow path. A gaming machine K5 is characterized in that it is

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, even when a game is played in an attempt to cause the game ball to enter the second ball entering means, the game ball does not enter the first ball entering means. This configuration has the effect that it is possible to restrict a state in which only decisions that are advantageous to the player are likely to be executed.

Any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5 is provided with an effect execution means for executing an effect corresponding to the dynamic display period of the identification information when a gaming state advantageous to the player is set. The gaming machine K6 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K5, when a gaming state advantageous to the player is set, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display period is executed, so that the game is improved. It has the effect of increasing interest.

The gaming machine K6 is characterized in that the performance executed by the performance executing means includes a performance that urges the game ball to enter the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. Game machine K7.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K6, the game ball can be entered into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means during a gaming state advantageous to the player, and the first determination or the second ball entering means can be made. Since opportunities to make decisions can be easily given, there is an effect that the game can be played efficiently.

In any of the gaming machines described above, gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of the above gaming machines, gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of the above gaming machines, gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is a win that is advantageous to the player. A system has been proposed in which a game is executed and a high probability state is created in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased depending on the type of the winning game, so that successive winning games are easily executed. In such gaming machines, after a symbol for informing players of the lottery result is displayed in a fluctuating manner on a liquid crystal display device, etc., a symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed in a static manner to inform the player of the lottery result. If it is a win, a winning game is executed and a performance is performed during the winning game.
However, there is a need for further improvement in interest.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in playing games.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 includes a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a second ball entering means which is different from the first ball entering means. A first determination is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball means, and a first determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball means. 2. A determination means for executing a determination, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, and a first state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a special state in which the second ball entering means can be changed to the second state when a specific condition is satisfied; and a state setting means that can set the special state, and when the special state is set by the state setting means, dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the end of the dynamic display period, the special state is set. A canceling means for canceling the state, and after the special state is canceled by the canceling means, it is determined whether the special state is set by the state setting means before dynamic display of the identification information is started. The present invention has a discriminating means for discriminating, and an effect executing means capable of varying and executing an effect based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the effect execution means executes the effect in response to the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result based on the second determination. It is something to be carried out.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, in which the effect executing means identifies information based on the number of times the special state is determined to be set in succession by the determining means. It is configured so that possible performances can be executed.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means. A first determination is executed based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball, and a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means; It is possible to set a variable means for changing the state to a second state in which ball entry is possible, and a special state that allows the second ball entry means to be varied to the second state when a specific condition is satisfied. a state setting means; and when the special state is set by the state setting means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and the special state is canceled based on the end of the dynamic display period. a canceling unit; and a determining unit for determining whether the special status is set by the status setting unit after the special status is canceled by the canceling unit and before dynamic display of the identification information is started. and a performance execution means that can vary and execute the performance based on the determination result of the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the effect execution means executes the effect in response to the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result based on the second determination. Therefore, in addition to dynamically displaying the identification information corresponding to the second determination, a performance is also performed, which has the effect of making the player more interested in the second determination.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the effect execution means is configured to be able to execute an effect that can be identified based on the number of times the discrimination means has determined that the special state has been set in succession. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of consecutively set special states, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
64a Left first ball entrance (first ball entrance means)
64b Right first ball entrance (first ball entrance means)
113 Audio lamp control device (direction start means)
640 Second ball entry port (second ball entry means)
640a Electric accessories (variable means)
S402 First determination means, second determination means S406 Dynamic display means S712 Storage means S1815 Game state setting means

Claims (1)

a first ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
a first determining means capable of executing a first determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means;
a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means;
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means;
a storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of the information acquired by the acquisition means;
a second determination means capable of executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the information stored in the storage means when a determination condition is met;
dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the first determination by the first determination means or the result of the second determination by the second determination means; ,
Privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game when the dynamic display means stops displaying the identification information for indicating a specific result of the first determination or a specific result of the second determination. and,
a variable means that is variable between a first state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A game that can set a first game state and a second game state in which the variable means is variably controlled so that the game ball enters the second ball entering means more easily than in the first game state. a state setting means;
A gaming machine comprising: performance start means capable of starting a performance based on the dynamic display of the identification information during the second gaming state,
The gaming state setting means determines that an end condition is established based on a first setting for setting the second gaming state after the bonus game is executed, and dynamic display of the identification information during the second gaming state. a second setting of setting the first gaming state when
The performance start means provides an end suggestion for suggesting the end of the second gaming state by using, as the performance, a performance period that includes at least a dynamic display period corresponding to the dynamic display in which the end condition can be satisfied. It is possible to start the performance,
The bonus game executing means selects one bonus game from among a plurality of bonus games including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game. is feasible and
The gaming machine is
In a case where the bonus game has the right to be executed at a specific timing during the period in which the termination suggestion performance is being executed, the bonus game may be executed after the specific timing. It is possible to determine a mode of the performance that is different from the mode of the performance that would be executed if the user does not have the right to execute it,
As a situation during the production period, there is a first situation in which the player can understand that it is impossible to newly acquire the right to execute the bonus game, and a first situation that makes it possible for the player to understand that the right to execute the bonus game cannot be newly acquired; and a second situation in which it is difficult for the player to understand that the player cannot newly acquire the right to play the game;
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to determine, as the presentation mode, a mode that allows the player to understand that he/she has the right to execute the second bonus game.

Images